owner.ford.com ford.ca October 2016 First Printing Owners Manual
About this manual. Thank you for choosing Ford. ... Note: This manual describes a range of product features and options, sometimes before they are generally available.
DM5J 19A321 AB | December 2012 | Third Printing | Owner's Manual | Focus | Litho in U.S.A. fordowner.com ford.ca. 2013 FO. CUS. Owner's Manual.
fordowner.com
ford.ca
2013 FOCUS Owner's Manual
2013 FOCUS Owner's Manual
| | | | | DM5J 19A321 AB December 2012 Third Printing Owner's Manual Focus Litho in U.S.A.
Table of Contents
1
Introduction
9
Child Safety
17
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Child seat positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Installing child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Child safety locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Safety Belts
33
Fastening the safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Safety belt height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Safety belt-minder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Child restraint and safety belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Personal Safety System
42
Supplementary Restraints System
43
Driver and passenger airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Side curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Crash sensors and airbag indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Airbag disposal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Keys and Remote Control
55
General information on radio frequencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Replacing a lost key or remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
2
Table of Contents
MyKey
64
Settings, MyKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Creating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
System status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Remote start, MyKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Troubleshooting, MyKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Locks
70
Locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Trunk release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Interior luggage compartment release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Security
78
SecuriLock® passive anti-theft system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Steering Wheel
81
Adjusting the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Wipers and Washers
85
Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Windshield washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Rear-window wiper and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Lighting
88
Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Autolamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Instrument lighting dimmer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Headlamp exit delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Daytime running lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Front fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Direction indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Interior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Ambient lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Table of Contents
3
Windows and Mirrors
94
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Interior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Instrument Cluster
101
Gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Warning lamps and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Audible warnings and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Information Displays
107
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Information messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Audio System
122
AM/FM stereo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
AM/FM/CD with SYNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
AM/FM/CD/SIRIUS Satellite Radio with SYNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
AM/FM stereo with single CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Auxiliary input jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Satellite radio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Climate Control
141
Manual heating and air conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Dual automatic temperature control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Cabin air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
4
Table of Contents
Seats
151
Sitting in the correct position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Manual seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Power seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Auxiliary Power Points
161
Storage Compartments
162
Overhead console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Starting and Stopping the Engine
163
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Keyless starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Fuel and Refueling
168
Fuel quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Running out of fuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Transmission
179
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Hill start assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Brakes
188
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Hints on driving with anti-lock brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Table of Contents
5
Traction Control
190
Traction ControlTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Stability Control
191
AdvanceTrac® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Parking Aids
193
Sensing system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Active park assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Rear-view camera system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Cruise Control
205
Driving Aids
207
Eco Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Load Carrying
210
Luggage cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Vehicle loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Towing
217
Trailer towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Wrecker towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Recreational towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Driving Hints
221
Economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Roadside Emergencies
225
Getting roadside assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Hazard warning flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Fuel cut-off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Jump-starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
6
Table of Contents
Customer Assistance
230
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Reporting safety defects (Canada only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Fuses
238
Changing a fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Fuse specification chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Maintenance
248
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Opening and closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Under hood overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Engine oil check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Engine coolant check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Automatic transmission fluid check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Brake fluid check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Power steering fluid check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Fuel filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Washer fluid check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Changing the vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Checking the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Air filter(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Adjusting the headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Removing a headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Bulb specification chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Table of Contents
7
Vehicle Care
270
Cleaning products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Cleaning the exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Waxing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Repairing minor paint damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Cleaning the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Cleaning the windows and wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Cleaning the instrument panel and instrument cluster lens . . . . . . .274
Cleaning leather seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Cleaning the alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Vehicle storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Wheels and Tires
279
Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Changing a road wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Technical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Wheel lug nut torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Capacities and Specifications
305
Engine drivebelt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Maintenance product specifications and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Vehicle certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Transmission code designation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Accessories
312
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Ford Extended Service Plan
314
Scheduled Maintenance
317
Normal scheduled maintenance and log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
8
Table of Contents
SYNC®
334
Pairing your phone for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
911 AssistTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Vehicle Health Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
380
Voice recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Listening to music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Phone features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Climate features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Navigation system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Appendices
460
Index
479
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2012
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Introduction
9
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We recommend that you take some time to get to know your vehicle by reading this manual. The more that you know about it, the greater the safety and pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING: Always drive with due care and attention when using and operating the controls and features on your vehicle.
Note: This manual describes a range of product features and options, sometimes before they are generally available. Therefore, you may find options in this manual that are not found on your vehicle.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual may be used for different models, so they may appear different than your vehicle. However, the essential information in the illustrations is always correct.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable laws and regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle. It is an integral part of the vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a component as left-hand side or right-hand side. The side is determined when facing forward in the seat.
A
A. Right-hand side
B. Left-hand side
B
Protecting the Environment You must play your part in protecting the environment. Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps toward this aim.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
10
Introduction
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
WARNING: You risk death or serious injury to yourself and others if you do not follow the instruction highlighted by the warning symbol.
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Symbol
Description Safety alert
Avoid smoking, flames, or sparks Brake fluid non petroleum base Check fuel cap
Child seat tether anchor
Symbol
Description
See Owner's Manual
Symbol
Battery
Brake system
Child Safety Door Lock and Unlock
Cruise control
Description Anti-lock braking system Battery acid
Cabin air filter
Child seat lower anchor
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine oil
Engine coolant
Explosive gas
Engine coolant temperature
Fan warning
Fasten safety belt
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Introduction
11
Symbol Description Fuel pump reset
Heated rear window
Lighting control
Panic alarm
Symbol
Description Fuse compartment
Interior luggage compartment release Low tire pressure warning Parking aid system
Symbol
Description Hazard warning flasher Jack
Maintain correct fluid level Parking brake system
Power steering fluid
Service engine soon
Power windows front and rear
Side airbag
Power window lockout
Stability control
Windshield defrost and demist
Windshield washer and wiper
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle. Additionally, when your vehicle is in for service or repair, Ford Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
12
Introduction
may access or share among them data for vehicle improvement purposes. For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC® Vehicle Health Report, you consent that certain diagnostic information may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be used for any purpose. See the SYNC® chapter for more information.
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle; this data will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
· How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
· Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
· How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the brake pedal;
· How fast the vehicle was travelling;
· Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data or information (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded (see limitations regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, Directions and Information privacy below). However, parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have such special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Ford Motor Company
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Introduction
13
and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent, unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement, other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada.
Note: Including to the extent that any law pertaining to Event Data Recorders applies to SYNC® or its features, please note the following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist may, through any paired and connected cell phone, disclose to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or, in certain vehicles, the activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of being used to electronically or verbally provide to 911 operators the vehicle location (such as latitude and longitude), and/or other details about the vehicle or crash or personal information about the occupants to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not activate the 911 Assist feature. See your SYNC® chapter for more information.
Additionally, when you connect to Traffic, Directions and Information (if equipped, U.S. only), the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle's current location, travel direction, and speed ("vehicle travel information"), only to help provide you with the directions, traffic reports, or business searches that you request. If you do not want Ford or its vendors to receive this information, do not activate the service. Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses to provide you with this information do not store your vehicle travel information. For more information, see Traffic, Directions and Information, Terms and Conditions. See your SYNC® chapter for more information.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING: Some constituents of engine exhaust, certain vehicle components, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
14
Introduction
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
Note: Certain components in your vehicle, such as airbag modules, safety belt pretensioners, and remote control batteries, may contain perchlorate material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for more information.
FORD CREDIT (U.S. ONLY)
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing and lease plans to help you acquire your vehicle. If you have financed or leased your vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for your business.
For your convenience, we offer a number of ways to contact us, as well as help manage your account.
Phone: 1-800-727-7000
For more information regarding Ford Credit, as well as access to Account Manager, please go to www.fordcredit.com.
REPLACEMENT PARTS RECOMMENDATION
Your vehicle has been built to the highest standards using quality parts. We recommend that you demand the use of genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever your vehicle requires scheduled maintenance or repair. You can clearly identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or Motorcraft branding on the parts or their packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure that your vehicle provides years of service is to have it maintained in line with our recommendations using parts that conform to the specifications detailed in this owner's manual. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine Ford replacement collision parts meet our stringent requirements for fit, finish, structural integrity, corrosion protection and dent resistance. During vehicle development, we validate that these parts deliver the intended level of protection as a whole system. A great way to know for sure you are getting this level of protection is to use genuine Ford replacement collision parts.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Introduction
15
Warranty on Replacement Parts Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts are the only replacement parts that benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage caused to your vehicle as a result of the failure of non-Ford parts may not be covered by the Ford Warranty. For additional information, see the terms and conditions of the Ford Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by your vehicle's New Vehicle Limited Warranty, see the warranty information that is provided to you along with your owner's manual.
Special Instructions For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNING: Please read the Supplementary Restraints System chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
Using your vehicle with a snowplow Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing. Your vehicle is not equipped with a snowplowing package.
Using your vehicle as an ambulance Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance. Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation Package.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
16
Introduction
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT
Using mobile communications equipment is becoming increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However, you must not compromise your own or others' safety when using such equipment. Mobile communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile communication equipment includes, but is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers, portable email devices, text messaging devices and portable two-way radios.
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that you use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving, encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
EXPORT UNIQUE (NONUNITED STATES/CANADA) VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the features and options that are described in this owner's manual. A market unique supplement may be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features, recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This owner's manual is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets. Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built for Export. See this owner's manual for all other required information and warnings.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Child Safety
17
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children.
WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight. Child safety restraints must be bought separately from your vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The recommendations for safety restraints are based on probable child height, age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety organizations, or are the minimum requirements of law. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician and consulting your pediatrician to make sure your child seat is appropriate for your child, and is compatible with and properly installed in your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST, contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or locate NHTSA on the internet. In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information, contact your provincial ministry of transportation, or locate your local St. John Ambulance office by searching for St. John Ambulance on the internet, or Transport Canada at 18003330371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height, age, and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child size, height, weight, or age
Recommended restraint type
Infants or Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or Use a child safety seat
toddlers less (generally age four or younger). (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
18
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child size, height, weight, or age
Recommended restraint type
Small Children who have outgrown or no Use a belt-positioning
children longer properly fit in a child safety booster seat.
seat (generally children who are less
than 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall, are
greater than age four (4) and less
than age twelve (12), and between
40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and
upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by your child restraint
manufacturer).
Larger Children who have outgrown or no Use a vehicle safety belt
children longer properly fit in a
having the lap belt snug
belt-positioning booster seat
and low across the hips,
(generally children who are at least shoulder belt centered
4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater across the shoulder and
than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) chest, and seat back
if recommended by child restraint upright.
manufacturer).
· You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and toddlers in the United States and Canada.
· Many states and provinces require that small children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms). Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements about the safety of children in your vehicle.
· When possible, always properly restrain children twelve (12) years of age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in a front seating position. See Front Passenger Sensing System in the Supplementary Restraints System chapter for more information.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
CHILD SEATS
Child Safety
19
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler seat) for infants, toddlers or children weighing 40 pounds (18 kilograms) or less (generally age four or younger).
CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the vehicle seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back. When possible, all children age 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the largest child in the front seat.
WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child's size, height, weight, or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by your vehicle manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized, is inappropriate for your child's height, age, or weight or does not properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while your vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a crash, which may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a crash.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
20
Child Safety
WARNING: Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster seat. These objects may become projectiles in a crash or sudden stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder belt under a child's arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Do not leave children or pets unattended in your vehicle.
Restraint Child
Type
Weight
Rear-facing Up to
child seat 48 lb
(21 kg)
Forward- Up to
facing
48 lb
child seat (21 kg)
Forward- Over
facing
48 lb
child seat (21 kg)
Use any attachment method as indicated below
by X.
LATCH LATCH Safety Safety Safety
(lower (lower belt belt and belt
anchors anchors and LATCH only
and top only) top (lower
tether
tether anchors
anchor)
anchor and top
tether
anchor)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Note: The child seat must rest tightly against the vehicle seat upon which it is installed. It may be necessary to lift or remove the head restraint. See the Seats chapter for information on head restraints.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Child Safety
21
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child's arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a crash.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child safety seat (generally children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four (4) and less than age twelve (12), and between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and 80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to 100 pounds (45 kilograms) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer). Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight (8), a height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions when the child is seated without a booster seat.
· Can the child sit all the way back against their vehicle seat with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat cushion?
· Can the child sit without slouching?
· Does the lap belt rest low across the hips? · Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest? · Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
22
Child Safety
Types of Booster Seats
· Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a removable shield, remove the shield. If a vehicle seating position has a low seat back or no head restraint, a backless booster seat may place your child's head (as measured at the tops of the ears) above the top of the seat. In this case, move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back or head restraint and lap and shoulder belts, or consider using a high back booster seat.
· High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child's head, a high back booster seat would be a better choice.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Child Safety
23
Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The following drawings compare the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The drawings also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child's hips.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat upon which it is being used, placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer's instructions.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
24
Child Safety
INSTALLING CHILD SEATS Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the way back.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint, and depending on the child restraint design, you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies or LATCH lower anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained.
When installing a child safety seat with combination lap and shoulder belts:
· Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position. · Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap
and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle.
· Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button, to prevent accidental unbuckling.
· Place the vehicle seat upon which the child seat will be installed in the upright position.
· Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. See Step 5. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Child Safety
25
Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with combination lap and shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward-facing child seat, the steps are the same for installing a rear-facing child seat.
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together.
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together, route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions. Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
26
Child Safety
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage. Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it.
5. To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is available on the front passenger and rear seats. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. You should not be able to pull more belt out. If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt. Force the seat down with extra weight, for example, by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling up on the shoulder belt in order to force slack from the belt.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Child Safety
27
This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the extra weight of the child is added to the child restraint. It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean toward the buckle will additionally help to remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). See Using Tether Straps later in this chapter.
10. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place.
To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back. There should be no more than 1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of movement for proper installation. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child restraint is properly installed. In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
WARNING: Never attach two child safety seats to the same anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint, and depending on the child restraint design, you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies or LATCH lower anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
28
Child Safety
The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors located where your vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet (called the seat bight) and one top tether anchor located behind that seating position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH equipped seating positions in your vehicle. This type of attachment method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat, however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat. For forward-facing child seats, the top tether strap must also be attached to the proper top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has been provided with your child seat.
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child seat installation at the seating positions marked with the child seat symbol.
The LATCH anchors are located at the rear section of the rear seat between the cushion and seat back below the symbols as shown. Follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions to properly install a child seat with LATCH attachments.
Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps. See Using Tether Straps in this chapter. Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors shown.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Child Safety
29
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the Outboard Seating Positions (Center Seating Use)
Note: The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 inches. (28 centimeters) center to center. Do not use LATCH lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child seat manufacturer's instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at least as far apart as those in this vehicle.
The lower anchors at the center of the second row rear seat are spaced 18 inches (46 centimeters) apart. A child seat with rigid LATCH attachments cannot be installed at the center seating position. LATCH compatible child seats (with attachments on belt webbing) can only be used at this seating position provided that the child seat manufacturer's instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated. Do not attach a child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent child seat is attached to that anchor.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug the child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to your vehicle. The seat should move less than one inch when you do this for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases.
Combining Safety Belt and LATCH Lower Anchors for Attaching Child Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors may be attached first, provided a proper installation is achieved. Attach the tether strap afterward, if included with the child seat.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor. Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
30
Child Safety
The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether strap anchors located behind the seats as described below.
Four door: The tether anchors in your vehicle are located under a cover marked with the tether anchor symbol (shown with title).
Five door: The tether anchors in your vehicle are located on the back panel of the rear seat.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions (shown from top view):
Perform the following steps to install a child safety seat with tether anchors:
Note: If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Four door
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
For outboard seating positions, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts. For the center seating positions, route the tether strap over the top of the head restraint.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Child Safety
31
3. Open the tether anchor cover.
4. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown. If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a collision.
5. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap, and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, Ford also recommends its use.
Five door 1. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
For outboard seating positions, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts. For the center seating position, route the tether strap over the top of the head restraint.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
32
Child Safety
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown.
If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a collision.
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap, and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, Ford also recommends its use.
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside.
The childproof locks are located on the rear edge of each rear door and must be set separately for each door.
· Driver side: turn counterclockwise to lock and clockwise to unlock.
· Passenger side: turn clockwise to lock and counterclockwise to unlock.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Safety Belts
33
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they can be properly restrained.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly wear your safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety belt.
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
34
Safety Belts
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. Failure to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
WARNING: Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them.
WARNING: Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an accident.
All seating positions in this vehicle have lap and shoulder safety belts. All occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided.
The safety belt system consists of: · lap and shoulder safety belts. · shoulder safety belt with automatic locking mode, (except driver
safety belt). · height adjuster at the front outboard seating positions · safety belt pretensioner at the front outboard seating positions. · belt tension sensor at the front outboard passenger seating position.
· Safety belt warning light and chime. See Safety belt warning light and indicator chime later in this chapter.
· Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator. See Crash sensors and airbag indicator in the Supplemental Restraints System chapter.
The safety belt pretensioners at the front seating positions are designed to tighten the safety belts when activated. In frontal and near-frontal crashes, the safety belt pretensioners may be activated alone or, if the crash is of sufficient severity, together with the front airbags. The pretensioners may also activate when a side curtain airbag is deployed.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Safety Belts
35
FASTENING THE SAFETY BELTS
The front outboard and rear safety restraints in your vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts.
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, press the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle.
Restraint of Pregnant Women
WARNING: Always ride and drive with your seat back upright and the safety belt properly fastened. The lap portion of the safety belt should fit snug and be positioned low across the hips. The shoulder portion of the safety belt should be positioned across the chest. Pregnant women should also follow this practice. See the following figure.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
36
Safety Belts
Pregnant women should always wear their safety belts. The lap belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt should be positioned low across the hips below the belly and worn as tight as comfort will allow. The shoulder belt should be positioned to cross the middle of the shoulder and the center of the chest.
Safety Belt Locking Modes
WARNING: After any vehicle crash, the safety belt system at all passenger seating positions must be checked by an authorized dealer to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all safety belts should be checked for proper function.
WARNING: BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if the safety belt assembly automatic locking retractor feature or any other safety belt function is not operating properly when checked by an authorized dealer. Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in crashes.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts. The driver safety belt has the first type of locking mode, and the front outboard passenger and rear seat safety belts have both types of locking modes described as follows:
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of about 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock if the webbing is pulled out too quickly. If this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and pull webbing out again in a slow and controlled manner.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Safety Belts
37
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat, except a booster, is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions. Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible. See the Child Safety chapter.
How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is pulled out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Safety Belt Extension Assembly
WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso.
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, you can obtain a safety belt extension assembly from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
38
Safety Belts
SAFETY BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
WARNING: Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and increase the risk of injury in a crash.
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height:
1. Squeeze the buttons and slide the height adjuster up or down.
2. Release the buttons and pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place.
SAFETY BELT WARNING LIGHT AND INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an audible warning will sound if the driver's safety belt has not been fastened when the vehicle's ignition is turned on.
Conditions of Operation
If...
The driver's safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the on position...
The driver's safety belt is buckled while the indicator light is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding...
The driver's safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the on position...
Then... The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-2 minutes and the warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The safety belt warning light and warning chime turn off.
The safety belt warning light and indicator chime remain off.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Safety Belts
39
SAFETY BELT-MINDER®
This feature supplements the safety belt warning function by providing additional reminders by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning light when the driver's or front passenger's seat is occupied and the safety belt is unbuckled.
The system uses information from the front passenger sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating the Belt-Minder® feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat, warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined by the front passenger sensing system.
If the Belt-Minder® warnings have expired (warnings for about five minutes) for one occupant (driver or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the Belt-Minder® feature.
If...
Then...
The driver's and front
The Belt-Minder® feature will not
passenger's safety belts are
activate.
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position or less than
1-2 minutes have elapsed since
the ignition switch has been
turned to on...
The driver's or front
The Belt-Minder® feature is activated
passenger's safety belt is not - the safety belt warning light
buckled when the vehicle has illuminates and the warning chime
reached at least 6 mph
sounds for six seconds every
(9.7 km/h) and 1-2 minutes 30 seconds, repeating for about five
have elapsed since the ignition minutes or until the safety belts are
switch has been turned to on... buckled.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
40
Safety Belts
If...
Then...
The driver's or front
The Belt-Minder® feature is activated
passenger's safety belt becomes - the safety belt warning light
unbuckled for about one
illuminates and the warning chime
minute while the vehicle is
sounds for six seconds every
traveling at least 6 mph
30 seconds, repeating for about five
(9.7 km/h) and more than
minutes or until the safety belts are
1-2 minutes have elapsed since buckled.
the ignition switch has been
turned to on...
Deactivating and Activating the Belt-Minder® Feature (If Equipped)
WARNING: While the design allows you to deactivate your Belt-Minder®, this system is designed to improve your chances of being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you leave the Belt-Minder® system activated for yourself and others who may use the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate or activate the Belt-Minder® feature while driving the vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder® are deactivated and activated independently. When deactivating or activating one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will terminate the process.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the programming procedure.
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder® features can be deactivated or activated by performing the following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that: · the parking brake is set · the transmission selector lever is in position P (automatic
transmission) or in neutral (manual transmission) · the ignition is off · the driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled
1. Turn the ignition on. DO NOT START THE ENGINE.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off (about one minute).
· Once the next step is started, the procedure must be completed within 60 seconds.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Safety Belts
41
3. For the seating position being disabled, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt four times at a moderate speed, ending in the unbuckled state.
· After Step 3, the safety belt warning light will turn on.
4. While the safety belt warning light is on, buckle and then unbuckle the safety belt.
· After Step 4, the safety belt warning light will flash three times for confirmation.
· This will disable the Belt-Minder feature for that seating position if it is currently enabled.
· This will enable the Belt-Minder® feature for that seating position if it is currently disabled.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND SAFETY BELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seat back (if equipped), child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be inspected after a crash. Read the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information specific to the child restraint.
Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a crash be replaced. However, if the crash was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a crash should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, see Cleaning the Interior in the Vehicle Care chapter.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
42
Personal Safety System
PERSONAL SAFETY SYSTEMTM
The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle's Personal Safety System consists of:
· Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints. · Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners, energy management
retractors (first row only), and safety belt usage sensors.
· Driver's seat position sensor. · Front passenger sensing system. · Passenger airbag off and on indicator lamp. · Front crash severity sensors. · Restraints control module with impact and safing sensors. · Restraint system warning light and backup tone. · The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position sensor, front passenger sensing system, and indicator lights.
How Does the Personal Safety System Work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your vehicle's safety devices according to crash severity and occupant conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides information to the restraints control module. During a crash, the restraints control module may activate the safety belt pretensioners and/or either one or both stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash severity and occupant conditions.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Supplementary Restraints System
43
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Airbags do not inflate slowly or gently, and the risk of injury from a deploying airbag is the greatest close to the trim covering the airbag module.
WARNING: All occupants of your vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided.
WARNING: Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
WARNING: Never place your arm over the airbag module as a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the way back.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: Several airbag system components get hot after inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If the airbag has deployed, the airbag will not function again and must be replaced immediately. If the airbag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint system and are designed to work with the safety belts to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly; there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a cloud of harmless powdery residue if an airbag deploys. This is normal.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
44
Supplementary Restraints System
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation. After airbag deployment, it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant. This may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (for example, baking soda) that result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of the residue is toxic. While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries, contact with a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility as a result of the noise associated with a deploying airbag. Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries, such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not required.
SOS POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEMTM The system flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag equipped on your vehicle, such as front, side, side curtain or Safety Canopy®.
The horn and lamps will turn off when: · the hazard control button is pressed · the panic button (if equipped) is pressed on the remote entry
transmitter, or · your vehicle runs out of power.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER AIRBAGS
WARNING: Never place your arm or any objects over an airbag module. Placing your arm over a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries. Objects placed on or over the airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the way back.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Supplementary Restraints System
45
The driver and front passenger airbags will deploy during significant frontal and near-frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag system consists of:
· driver and passenger airbag modules · crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator later in this chapter.
· front passenger sensing system
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Adjustment
WARNING: The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches (25 centimeters) between an occupant's chest and the driver airbag module.
To properly position yourself away from the airbag:
· Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.
· Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it is very important that they continue to sit properly. Properly seated occupants sit upright, lean against the seat back, and center themselves on the seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
46
Supplementary Restraints System
Children and Airbags
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the way back.
Children must always be properly restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a crash.
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM
WARNING: Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting in serious injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of possible serious injury: Do not stow objects in seat back map pocket (if equipped) or hang objects off seat back if a child is in the front passenger seat. Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the seat and the center console (if equipped). Check the passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp for proper airbag Status. Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the passenger seat sensing system.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Supplementary Restraints System
47
WARNING: Any alteration/modification to the front passenger seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system.
This system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger's seat and safety belt to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the front passenger's frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
PASS AIRBAG OFF
The front passenger sensing system uses a pass airbag off indicator which will illuminate and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled.
The indicator lamp is located under the climate controls. The indicator lamp will illuminate for a short period of time when the ignition is turned to the on position to confirm it is functional.
Note: When the passenger airbag off light is illuminated, the passenger (seat mounted) side airbag may be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not inflate) the front passenger's frontal airbag when the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or a rear facing infant seat, a forward-facing child restraint, or a booster seat is detected. Even with this technology, parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly restrain children in the rear seat. The sensor also turns off the passenger front airbag and seat-mounted side airbag when the passenger seat is empty.
· When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate) the front passenger frontal airbag, the passenger airbag status indicator will illuminate the OFF lamp and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled.
· If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not lit, then turn the vehicle off, remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
48
Supplementary Restraints System
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate) the front passenger's frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
· When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger frontal airbag (may inflate), the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger's seat, but the pass airbag off indicator lamp is lit, it is possible that the person isn't sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
· Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seat back in the full upright position.
· Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the person's legs comfortably extended.
· Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person and enable the passenger's frontal airbag.
· If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, the person should be advised to ride in the rear seat.
Occupant
Empty Child Adult
Pass Airbag Off Indicator Lamp Unlit Lit Unlit
Passenger Airbag
Disabled Disabled Enabled
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it's very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.
If you think that the status of the passenger airbag off indicator lamp is incorrect, check for the following:
· Objects lodged underneath the seat
· Objects between the seat cushion and the center console (if equipped)
· Objects hanging off the seat back
· Objects stowed in the seatback map pocket (if equipped)
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Supplementary Restraints System
49
· Objects placed on the occupant's lap · Cargo interference with the seat · Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat · Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat
The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the passenger sensing system. The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or lighter due to the conditions described in the list above.
To know if the front passenger sensing system is operating properly, see Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator later in this chapter.
If the airbag readiness lamp is lit, do the following:
The driver or adult passengers should check for any objects that may be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat.
If objects are lodged or cargo is interfering with the seat; please take the following steps to remove the obstruction:
· Pull the vehicle over. · Turn the vehicle off. · Driver or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged
underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat.
· Remove the obstruction(s) (if found). · Restart the vehicle. · Wait at least two minutes and verify that the airbag readiness lamp is
no longer illuminated
· If the airbag readiness lamp remains illuminated, this may or may/not be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system.
DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle immediately to an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer Assistance section of this Owner's Manual.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
50
Supplementary Restraints System
KNEE AIRBAG
A driver's knee airbag is located under or within the instrument panel. During a crash, the restraints control module may activate the driver's knee airbag based on crash severity and occupant conditions. Under certain crash and occupant conditions, the driver's knee airbag may deploy but the driver's front airbag may not activate. As with front and side airbags, it is important to be properly seated and restrained to reduce the risk of death or serious injury.
To know if the knee airbag is operating properly, see Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator in this chapter.
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag cover, on the side of the seat backs (of the front seats), or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seat back.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag, its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag, as you could be seriously injured or killed. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: If the side airbag has deployed, the airbag will not function again. The side airbag system (including the seat) must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Supplementary Restraints System
51
The side airbags are located on the outboard side of the seat backs of the front seats. In certain lateral crashes, the airbag on the side affected by the crash will be inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided occupants in side impact crashes.
The system consists of the following:
· a tag on the seat back indicating that side airbags are found on your vehicle
· side airbags located inside the seat back of the driver and front passenger seats.
· crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator later in this chapter.
· front passenger sensing system. Note: The passenger sensing system will deactivate the passenger seat-mounted side airbag if it detects an empty passenger seat.
The design and development of the side airbag system included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags.
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the headliner at the siderail that may come into contact with a deploying side curtain airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The curtain airbag could injure you as it deploys from the headliner.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
52
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the side curtain airbags, its fuses, the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the headliner on a vehicle containing side curtain airbags as you could be seriously injured or killed. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system and side curtain airbag is provided. Failure to properly wear your safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the side curtain airbag.
WARNING: If the side curtain airbags have deployed, the side curtain airbags will not function again. The side curtain airbags (including the A, B and C pillar trim and headliner) must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer. If the side curtain airbag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash.
A side curtain airbag will deploy during significant side crashes. The airbags are mounted to the roof side-rail sheet metal, behind the headliner, above each row of seats. In certain lateral crashes, the side curtain airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle will be activated. The side curtain airbags are designed to inflate between the side window area and occupants to further enhance protection provided in side impact crashes.
The system consists of:
· side curtain airbags located above the trim panels over the front and rear side windows identified by a label or wording on the headliner or roof-pillar trim.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Supplementary Restraints System
53
· a flexible headliner which opens above the side doors to allow side air curtain deployment.
· crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator. See Crash sensors and Airbag Indicator later in this chapter.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the back seats. The side curtain airbags will not interfere with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along the side window opening.
The design and development of the side curtain airbags included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side curtain airbags.
CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of your vehicle (including frame, bumper, front end body structure and tow hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system, increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of your vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and occupant sensors which provide information to the restraints control module which deploys (activates) the front safety belt pretensioners, driver airbag, passenger airbag, knee airbag, seat mounted side airbags, and the side curtain airbags. Based on the type of crash (frontal impact or side impact) the restraints control module will deploy the appropriate safety devices.
The restraints control module also monitors the readiness of the above safety devices plus the crash and occupant sensors. The readiness of the safety system is indicated by a warning indicator light in the instrument cluster or by a backup tone if the warning light is not working. See the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
54
Supplementary Restraints System
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
· The readiness light will either flash or stay lit. · The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.
· A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the supplemental restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a crash.
The safety belt pretensioners and the airbag supplemental restraint system are designed to activate when the vehicle sustains longitudinal deceleration sufficient to cause the restraints control module to deploy a safety device.
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners or front airbags did not activate for both front seat occupants in a crash does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the restraints control module determined the accident conditions (such as crash severity, belt usage) were not appropriate to activate these safety devices.
· Front airbags are designed to activate only in frontal and near-frontal crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts) unless the crash causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
· The safety belt pretensioners are designed to activate in frontal and near-frontal crashes, and may also activate when a side curtain deploys.
· The driver's knee airbag may deploy based on crash severity and occupant conditions.
· Side airbags and side curtain airbags are designed to inflate in side-impact crashes, not rollovers, rear impacts, frontal or near-frontal crashes, unless the crash causes sufficient lateral deceleration.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Keys and Remote Control
55
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The remote control allows you to: · remotely lock or unlock the vehicle doors · arm and disarm the anti-theft system · remotely open the luggage compartment · unlock the doors without actively using a key or remote control
(intelligent access only).
GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term IC before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 feet (10 meters). Vehicles with the remote start feature will have a greater range. A decrease in operating range could be caused by: · weather conditions · nearby radio towers · structures around your vehicle · other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
The radio frequency used by your remote control can also be used by other short-distance radio transmissions, for example amateur radios, medical equipment, wireless headphones, remote controls and alarm systems. If the frequencies are jammed, you will not be able to use your remote control. You can lock and unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure your vehicle is locked before leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control will operate if you press any button unintentionally.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
56
Keys and Remote Control
Intelligent Access (If Equipped)
The system uses a radio frequency signal to communicate with your vehicle and authorize your vehicle to unlock when one of the following conditions is met:
· You touch the inside of the front exterior door handle. · You press the luggage compartment button. · You press a button on the transmitter.
If excessive radio frequency interference is present in the area or if the transmitter battery is low, it may be necessary to mechanically unlock your door. You can use the mechanical key blade in your intelligent access key to open the driver door in this situation. Refer to Remote Control in this chapter for more information on the location and use of the mechanical key blade.
REMOTE CONTROL
Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs) (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with two integrated keyhead transmitters. Use the key blade to start your vehicle and unlock or lock the driver door from outside the vehicle. The transmitter portion functions as the remote control.
Note: Your vehicle's keys came with a security label that provides important key cut information. Keep the label in a safe place for future reference.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Keys and Remote Control
57
Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped) Type 1
Type 2
Your vehicle may be equipped with two intelligent access keys which operate the power locks and the remote start system. The key must be in the vehicle to activate the push button start system.
Mechanical Key Blade
The key also contains a removable mechanical key blade that can be used to unlock the driver door.
Type 1
To release the mechanical key blade:
2
1. Press and hold the push buttons
1
on the edges of the transmitter to
release the cover. Carefully remove
the cover.
2. Remove the key blade.
1
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
58
Keys and Remote Control
Type 2
To release the key blade, slide the release on the back of the transmitter, then pull the blade out.
Note: Your vehicle's back-up keys were issued with a security tag that provides important vehicle key cut information. Keep the tag in a safe place for future reference.
Replacing the Battery Note: Refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals or on the back surface of the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery will not delete the transmitter from the vehicle. The transmitter should operate normally.
The remote control uses one coin-type three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent.
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter 1. Twist a thin coin in the slot of the transmitter near the key ring to remove the battery cover.
2. Remove the old battery.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Keys and Remote Control
59
3. Insert the new battery. Refer to the instructions inside the transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery down to make sure it is fully in the housing.
4. Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter.
Intelligent Access Key (Type 1)
2 1
1. Press and hold the push buttons on the edges of the transmitter to release the cover. Carefully remove the cover.
2. Remove the key blade.
1
3. Twist a flat object in the position shown to separate the two halves of the transmitter.
4. Carefully insert a flat object in the position show to open the transmitter.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
60
Keys and Remote Control
5. Carefully pry out the battery with a flat object.
6. Install a new battery with the + facing downward.
7. Assemble the two halves of the transmitter back together.
8. Install the key blade.
Intelligent Access Key (Type 2) 1. Remove the backup key from the transmitter.
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden behind the backup key head to remove the battery cover. Do not use the backup key to remove the cover or you could damage the intelligent access key.
3. Remove the old battery.
4. Insert a new battery with the + facing downward. Press the battery down to make sure it is fully in the housing.
5. Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter and install the backup key.
Car Finder Press the lock button on the key twice within three seconds. The horn will sound and the turn signals will flash. We recommend you use this method to locate your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Keys and Remote Control
61
Sounding a Panic Alarm (If Equipped)
Press the button to activate the alarm. Press the button again or switch the ignition on to deactivate.
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is off. Remote Start (If Equipped)
WARNING: To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use remote start if your vehicle is parked indoors or areas that are not well ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your vehicle is low on fuel. Your vehicle has remote start if the transmitter has this button.
The remote start feature allows you to start the vehicle from outside the vehicle. The transmitter has an extended operating range.
Vehicles with automatic climate control can be configured to operate when the vehicle is remote started. See the Climate Control chapter for more information.
Many states and provinces have restrictions for the use of remote start. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding remote start systems.
The remote start system will not work if:
· the ignition is on · the alarm system is triggered · you disable the feature · the hood is not closed · the transmission is not in P · the vehicle battery voltage is too low · the service engine soon indicator was on the last time the vehicle was
driven.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
62
Keys and Remote Control
Remote Starting the Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within three seconds of each other. Your vehicle will not remote start and the horn will not sound if you do not follow this sequence.
The label on your transmitter details the starting procedure. To remote start the vehicle:
1. Press the lock button to lock all the doors.
2. Press the remote start button twice. The exterior lamps will flash twice.
The horn will sound if the system fails to start, unless quiet start is on. Quiet start will run the blower fan at a slower speed to reduce noise. You can switch it on or off in the information display. See the Information Displays chapter.
Note: If you remote start your vehicle with an integrated keyhead transmitter, you must switch the ignition on before driving your vehicle. If you remote start your vehicle with an intelligent access transmitter, you must have a programmed intelligent access key inside your vehicle and press the START/STOP button on the instrument panel once while applying the brake pedal before driving the vehicle.
The power windows will be inhibited during the remote start and the radio will not turn on automatically.
The parking lamps will remain on and the vehicle will run for 5, 10, or 15 minutes, depending on the setting. See the Information Displays chapter to select the duration of the remote start system.
Extending the Vehicle Run Time
Repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the vehicle still running to extend the run time for another remote start duration. If the duration is set to last 10 minutes, the system will add another 10 minutes. For example, if the vehicle had been running from the first remote start for five minutes, the vehicle will continue to run now for a total of 20 minutes. You can only extend the remote start once.
Wait at least five seconds before remote starting after a vehicle shutdown.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Keys and Remote Control
63
Turning the Vehicle Off After Remote Starting Press the button once. The parking lamps will turn off.
You may have to be closer to the vehicle than when starting due to ground reflection and the added noise of the running vehicle.
You can disable or enable the remote start system through the information display. See the Information Display chapter.
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR REMOTE CONTROL
You can purchase replacement or additional keys or remote controls from an authorized dealer. A dealer can program the transmitters to your vehicle or you may be able to program them yourself. See the Security chapter for information on programming your transmitters.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
64
MyKey
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
MyKey® allows you to program keys with restricted driving modes to promote good driving habits. All but one of the keys programmed to the vehicle can be activated with these restricted modes. Any keys that have not been programmed are referred to as an administrator key or admin key which can be used to: · create a restricted key · program optional MyKey settings · clear all MyKey features altogether.
Once a key has been programmed, you can access the following information using the information display control: · How many admin keys and MyKeys are programmed to the vehicle. · The total distance the vehicle has been driven with a MyKey.
For vehicles equipped with intelligent access (push button start), when both a MyKey and an admin intelligent access key (fob) are present, the admin fob will be recognized by the vehicle to start the engine.
Standard Settings
These settings activate automatically with a programmed MyKey.
· Belt-Minder. The audible safety belt warning tones continue and do not time out after approximately five minutes. The audio system also mutes until drivers and front passengers fasten their safety belts.
· Early low fuel. · Drivers receive an audible warning when the fuel gauge reads approximately 3/32nd tank, or the estimated travel distance is 62 miles (100 kilometers) until the tank is empty, whichever comes first. · The fuel indicator lamp illuminates in yellow and the information display shows a low fuel message. · When the fuel tank gauge reads E, another set of warnings occur: the information display shows a red warning light and Low Fuel in red.
· Driver assist features, if equipped, remain on and active: parking aid, BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) with cross traffic alert and the collision warning system.
Optional Settings
You can configure these settings while programming a MyKey or change them while using an admin key.
· 80 mph (130 km/h) vehicle speed limit. Drivers receive visual warnings and an audible tone when they reach 80 mph (130 km/h).
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyKey
65
· 45, 55 or 65 mph (75, 90, or 105 km/h) vehicle speed warning. Drivers receive visual warnings and an audible tone when they exceed the preselected vehicle speed.
· 45% of the maximum audio system output. The audio system displays a message when drivers attempt to exceed the volume limits.
· AdvanceTrac. Program the system to Always-on and the system cannot be turned off when drivers use a programmed MyKey.
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a MyKey. 1. Insert the key you want to program into the ignition. With a
push-button start (if equipped), put the Intelligent Access key in the backup slot; see the Starting and Stopping the Engine chapter for the backup slot location. 2. Turn the ignition on. 3. From the main menu within the information display, press OK or the> button to navigate through the various screens. Select Settings and then MyKey. 4. Press OK or the> to select Create. 5. When prompted, hold the OK button until you see a message informing you to label this key as a MyKey. The key will be restricted at your vehicle's next start.
After the key is successfully programmed, make sure you label it so you can distinguish it from the admin keys.
You can also program optional settings for the key(s). Refer to Programming/Changing Optional Settings.
Programming/Changing Optional Settings
Note: All programmed keys can be cleared within the same key cycle in which a key was programmed, otherwise an admin key is required to clear the keys. To clear all keys, see Clearing all MyKeys.
You can access the optional settings through the information display control. 1. Turn the ignition on using an admin key. 2. Access the main menu and select Settings, then MyKey. 3. Use the arrow buttons to get to an optional feature. 4. Press OK or > to scroll through settings. 5. Press OK or > to make a selection.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
66
MyKey
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
Note: All programmed MyKeys can be cleared within the same key cycle in which a MyKey was created, otherwise an admin key is required to clear the keys.
To clear all MyKeys (which removes all restrictions and returns them to admin key status), use the information display controls to do the following: 1. Access the main menu and select Settings, then MyKey. 2. Scroll to Clear All and press the OK button. 3. Hold the OK button until ALL MYKEYS CLEARED is displayed.
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM STATUS
The information display controls provide information about keys programmed to the vehicle: · MYKEY MILES: Tracks mileage when a MyKey is used. If mileage
does not accumulate as expected, then the MyKey is not being used by the intended user. The only way to reset this to zero is by clearing MyKeys. If the mileage is lower than the last time you checked, then the key system has been recently reset. · # MYKEY(S): Indicates how many MyKeys are programmed to the vehicle. Can also be used to detect deletion of a MyKey. · # ADMIN KEY(S): Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to the vehicle. Can also be used to detect if an additional key has been programmed to the vehicle.
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE START SYSTEMS
MyKey is NOT compatible with non-Ford-approved aftermarket remote start systems. If you choose to install a remote start system, please see your Ford authorized dealer for a Ford-approved remote start system.
The following information MAY help customers who choose to use a non-Ford-approved remote start system. The actions provided below do NOT make MyKey compatible with non-Ford-approved remote start system, but it MAY help you to retain some MyKey functions.
Vehicles Equipped with Traditional Keys
When using a non-Ford-approved remote start system, the default settings may recognize the remote start system as an additional admin key with its associated privileges. It is NOT compatible with MyKey. Restart the engine when you insert a key into the ignition cylinder; it may help you to retain some MyKey functions.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyKey
67
In addition to the key that has been programmed as a MyKey, owners of vehicles equipped with traditional keys have the option to program the non-Ford-approved remote start system as a MyKey if the remote start fob is used by the MyKey driver.
To program a non-Ford-approved remote start system as a MyKey, do the following: 1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors. 2. Remote start the vehicle using a non-Ford approved remote start fob. 3. Follow Steps 1-5 in the Creating a MyKey section.
Vehicles Equipped with Intelligent Access Key (Push Button Start)
Note: It is not possible to program the remote start system as a MyKey on vehicles equipped with intelligent access key (push button start). Therefore, you should treat the remote start fob as you would any other admin key. When the vehicle is started using remote start, the system will stall the engine when you either enter the vehicle or shift the vehicle into gear. Prior to the engine stall, the vehicle will have administrative privileges. When you restart the engine, the vehicle will identify the user as an admin or MyKey driver depending on the settings of the actual key used to start the vehicle.
Note: For all vehicles, the number of MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED or ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED that is displayed in the MyKey system status menu, may include the non-Ford-approved remote start system as an additional key in the total count. See the Checking System Status section.
For all vehicles with a non-Ford-approved remote start installed, it is possible to program all real keys as MyKeys, in which case, you will need to use your remote start system to clear all MyKeys (which removes all restrictions and returns them to admin key status) by doing the following: 1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors. 2. Remote start the vehicle using your non-Ford-approved remote start
fob. 3. Follow Steps 1-3 in the Clearing all MyKeys section.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
68
MyKey
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Condition I cannot program a key.
I cannot program the optional settings.
I cannot clear the restricted keys.
I lost the only admin key. I lost a key.
Potential Causes · The key in the ignition does not have admin privileges. · The key in the ignition is the only admin key (there always has to be at least one admin
key). · The intelligent access key is not in the backup slot (vehicles with push button start). · SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is disabled or in unlimited mode. · The vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is not programmed with
admin privileges. See the Using MyKey with
Remote Start Systems chapter. · The key in the ignition does not have admin privileges. · No keys are programmed to the vehicle. See the Creating a MyKey chapter. · The vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is not programmed with
admin privileges. See the Using MyKey with
Remote Start System chapter. · Key in the ignition does not have admin privileges. · No restricted keys are programmed to the vehicle. See the Creating a MyKey chapter. · The vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is not programmed with
admin privileges. See the Using MyKey with
Remote Start System chapter. · Purchase a new key from your authorized dealer. · Program spare keys as outlined under SecuriLock in the Security chapter.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyKey
69
Condition
Potential Causes
I accidentally
· The vehicle has a remote start system that
programmed all keys is recognized as an admin key. See the Using
as restricted keys.
MyKey with Remote Start System chapter to
reset all restricted keys using remote start.
No restricted key
· An admin key is present at engine start-up.
functions with
· No restricted keys are programmed to the
intelligent access key vehicle. See the Creating a MyKey chapter.
(push button start).
Restricted key
· An unknown key has been programmed to
programmed total
the vehicle as a restricted key.
includes one additional · The vehicle is equipped with a remote start
key.
system. See the Using MyKey with Remote
Start Systems chapter.
Admin keys
· An unknown key has been programmed to
programmed total
the vehicle as an admin key.
includes one additional · Vehicle is equipped with a remote start
key.
system. See the Using MyKey with remote
start systems chapter.
MyKey miles do not · The restricted key is not being used by the
accumulate.
intended user.
· The key system has been reset.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
70
Locks
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control or the remote control to lock and unlock the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock control is located on the instrument panel near the radio.
Press the control to lock or unlock the doors. It will illuminate when you lock the doors and luggage compartment. When the light is off it indicates one or more doors are unlocked.
Rear Door Unlocking and Opening
Pull the interior door release handle twice to unlock and open the rear door. The first pull unlocks the door and the second pull will unlatch the door.
Central Locking and Unlocking
You can use the key in the driver door to lock or unlock all the doors from outside when they are closed. · Turn the key counterclockwise to lock all doors. The turn signal lamps
flash twice. · Turn the key clockwise once to unlock the driver door or twice to
unlock all doors. The turn signal lamps flash once.
If the central locking function fails to operate, lock the doors individually using the key in the position shown.
Left-Hand Side Turn clockwise to lock.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Locks
71
Right-Hand Side Turn counterclockwise to lock.
Remote Control You can use the remote control anytime the vehicle is not running. Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage Unlock)
Type 1
Type 2
Press the button to unlock the driver door.
Press the button again within three seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signals will flash.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock buttons on the remote control for four seconds to disable or enable two-stage unlocking. Disabling two-stage unlocking allows all vehicle doors to unlock with one press of the button. The turn signals will flash twice to indicate the unlocking mode was changed. The unlocking mode will be applied to the remote control and intelligent access.
Intelligent access at the driver door will unlock all doors when you disable two-stage unlocking.
Locking the doors
Type 1
Type 2
Press the button to lock all the doors. The turn signals will illuminate.
Press the button again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors are closed. The doors will lock again, the horn will sound and the turn signals will illuminate if all the doors and the luggage compartment are closed.
Note: If any door or the luggage compartment is open, or if the hood is open on vehicles with an anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn will sound twice and the lamps will not flash.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
72
Locks
Opening the luggage compartment Press twice to open the luggage compartment.
Ensure that the trunk is closed and latched before driving your vehicle. Failure to properly latch the trunk may cause objects to fall out or block the driver's rear view.
Activating Intelligent Access (If Equipped)
The intelligent access key must be within 3 feet (1 meter) of your vehicle.
At the Front Doors
Pull a front exterior door handle to unlock and can be open the door.
Press and hold the door handle lock sensor to lock your vehicle. To avoid unlocking the door inadvertently, be sure to only touch the lock sensor and not other areas of the door handle.
At the Luggage Compartment
Press the exterior release button above the license plate.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Locks
73
Smart Unlocks for Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
This feature helps to prevent you from locking yourself out of your vehicle if your key is still in the ignition.
When you open one of the front doors and lock your vehicle with the power door lock control, all the doors will lock then unlock if your key is still in the ignition.
You can still lock your vehicle by pressing the lock button on the transmitter even if the doors are not closed.
If both front doors are closed, you can lock your vehicle by any method, regardless of whether the key is in the ignition or not.
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access Keys (If Equipped)
This feature helps to prevent you from unintentionally locking your intelligent access key inside your vehicle's passenger compartment or rear cargo area.
When you lock your vehicle using the power door lock control (with the door open, transmission P and ignition off), after you close the door your vehicle will search for an intelligent access key in the passenger compartment. If your vehicle finds a key, all of the doors will immediately unlock and the horn will sound, indicating that the intelligent access key is inside.
You can override the smart unlock feature and intentionally lock the intelligent access key inside your vehicle. To do this, either: · close all the doors and then press the lock button on another
intelligent access key, or · touch the locking area on the handle with another intelligent access
key in your hand.
When you open one of the front doors and lock your vehicle using the power door lock control, all doors will lock then unlock if: · the ignition is on, or · the ignition is off and the vehicle is not in P.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
74
Locks
Autolock and Unlock (If Equipped) The autolock feature will lock all the doors when: · all doors are closed, · the ignition is on, · you shift into any gear putting your vehicle in motion, and · your vehicle attains a speed greater than 4 mph (7 km/h). When you enable autounlock, all doors will unlock when you open the driver door.
Enabling or Disabling Autolock and Autounlock
Note: Your authorized dealer can perform this procedure, or you can do the procedure yourself.
To enable or disable these features, do the following:
Note: You will have 30 seconds to complete the procedure.
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Press the power door lock button three times.
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Press the power door lock button three times.
5. Switch the ignition on. The horn will sound indicating the programming mode has been entered.
Autolock: Once in programming mode, each subsequent short press (less than 1 second) of the power door lock button will toggle autolock between on and off.
Autounlock: Each subsequent long press (more than 2 seconds) of the power door lock button will toggle autounlock between on and off.
Note: You can enabled or disabled the autounlock feature independently of the autolock feature.
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and select exterior lamps illuminate when you unlock the doors with the remote entry system.
The illuminated entry system turns off the lights if: · the ignition is on, · you press the remote transmitter lock button, or · after 25 seconds of illumination.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Locks
75
The lights will not turn off if: · you turn them on with the dimmer control, or · any door is open.
Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and select exterior lamps illuminate when all doors are closed and you switch, the ignition off and remove the key from the ignition (integrated keyhead transmitter only).
The lamps turn off if all the doors remain closed and: · 25 seconds elapse · you insert the key in the ignition (integrated keyhead transmitter
only) · you press the START/STOP button (intelligent access key only).
Battery Saver
If you leave the courtesy lamps, dome lamps or headlamps on and switch the ignition off, the battery saver shuts them off after some time.
Accessory Mode Battery Saver for Intelligent Access Keys (If Equipped)
If you leave the ignition on after leaving your vehicle, it will shut off 15 minutes after you close all of the doors.
TRUNK RELEASE From Inside Your Vehicle
Press the button. It is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
76
Locks
From Outside Your Vehicle
Press the release button located above the license plate. Your vehicle must be unlocked or the intelligent access transmitter must be within 3 feet (1 meter) of the trunk.
Note: On a locked vehicle, you can press the trunk button on the remote control once. The vehicle will remain locked but you will have 20 seconds to press the outside release button.
INTERIOR LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT RELEASE (4DOOR ONLY)
WARNING: Keep vehicle doors and luggage compartment locked and keep keys and remote transmitters out of a child's reach. Unsupervised children could lock themselves in the trunk and risk injury. Children should be taught not to play in vehicles.
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or animals unattended in the vehicle. On hot days, the temperature in the trunk or vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of people or animals to these high temperatures for even a short time can cause death or serious heat-related injuries, including brain damage. Small children are particularly at risk.
Your vehicle is equipped with a release handle that provides a means of escape for children and adults if they become locked inside the luggage compartment.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Locks
77
Adults should familiarize themselves with the operation and location of the release handle.
The handle is located inside the luggage compartment either on the luggage compartment door (lid) or near the tail lamps. It is composed of a material that will glow for hours in darkness following brief exposure to ambient light.
Pull the handle and push up on the luggage compartment door (lid) to open from within the luggage compartment.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
78
Security
SECURILOCK® PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices or a second coded key on the same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues if they are too close to the key when starting the engine. Prevent these objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. Switch the ignition off, move all objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine if a problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle. Always take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
The system is an engine immobilization system. It helps prevent the engine from starting unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. Using the wrong key may prevent the engine from starting. A message may appear in the information display.
If you are unable to start the engine with a correctly coded key, a malfunction has happened and a message may appear in the information display.
Automatic Arming
Your vehicle arms immediately after you switch the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
Your vehicle disarms when you switch the ignition on with a coded key.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes with two integrated keyhead transmitters or two intelligent access keys.
The integrated keyhead transmitter functions as a programmed ignition key that operates all the locks and starts the vehicle, as well as a remote control.
The intelligent access key functions as a programmed key that operates the driver door lock and activates the intelligent access with push button start systems, as well as a remote control.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Security
79
If your programmed transmitters or standard SecuriLock coded keys (integrated keyhead transmitters only) are lost or stolen and you do not have an extra coded key, you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. The key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be programmed.
Store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconveniences. See an authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
Note: A maximum of eight coded keys can be programmed to your vehicle; all eight can be integrated keyhead transmitters.
You can program your own integrated keyhead transmitter or standard SecuriLock® coded keys to your vehicle. This procedure will program both the engine immobilizer keycode and the remote entry portion of the remote control to your vehicle.
Only use integrated keyhead transmitters or standard SecuriLock® keys.
You must have two previously programmed coded keys and the new unprogrammed key readily accessible. See your authorized dealer to have the spare key programmed if two previously programmed coded keys are not available.
Read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously programmed coded key into the ignition.
2. Turn the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least three seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition off and remove the first coded key from the ignition.
4. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of turning the ignition off, insert the second previously coded key into the ignition.
5. Turn the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least three seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the ignition off and remove the second previously programmed coded key from the ignition.
7. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of turning the ignition off and removing the previously programmed coded key, insert the new unprogrammed key into the ignition.
8. Turn the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least six seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
80
Security
If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the engine and operate the remote entry system (if the new key is an integrated keyhead transmitter).
If it was not programmed successfully, wait 10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8. If you are still unsuccessful, bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer.
Wait 20 seconds and then repeat this procedure from Step 1 to program an additional key.
Programming a Spare Intelligent Access Key
See your authorized dealer to have additional keys programmed to your vehicle.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM (IF EQUIPPED)
The system will warn you of an unauthorized entry to your vehicle.
The park and turn lamps flash and the horn sounds if unauthorized entry is attempted while the alarm is armed. It triggers immediately if the luggage compartment or the hood opens, and after a 12-second delay if any door opens.
Take all remote controls to an authorized dealer if there is any potential alarm problem with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is not a key in the ignition. Lock the vehicle to arm the alarm.
The message indicator flashes when theft protection is active.
Disarming the alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following actions: · Unlock the doors or luggage compartment with the remote control. · Turn the ignition on or start the vehicle. · Use a key in the driver door to unlock your vehicle, then turn the
ignition on within 12 seconds.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Steering Wheel
81
ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL
WARNING: Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position. See Sitting in the Correct Position in the Seats chapter.
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position.
3. Lock the steering column.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
82
Steering Wheel
AUDIO CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED) Select the required source on the audio unit. You can operate the following functions with the control:
Type 1
A. Volume up B. Seek up or next C. Volume down D. Seek down or previous E. Mode
Press M to select the audio source.
Type 2
A. Volume up B. Seek up or next C. Volume down D. Seek down or previous
Seek, Next or Previous Press the seek button to: · tune the radio to the next or previous stored preset · play the next or previous track. Press and hold the seek button to: · tune the radio to the next station up or down the frequency band · seek through a track.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Steering Wheel
83
VOICE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
Pull the control to select or deselect voice control. See the SYNC or MyFord Touch chapter.
MyFord Touch Controls (If Equipped) Your steering wheel controls may also have these additional features.
Press to go to the home screen.
Press to go to the information screen.
CRUISE CONTROL
See the Cruise Control chapter.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
84
Steering Wheel
INFORMATION DISPLAY CONTROL
Use the arrows on the left side of the steering wheel to navigate the information display. See the Information Displays chapter for more information.
Multimedia Controls (If Equipped)
Use the arrows on the right side of steering wheel to navigate through the available menus. Press OK to make a selection.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Wipers and Washers
85
WINDSHIELD WIPERS Note: Fully defrost the windshield before switching on the windshield wipers.
Note: Make sure the windshield wipers are switched off before entering car wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper blades if they begin to leave streaks or smears. If that does not resolve the issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out. Always use the windshield washer before wiping a dry windshield.
A. Single wipe
B. Intermittent wipe
C. Normal wipe
D. High-speed wipe
Intermittent Wipe
A. Shortest wipe interval B. Intermittent wipe C. Longest wipe interval Use the rotary control to adjust the intermittent wipe interval.
Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the interval between wipes will decrease when intermittent wipe is selected.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
86
Wipers and Washers
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the washers when the washer reservoir is empty. This may cause the washer pump to overheat.
The washer will spray for as long as the lever is pulled toward you. After you release the lever, the wipers will operate for a short time.
A wipe will occur a few seconds after washing to clear any remaining washer fluid.
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND WASHERS (IF EQUIPPED)
Rear Window Wiper
A. Intermittent wipe
B. Low-speed wipe
Press the button at the end of the lever to change between off, intermittent and low speed.
When you select reverse gear, the rear wiper will switch on to intermittent if the front wipers are activated.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Wipers and Washers
87
Rear Window Washers
Note: Do not operate the washers when the washer reservoir is empty. This may cause the washer pump to overheat.
The washer will spray for as long as you push the lever away from you. When you release the lever, the wiper will operate for a short time.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
88
LIGHTING CONTROL
Lighting
A. Off B. Parking lamps, instrument panel lamps, license plate lamps and tail lamps C. Headlamps
High Beams
Push the lever forward to switch the high beams on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the lever toward you to switch the high beams off.
Headlamp Flasher
Pull the lever toward you slightly and release it to flash the headlamps.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Lighting
89
AUTOLAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: It may be necessary to switch your headlamps on manually in severe weather conditions.
The headlamps will switch on and off automatically in low light situations or during inclement weather.
The headlamps will remain on for a period of time after you switch the ignition off. You can adjust the time delay using the information display controls.
Note: If you switch autolamps on in conjunction with autowipers, low beam headlamps will illuminate automatically when the rain sensor activates the windshield wipers continuously.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER Note: The illumination settings default to the maximum setting after the battery is disconnected then reconnected, or discharged then recharged.
Vehicles With Front Fog Lamps
Press repeatedly or press and hold until the desired level is reached.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
90
Lighting
Vehicles Without Front Fog Lamps
A
B A. Press repeatedly or press and
hold to dim.
B. Press repeatedly or press and hold to brighten.
A
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY After you switch the ignition off, you can switch the headlamps on by pulling the direction indicator lever toward you. You will hear a short tone. The headlamps will switch off automatically after three minutes with any door open or 30 seconds after the last door has been closed.
You can cancel this feature by pulling the direction indicator toward you again or switching the ignition on.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Always remember to switch your headlamps on in low light situations or during inclement weather. The system does not activate the tail lamps and may not provide adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
The system switches the headlamps on in daylight conditions.
To switch the system on, switch the ignition on, and switch the lighting control to the off, autolamp, or parking lamp positions.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
FRONT FOG LAMPS
Lighting
91
Press the control to switch the fog lamps on or off.
You can switch the fog lamps on when the lighting control is in any position except off and the high beams are not on.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
Push the lever up or down to use the direction indicators.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the direction indicators flash three times to indicate a lane change.
INTERIOR LAMPS
The lamps will switch on when one of the following conditions have been met: · You open any door. · You press a remote control button. · You press switch D on the front interior lamp.
Note: Press switch C on the front interior lamp to switch the courtesy and door illumination function off when you open any door. The indicator lamp will illuminate yellow when the door function is off. When the door function is off and you open a door, the courtesy and door lamps will stay off.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
92
Lighting
Press switch C again to switch them back on. The indicator lamp will illuminate blue when the door function is on. When the door function is on and you open a door, the courtesy and door lamps will switch on.
Front Interior lamp (if equipped) Note: Some interior lamps are equipped with a single switch for the left and right map lamps.
A. Left map lamp switch, if equipped
B. Right map lamp switch, if equipped
C. Door function switch
D. All lamps on and off switch
Front/Rear Interior lamp (if equipped)
Press switch A to switch individual map lamps on and off (if equipped).
A
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Lighting
93
AMBIENT LIGHTING (IF EQUIPPED)
The ambient lighting system illuminates the interior with a choice of several colors. The ambient lighting control is located in the overhead console.
A
B
C
A. Color palette B. Control knob
C. Search mode
· Rotate B to switch on and adjust to the desired brightness. · Press A to cycle through the color choices. · Press C to switch on all interior lamps and all ambient lighting. Press
C again to switch off the interior lamps and return the ambient lighting to the previously selected color.
The ambient lighting will switch on when the following conditions have been met:
· you switch the ignition on · you switch the headlamps on · the outside ambient light level is low.
The ambient lighting will remain on until you switch the ignition off and one of the following conditions have been met:
· you lock your vehicle · the accessory delay timer expires.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
94
Windows and Mirrors
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle and do not let them play with the power windows. They may seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify they are free of obstructions and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
Note: You may hear a rumbling noise when one or both of the rear windows are open. Lower a front window slightly to reduce this noise.
Press the switch to open the window. Lift the switch to close the window.
One-Touch Down (If Equipped) Press the switch fully and release it. Press again or lift it to stop the window.
One-Touch Up (If Equipped) Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or lift it again to stop the window.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Window Lock
Windows and Mirrors
95
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear window controls. It illuminates when you lock the rear window controls.
Bounce-Back (If Equipped) The window will stop automatically while closing. It will reverse some distance if there is an obstacle in the way.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING: When you override the bounce-back feature the window will not reverse if it detects an obstacle. Take care when closing the windows to avoid personal injury.
Proceed as follows to override this protection function when there is a resistance, for example in the winter: 1. Close the window twice until it reaches the resistance and let it reverse. 2. Close the window a third time to the resistance. The bounce-back function is disabled and you can close the window manually. The window will override the resistance and you can close it fully. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible if the window does not close after the third attempt.
Resetting the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING: The bounce-back function remains deactivated until you have reset the memory.
You must reset the bounce-back memory separately for each window after the battery has been disconnected. 1. Lift and hold the switch until the window is fully closed. 2. Release the switch. 3. Lift the switch again for one more second.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
96
Windows and Mirrors
4. Press and hold the switch until the window is fully open. 5. Release the switch 6. Lift and hold the switch until the window is fully closed. 7. Open the window and then try to close it automatically. 8. Reset and repeat the procedure if the window does not close automatically.
Accessory Delay (If Equipped) You can use the window switches for several minutes after the you switch the ignition off, or until you open either front door.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while your vehicle is in motion.
A. Left-hand mirror B. Off C. Right-hand mirror
Press the arrows to adjust the mirror.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors Push the mirror toward the door window glass. Make sure that you fully engage the mirror in its support when returning it to its original position.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Windows and Mirrors
97
Signal Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)
The outer portion of the appropriate mirror housing blinks when you activate the turn signal.
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors
WARNING: Objects in the blind spot mirror are closer than they appear.
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convex mirror built into the upper outboard corner of the exterior mirrors. They are designed to assist you by increasing visibility along the side of your vehicle.
Check the main mirror first before a lane change, then check the blind spot mirror. If no vehicles are present in the blind spot mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane is at a safe distance, signal that you are going to change lanes. Glance over your shoulder to verify traffic is clear, and carefully change lanes.
The image of the approaching
vehicle is small and near the inboard
edge of the main mirror when it is at
a distance. The image becomes
larger and begins to move outboard
across the main mirror as the vehicle
C
approaches (A). The image will transition from the main mirror and
begin to appear in the blind spot
mirror as the vehicle approaches
(B). The vehicle will transition to
your peripheral field of view as it
B
leaves the blind spot mirror (C).
A
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
98
Windows and Mirrors
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum or ammonia based cleaning products. You can adjust the interior mirror to your preference. Some mirrors also have a second pivot point. This lets you move the mirror head up or down and from side to side. Pull the tab below the mirror toward you to reduce glare at night.
SUN VISORS
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror (If Equipped) Lift the cover to switch on the lamp.
MOONROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not let children play with the moonroof or leave them unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt themselves.
WARNING: When closing the moonroof, you should verify that it is free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in the proximity of the moon roof opening.
You can manually open or close the sunscreen when the glass panel is closed.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Windows and Mirrors
99
The moonroof has a one-touch open and close feature. To stop motion during one-touch operation, press the control a second time.
The moonroof control is located on the overhead console.
Opening and Closing the Moonroof Press and release the rear of the control to open the moonroof. If the sliding shade is closed, it will open along with the moonroof. The moonroof will stop short of the fully opened position.
Note: This position helps to reduce rumbling wind noise which may happen with the moonroof fully open. Press and release the control again to fully open the moonroof.
Press and release the front of the control to close the moonroof.
Bounce-Back The moonroof stops automatically while closing. It reverses some distance if there is an obstacle in the way.
Press and hold the front of the control within two seconds of a bounce-back event to override the function. While bounce-back is active, the closing force increases for each of the next three time the moonroof is closed.
Venting the Moonroof Press and release the front of the control to vent the moonroof. Press and hold the rear of the control to close the moonroof.
Relearning Function If the moonroof does not close properly, follow this procedure:
1. Tilt the moonroof into the vent position as far as possible. Release the switch.
2. Press and hold the same switch again for 30 seconds until you see the moonroof move.
3. Release the switch and immediately press and hold it again. The moonroof will close, open fully and then close again. Do not release the switch before the moonroof has reached the closed position for the second time.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
100
Windows and Mirrors
Safety Mode
The system enters a safety mode when it detects a malfunction. The moonroof will move about 0.5 seconds at a time and then stop again. Press the switch repeatedly until the moonroof is closed. Have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
101
GAUGES
60 70 80 90 50 100 120 140 100
40 80
160110
60
180
30
120
40
20
20
10
0
0
200
130
220
140
240
150
A. Information display. See Information Displays for more information. B. Speedometer C. Engine coolant temperature gauge D. Fuel gauge E. Tachometer
Engine coolant temperature gauge Shows the temperature of the engine coolant. At normal operating temperature, the needle will remain in the center section. If the needle enters the red section, the engine is overheating. Stop the engine, switch the ignition off and determine the cause once the engine has cooled down. Note: Do not restart the engine until the cause of overheating has been resolved.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
102
Instrument Cluster
Fuel gauge
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will indicate approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank. The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is moving or on a gradient. The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump symbol indicates on which side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and indicators will alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious. Some lamps will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure they work. If any lamps remain on after starting your vehicle, refer to the respective system warning lamp for further information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in the information display and function the same as a warning lamp but do not display when you start your vehicle.
Airbag Front
If it fails to illuminate on startup, continues to flash or remains on, it indicates a malfunction. Have the system checked by your authorized dealer. A chime will sound when there is a malfunction in the indicator light.
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. You will continue to have the normal braking system (without ABS) unless the brake warning lamp is also illuminated. Have the system checked by your authorized dealer.
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it indicates a malfunction. Switch off all unnecessary electrical equipment and have the system checked by your authorized dealer.
Blind Spot Monitor (if equipped)
It will illuminate when this feature is deactivated or in conjunction with a message.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
103
Brake System
It will illuminate when the parking brake is engaged and the ignition is on.
If it illuminates when you are driving, check that the parking brake is not engaged. If the parking brake is not engaged, this indicates low brake fluid level or a brake system malfunction. Have the system checked immediately by your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury.
Cruise Control (if equipped) It will illuminate when you switch this feature on.
Direction Indicator Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the hazard warning flasher is turned on. If the indicators flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
Engine Oil If it illuminates with the engine running or when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level.
Note: Do not resume your journey if it illuminates despite the level being correct. Have the system checked by your authorized dealer.
Fasten Safety Belt It will illuminate and a chime will sound to remind you to fasten your safety belt.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
104
Instrument Cluster
Fog Lamps Front (if equipped) It will illuminate when you switch the front fog lamps on.
High Beam It will illuminate when the headlamp high beam is switched on. It will flash when you use the headlamp flasher.
Information It will illuminate when a new message is stored in the information display. It will be red or amber in color depending on the severity of the message and will remain on until the
cause of the message has been rectified. .
Low Fuel Level It will illuminate when the fuel level is low or near empty. Refuel as soon as possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning It illuminates when your tire pressure is low. If the lamp remains on with the engine running or when driving, check your tire pressure as soon as possible.
The lamp also illuminates momentarily when you switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate when you switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at any time, have the system checked by your authorized dealer.
Overdrive Cancel and Grade Assist (if equipped) It will illuminate when you turn off the overdrive function of the transmission and switch on the grade assist function
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
105
Parking Lamps It will illuminate when you switch the parking lamps on.
Service Engine Soon
If the service engine soon indicator light stays illuminated after the engine is started, it indicates that the On Board Diagnostics system (OBD) has detected a malfunction of the vehicle emissions control system. Refer to On board diagnostics (OBD) in the Fuel and Refueling chapter for more information about having your vehicle serviced.
If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced immediately.
Note: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter or other vehicle components.
The service engine soon indicator light illuminates when the ignition is first turned on prior to engine start to check the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing.
Normally, the service engine soon light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the service engine soon light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. See Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing in the Fuel and Refueling chapter.
Stability Control System
It will flash when the system is active. It will illuminate when you switch the ignition on to confirm it is functional. If it remains illuminated or does not illuminate when you switch the ignition on, this indicates a malfunction. During a malfunction the system will switch off. Have the system checked by your authorized dealer.
Stability Control System Off
It will illuminate when you switch off the system. It will go out when you switch the system back on or when you switch the ignition off.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
106
Instrument Cluster
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
Key In Ignition Warning Chime Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the off or accessory position and the driver's door is opened.
Keyless Warning Alert (If Equipped) Sounds when the keyless vehicle is in RUN and the driver's door is opened.
Headlamps On Warning Chime Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the driver's door is opened.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime Sounds when you have left the parking brake on and drive your vehicle. If the warning chime remains on after you have released the parking brake, have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Information Displays
107
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable laws.
Various systems on your vehicle can be controlled using the information display controls on the steering wheel. Corresponding information is displayed in the information display.
Information Display Controls
· Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through and highlight the options within a menu.
· Press the right arrow button to enter a sub-menu.
· Press the left arrow button to exit a menu.
· Press and hold the left arrow button at any time to return to the main menu display (escape button).
· Press the OK button to choose and confirm a setting/messages.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
108
Information Displays
Menu structure - information display (All vehicles) You can access the menu using the information display control.
Note: Some options may appear slightly different or not at all if the items are optional.
Trip 1 / 2
ToE / Distance to E
Trip Odometer
Trip Timer
AVG / Average Ford EcoMode Gear Shifting
Fuel
Anticipation
Speed
OK = More Info Provides additional EcoMode
information
See Trip computer later in this section for more information.
Information MyKey (Distance driven if MyKey is programmed) MyKey Info (Number of MyKeys and Admin Keys programmed)
Driver Assist Lighting Display
Chimes
Settings
Traction Ctrl
On or Off
Hill Start
On or Off
Rear Park Aid On or Off
Rain Light
Dimming
Auto or Manual
Hdlamp Delay Manual or xx Seconds
Navigation info
Always off, On guidance or Always on
Language
Choose your applicable setting
Distance
Choose your applicable setting
Temperature
Choose your applicable setting
Park Slot (park aid)
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Information Displays
109
Convenience
Settings
Compass (navigation systems)
Display
Compass (nonnavigation systems)
Show Set Calibrate
Remote Start
Climate Control
Duration
Quiet Start Restore Default System
On or Off Zone (115) Hold OK to Calibrate Heater A/C / Auto or Last Setting Front Defrost / Auto or Off Rear Defrost / Auto or Off (5, 10 or 15 minutes) On/Off
Enable or Disable
MyKey System Reset
Settings (cont'd)
Create MyKey Hold OK to Create MyKey
Traction Ctrl
Always On or User Selectable
Max Speed
80 MPH (130 km/h) or Off
Speed Warning
45 mph (75 km/h), 55 mph (90 km/h), 65 mph (105 km/h) or Off
Volume Limiter On or Off
Clear MyKeys
Hold OK to Clear All MyKeys
Hold OK to Reset System to Factory Default
System Check
All active warnings will display first if applicable. The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status. Use the up/down arrow buttons to scroll through the list.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
110
Information Displays
Status Display The following features will display in the information center.
Compass
Displayed in the status line at the bottom of the display. Displays the vehicle's heading direction.
To calibrate the compass: Enter the compass menu and select Calibrate. Follow the prompts.
To set the compass zone: Enter the compass menu and select Set. Follow the prompts. See the diagram below to determine your magnetic zone.
32 1
Determine which magnetic zone you are in for your geographic location 15 by referring to the zone map.
4
14
13
5
12
6
7 8 9 1011
Odometer Displayed in the status line at the bottom of the display. Registers the total mileage of the vehicle.
Outside air temperature Shows the outside air temperature.
TRIP COMPUTER
Resetting the Trip Computer Press and hold OK on the current screen to reset the respective trip, distance, time and average fuel information.
Trip Odometer Registers the mileage of individual journeys.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Information Displays
111
Trip Timer Registers the time of individual journeys.
Distance to E / ToE
Indicates the approximate distance the vehicle will travel on the fuel remaining in the tank. Changes in driving pattern may cause the value to vary.
Average Fuel
Indicates the average fuel consumption since the function was last reset.
Press the right arrow button to enter Ford EcoMode.
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on the vehicle options equipped with your vehicle, not all of the messages will display or be available. Certain messages may be abbreviated or shortened depending upon which cluster type you have.
Press the OK button to acknowledge and remove some messages from the information display. Other messages will be removed automatically after a short time. Certain messages need to be confirmed before you can access the menus.
Message indicator (if equipped): The message indicator illuminates to supplement some messages. It will be red or amber depending on the severity of the message and will remain on until the cause of the message has been rectified.
Some messages will be supplemented by a system specific symbol with a message indicator.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
112
Information Displays
Airbag Message
Airbag malfunction Service now
Action / Description
Displays when the system
Amber
requires service due to a malfunction. Contact your
authorized dealer.
Alarm Message
Action / Description
Alarm triggered Check Vehicle
Alarm malfunction Service req'd
Amber --
Displays when the alarm has been triggered due to unauthorized entry. Displays when the system requires service due to a malfunction. Contact your authorized dealer.
Battery and Charging System Message
Elec system overvoltage Stop safely
Battery low Check handbook
Action / Description
Stop your vehicle as soon as it
Red
is safe to do so and switch off the ignition. Contact your
authorized dealer.
Displays to warn of a low
battery condition. Turn off all
Amber unneeded electrical
accessories. Contact your
authorized dealer.
Doors Message X door open
Action / Description
Displays when the door(s) Red listed is not completely closed
and the vehicle is moving. -- Displays when the door(s)
listed is not completely closed.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Information Displays
113
Doors Message
Action / Description
Luggage compartment lid open
Displays when the luggage
Red
compartment is not completely closed and the
vehicle is moving.
-- Displays when the luggage
compartment is not
completely closed.
Hood open
Displays when the hood is not
Red completely closed and the
vehicle is moving.
-- Displays when the hood is not
completely closed.
Engine Message Engine malfunction Service now
High engine temperature Stop safely
Action / Description
Engine service is required.
Amber Contact your authorized
dealer.
Displays when the engine
temperature is too high. Stop
Red
the vehicle in a safe place and allow to engine to cool. If the
problem persists, contact your
authorized dealer.
Fuel Message Fuel Level LOW
Check Fuel Fill Inlet
Action / Description
Amber
Displays when the fuel level is low.
Displayed when the fuel fill
Amber inlet may not be properly
closed.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
114
Information Displays
Hill Start Assist Message Hill start assist not available
Action / Description
Displays when hill start assist Amber is not available. Contact your
authorized dealer.
Keyless Vehicle Message Steering lock engaged. Turn steering wheel
Steering malfunction Service now Steering malfunction Stop safely
Ford KeyFree Key inside vehicle
Ford KeyFree No key detected
Switch ign. off Press ENGINE Start/Stop
Ford KeyFree Key not inside car
Action / Description
Displays when you need to
--
turn the steering wheel in order to disengage the
steering lock.
Amber
Contact your authorized dealer.
Stop the vehicle in a safe
Red place. Contact your authorized
dealer.
Displays to remind you that
the key is in the trunk. Refer
Amber to Push button start system
in the Driving chapter for
more information.
Displayed if the key is not
detected by the system. Refer
-- to Push button start system
in the Driving chapter for
more information.
Refer to Push button start
Red system in the Driving
chapter for more information.
Refer to Push button start
Red system in the Driving
chapter for more information.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Information Displays
115
Keyless Vehicle Message Key Battery low Replace soon
Action / Description
Displays when the key battery is low. Change the battery as -- soon as possible. Refer to he Locks and Security chapter for more information.
Lighting Message Brake lamp Bulb fault
Dipped beam Bulb fault
Headlamp malfunction Service req'd
-- -- Amber
Action / Description
Displays when the brake lamp bulb has burned out. Contact your authorized dealer. Displays when the low beam headlamp bulb has burned out. Contact your authorized dealer. Displays when an electrical system problem occurs with the headlamp system. Contact your authorized dealer.
Maintenance Message Engine oil change due
Brake fluid level low Service now
Action / Description
Displays when the engine oil
life is depleted and requires a
--
change. See Engine oil in the Maintenance and
specifications chapter for
more information.
Indicates the brake fluid level
is low and the brake system
should be inspected
Red
immediately. Refer to Brake fluid in the Maintenance
and Specifications chapter.
Contact your authorized
dealer.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
116
Information Displays
Maintenance Message Washer fluid level low
Action / Description
Displays when the washer
fluid is low and needs to be
--
refilled. Refer to Windshield washer fluid in the
Maintenance and
Specifications chapter.
MyKey® Message MyKey active Drive Safely
MyKey Speed Limited to XX MPH/km/h
MyKey Vehicle Near Top Speed
MyKey Buckle Up to Unmute Audio
MyKey Park aid cannot be deactivated Key is Already a MyKey
MyKey Place key in key holder MyKey ESC cannot be deactivated
Action / Description
--
Displays when MyKey® is active.
Displays when starting the
--
vehicle and MyKey® is in use and the MyKey speed limit is
on.
Displays when a MyKey® is in
use and the MyKey speed
Amber limit is on and the vehicle
speed is approaching 80 mph
(130 km/h).
Displays when a MyKey® is in
-- use and Belt-Minder® is
activated.
--
Displays when a MyKey® is in use and park aid is activated.
Displays when trying to create
-- a MyKey® with a key already
designated as a MyKey®.
--
Displays when programming a MyKey®.
Displays when a MyKey® is
-- active and trying to disable
ESC.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Information Displays
117
Park Aid Message Parking aid malfunction Service req'd
Park Brake Message Park brake applied
Power Steering Message Steering loss Stop safely
Steering assist fault Service req'd
Steering fault Service now
Action / Description
Displays when the system has
Amber
detected a condition that requires service. Contact your
authorized dealer.
Action / Description
Displays when the parking brake is set, the engine is running and the vehicle is Red driven more than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released.
Action / Description
The power steering system is
Red
not working. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Contact your
authorized dealer.
The power steering system
required service. Stop the
Amber vehicle in a safe place.
Contact your authorized
dealer.
The power steering system
has detected a condition
within the power steering
Amber system or passive
entry/passive start system that
requires service. Contact your
authorized dealer.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
118
Information Displays
Starting System Message Press brake to start
Cranking time exceeded
Transmission Message Transmission too hot Press brake
Action / Description
Displays when starting the
-- vehicle as a reminder to apply
the brake.
--
Displays when the vehicle fails to start.
Action / Description
Displays when the transmission is overheating. Stop the vehicle in a safe spot and allow the transmission to Amber cool and the message disappears before proceeding. If the condition persists, contact your authorized dealer for service. Red Displays when the transmission is overheating. Stop the vehicle in a safe spot and allow the transmission to cool and the message disappears before proceeding. If the condition persists, contact your authorized dealer for service. If the vehicle is driven with this message active you may experience vehicle shudder as a further overheat warning.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Information Displays
119
Transmission Message
Action / Description
Transmission overheating Stop
Displays when the
safely
transmission is overheating.
Stop the vehicle in a safe spot
Red
and allow the transmission to cool before proceeding. If the
condition persists, contact
your authorized dealer for
service.
Transmission not in Park Select P
--
Displays as a reminder to shift into park.
Transmission malfunction
Displays when the
Service now
Red
transmission requires service due to a malfunction. Contact
your authorized dealer.
Use Brake Stop Safely
Displays when the vehicle
Red
needs to be brought to a safe stop to allow the transmission
to cool.
Transmission Hot / Stop or
Displays when the
Speed Up
transmission is overheating
when idling with the brake
applied for long periods such
as in heavy stop-and-go
-- traffic. Stop the vehicle in a
safe spot and allow the
transmission to cool before
proceeding or drive an
alternate route that allows less
idling/slower speeds.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
120
Information Displays
Transmission Message
Action / Description
Transmission Hot Wait XX min
Transmission Hot Wait ...
Transmission Ready
Transmission limited function Check handbook Transmission warming up Please wait
--
-- -- Amber --
Displays when the transmission is overheating. Stop the vehicle in a safe spot and allow the transmission to cool for the displayed time before proceeding. Displays when the transmission is overheating. Stop the vehicle in a safe spot and allow the transmission to cool before proceeding. Displays after an transmission overheating event and the transmission has cooled enough to allow proper transmission function. Displays when certain transmission features are disabled. Displays when the transmission needs a warming period before it will operate properly.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Information Displays
121
Tire pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Message Low Tire Pressure
Tire Pressure Monitor Fault
Tire Pressure Sensor Fault
Traction Control / AdvanceTrac® Message Traction control off
Action / Description
Displays when one or more
tires on your vehicle have low
Amber
tire pressure. Refer to Inflating Your Tires in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading
chapter.
Displays when the tire
pressure monitoring system is
Amber
malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to come
on, contact your authorized
dealer.
Displays when a tire pressure
sensor is malfunctioning, or
your spare tire is in use. For
more information on how the
system operates under these
conditions, refer to
Amber Understanding Your Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels
and Loading chapter. If the
warning stays on or continues
to come on, contact your
authorized dealer.
Action / Description
Displays when the traction -- control system has been
switched off.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
122
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception Factors AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 5401700, 1710 kHz
FM: 87.9107.7, 107.9 MHz
Distance and strength Terrain
Station overload
Radio reception factors The further you travel from an FM station, the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception. Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with the reception. When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in the audio system muting.
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed 4.75-inch (12 centimeter) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. You should use a permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels on your homemade CDs. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact your authorized dealer for further information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped discs or discs with a scratch protection film attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only. Clean the disc with an approved CD cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the disc toward the edge. Do not clean in a circular motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Audio System
123
MP3 Track and Folder Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and playing MP3 individual tracks and folder structures work as follows: · There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 track
mode (system default) and MP3 folder mode. · MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc. The
player numbers each MP3 track on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255. Note: The maximum number of playable MP3 files may be less depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio present. · MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file extension) and all folders containing MP3 files, from F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255. · Creating discs with only one level of folders helps with navigation through the disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 discs, it is important to understand how the system reads the structures you create. While various files may be present, (files with extensions other than mp3), only files with the .mp3 extension are played; other files are ignored by the system. This enables you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety of tasks on your work computer, home computer and your in-vehicle system.
In track mode, the system displays and plays the structure as if it were only one level deep (all .mp3 files play, regardless of being in a specific folder). In folder mode, the system only plays the .mp3 files in the current folder.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
124
AM/FM or AM/FM/CD
Audio System
A
BC D E
O
F
N
M
L
G
K
J IH
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: You can operate your audio system for up to one hour after you switch off the ignition. The system automatically turns off after one hour.
A. Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.
B. Cursor arrows: Press these buttons to scroll through on-screen audio system choices.
C. CD slot: Insert a CD.
D. OK: · Press the up and down or left and right arrow buttons to browse
menu selections. · Press OK to confirm menu selections.
E. INFO: Press this button to access any available radio or CD information.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Audio System
125
F. SOUND: · Press this button to access settings for Treble, Middle, Bass, Fade and
Balance. · Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the various settings.
When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow buttons to change the settings. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit. · Sound settings can be set for each audio source independently.
G. Memory presets: · In radio mode, store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio
station, tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until sound returns. · In CD mode, press one of these buttons to select a track.
H. SEEK: · Press and release this button to go to the next preset radio station or
disc track. · Press and hold this button to fast forward to the next strong radio
station, memory preset or through the current disc track.
I. ON/OFF: · Press this button to switch the system off and on. · Turn it to adjust the volume.
J. SEEK: · Press and release this button to go to the previous preset radio
station or disc track. · Press and hold this button to reverse to the previous strong radio
station, memory preset or through the current disc track.
K. MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features. See Menu structure later in this section.
L. AUX: Press this button to access your auxiliary input jack or switch between devices you plug into the input jack or USB port.
M. SIRIUS: Press this button to listen to SIRIUS satellite radio.
N. RADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequencies. Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select different radio functions.
O. CD: Press this button to listen to a CD. Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select on-screen options of Repeat or Shuffle.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
126
Audio System
AM/FM/CD WITH SYNC®
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Note: You can operate your audio system for up to one hour after you switch off the ignition. Press the ON/OFF control to operate the system with the ignition turned off. The system automatically turns off after one hour. A. Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Audio System
127
B. Cursor arrows: Press these buttons to scroll through on-screen audio system choices.
C. CD slot: Insert a CD.
D. OK: Press this button to confirm menu selections.
E. Clock: Set the time: 1. Press the H or M buttons on the outside of the display repeatedly
until the desired time appears. 2. Press OK to confirm the time. · You can also set the clock by pressing the MENU button and
scrolling to Clock Settings.
F. INFO: Press this button to access any available radio or CD information.
G. SOUND: · Press this button to access settings for Treble, Middle, Bass, Fade and
Balance. · Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the various settings.
When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow buttons to change the settings. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit. · Sound settings can be set for each audio source independently.
H. Number block: · In radio mode, store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio
station, tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until sound returns. · In CD mode, select a track. · In phone mode, enter a phone number.
I. Function Button 4: Select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).
J. Function Button 3: Select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).
K. SEEK: · Press and release this button to go to the next preset radio station or
disc track. · Press and hold this button to fast forward to the next strong radio
station, memory preset or through the current disc track.
L. ON/OFF: · Press this button to switch the system off and on. · Turn to adjust the volume.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
128
Audio System
M. SEEK: · Press and release this button to go to the previous preset radio
station or disc track. · Press and hold this button to reverse to the previous strong radio
station, memory preset or through the current disc track.
N. Function Button 2: Select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).
O. Function Button 1: Select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).
P. MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features. See Menu structure later in this section.
Q. PHONE: Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC® system. See the SYNC® chapter for more information.
R. AUX: Press this button to access your auxiliary input jack or switch between devices you plug into the input jack or USB port.
S. RADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequencies. Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select different radio functions.
T. CD: Press this button to listen to a CD. Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select on-screen options of Repeat or Shuffle.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Audio System
AM/FM/CD/SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO WITH SYNC®
129
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Note: You can operate your audio system for up to one hour after you switch off the ignition. Press the ON/OFF control to operate the system with the ignition turned off. The system automatically turns off after one hour. Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS satellite radio, may not be available in your location. Check with your authorized dealer. A. Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
130
Audio System
B. Cursor arrows: Press these buttons to scroll through on-screen audio system choices.
C. CD slot: Insert a CD.
D. OK: Press this button to confirm menu selections.
E. INFO: Press the button to access any available radio or CD information.
F. MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features. See Menu structure later in this section.
G. Sound: · Press this button to access settings for Treble, Middle, Bass, Fade and
Balance. · Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the various settings.
When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow buttons to change the settings. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit. · Sound settings can be set for each audio source independently.
H. Number block: · In radio mode, store your favorite stations for later access. When
tuned to any station, press and hold a preset button until sound returns. · In CD mode, press a button to select a track. · In phone mode, press the buttons enter a phone number. · The clock function does not work with this button. Press MENU and scroll to Clock Settings.
I. Function Button 4: Select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).
J. Function Button 3: Select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).
K. SEEK: · Press and release this button to go to the next preset radio station or
disc track. · Press and hold this button to fast forward to the next strong radio
station, memory preset or through the current disc track.
L. ON/OFF: · Press this button to turn the system off and on. · Turn it to adjust the volume.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Audio System
131
M. SEEK: · Press and release this button to go to the previous track or preset
radio station. · Press and hold this button to reverse to the previous strong radio
station, memory preset or through the current disc track.
N. Function Button 2: Select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).
O. Function Button 1: Select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).
P. PHONE: Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC® system. See the SYNC® chapter for more information.
Q. AUX: Press this button to access your auxiliary input jack or switch between devices you plug into the input jack or USB port.
R. SIRIUS: Press this button to listen to SIRIUS satellite radio.
S. RADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequencies bands. Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select different radio functions.
T. CD: Press this button to listen to a CD. Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select on-screen options of Repeat or Shuffle.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
132
Audio System
AM/FM/CD SONY® AUDIO SYSTEM
AB
C DE
G
F
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: The MyFord Touch® system controls most of the audio features. See the MyFord Touch® chapter for more information.
A. Power: Press this button to switch the system off and on.
B. SOURCE: Press this button to access different audio modes, such as AM, FM and A/V Input.
C. Seek, Reverse and Fast Forward: · In radio mode, select a frequency band and press one of these
buttons. The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction. · In SIRIUS mode, press these buttons to select the previous or next
channel. If a specific category is selected (such as Jazz, Rock or News), use these buttons to find the previous or next channel in the selected category. · In CD mode, press these buttons to select the previous or next track.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Audio System
133
D. SOUND: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Middle, Bass, Balance and Fade.
E. Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.
F. TUNE + and TUNE - : · In radio mode, press these buttons to manually search through the
radio frequency band. · In SIRIUS mode, press these buttons to find the next or previous
available satellite radio station.
G. Volume: Turn this control to adjust the volume.
MENU STRUCTURE
Note: Depending on your system, some options may appear slightly different.
Press MENU.
Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the options.
Press the right arrow to enter a menu. Press the left arrow to exit a menu. Press OK to confirm a selection.
Manual tune Scan AST PTY/Set Category
RBDS/RDS Text
Radio Settings
Use the left and right arrows to go up or down the frequency band
Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.
Select to store the six strongest local stations on the AM-AST and FM-AST frequency bands.
Select to have the system search by certain music categories (such as Rock, Pop or Country).
Select to view additional broadcast data, if available. This feature defaults to off. RBDS must be on for you to set a category.
Scan Show ESN
SIRIUS
Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.
Select to view your satellite radio electronic serial number (ESN). You need this number when communicating with SIRIUS® to activate, modify or track your account.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
134
Audio System
SIRIUS
Channel Guide
Select to view available satellite radio
channels. Press OK to open a list of the
following options for this channel: Tune
Channel, Skip Channel or Lock Channel. Once
you skip or lock a channel, you can only access
it by pressing Direct and entering the channel
number. Locking or unlocking a channel
requires your PIN.
Set Category
Select to view channel categories (such as
Pop, Rock or News). If you select a category,
seek and scan functions only stop on channels
in that category.
Alerts
Select to turn off or turn on alerts for songs,
artists or teams. The system alerts you when
the selection is playing on another channel.
Save up to 20 alerts.
Unlock All Stations Use your PIN to unlock previously locked
stations.
Skip No Stations Remove the skip feature from all the channels
you previously skipped.
Parental Lock (PIN) Select to create a PIN, which allows you to lock
or unlock channels. Your initial PIN is 1234.
Spd. Comp. Vol.
Sound Occupancy Mode RBDS/RDS Text
DSP
Audio Settings
Automatically adjusts the volume to compensate for speed and wind noise. You can set the system between 0 and +7.
Select to adjust settings for Treble, Middle, Bass, Fade and Balance.
Select to optimize sound quality for the chosen seating position.
Select to view additional broadcast data, if available. This feature defaults to off. RBDS must be on for you to set a category.
Choose between STEREO SURROUND mode and STEREO mode.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Audio System
135
Scan All Scan Folder CD Compression
Set Time Set Date 24h Mode
Dimming Language Temp. Setting
CD Settings Select to scan all disc selections. Select to scan all music in the current MP3 folder. Select to bring soft and loud passages together for a more consistent listening level.
Clock Settings Select to set the time. Select to set the calendar date. Select to view clock time in a 12hour mode or 24hour mode.
Display Settings Select to change display brightness. Select to display the language in English, French or Spanish. Select to display the outside temperature in Fahrenheit or Celsius.
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
WARNING: For safety reasons, do not connect or adjust the settings on your portable music player while your vehicle is moving.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
136
Audio System
WARNING: Store the portable music player in a secure location, such as the center console or the glove box, when your vehicle is moving. Hard objects may become projectiles in a crash or sudden stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury. The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be safely stored while your vehicle is moving.
The auxiliary input jack, located in
the center console (as shown) or
inside the glovebox, allows you to
connect and play music from your
portable music player through your
vehicle speakers. You can use any
LINE IN
portable music player designed for use with headphones. Your audio
extension cable must have male
1/8-inch. (3.5 millimeter) connectors
at each end.
1. Switch off the engine, radio and portable music player. Set the
parking brake and put the transmission in position P (vehicle with an
automatic transmission) or neutral (vehicle with a manual
transmission).
2. Plug the extension cable from the portable music player into the
auxiliary input jack.
3. Switch the radio on. Select either a tuned FM station or a CD.
4. Adjust the volume as desired.
5. Switch your portable music player on and adjust its volume to half its
maximum level.
6. Press AUX until LINE or LINE IN appears in the display. You
should hear music from your device even if it is low.
7. Adjust the volume on your portable music player until it reaches the
volume level of the FM station or CD. Do this by switching back and
forth between the AUX and FM or CD controls.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Audio System
137
USB PORT (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
The USB port allows you to plug in media playing devices, memory sticks and charge devices (if supported). See the SYNC chapter for more information.
LINE IN
MEDIA HUB (IF EQUIPPED) The media hub is located in the center console and has the following features:
A. A/V inputs
B. SD card slot
C. USB ports C
A
B
For more information, see the MyFord Touch chapter.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
138
Audio System
SATELLITE RADIO INFORMATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Satellite Radio Channels
SIRIUS® broadcasts a variety of music, news, sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels, visit www.siriusxm.com in the United States, www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at 18885397474.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos real-time operating system. eCos is published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
Antenna
For optimal reception performance, keep the
obstructions
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and
keep luggage and other material as far away
from the antenna as possible.
Terrain
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
Station overload
When you pass a ground-based broadcast
repeating tower, a stronger signal may
overtake a weaker one and the audio system
may mute.
Satellite radio signal Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to
interference
indicate the interference and the audio
system may mute.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Audio System
139
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Service
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes.
SIRIUS satellite radio is a subscription-based satellite radio service that broadcasts a variety of music, sports, news, weather, traffic and entertainment programming. Your factory-installed SIRIUS satellite radio system includes hardware and a limited subscription term which begins on the date of sale or lease of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for availability.
For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is required), the online media player and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels, and other features, please visit www.siriusxm.com in the United States, www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at 18885397474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or track your satellite radio account. When in satellite radio mode, you can view this number by pressing SIRIUS and memory preset 1 at the same time. To access your ESN, press the bottom left corner of the touchscreen, then SIRIUS > Options.
Troubleshooting Radio display
Acquiring
Sat Fault/SIRIUS system failure
Condition Radio requires more than two seconds to produce audio for the selected channel. There is an internal module or system failure present.
Possible action No action required. This message should disappear shortly.
If this message does not clear shortly, or with an ignition key cycle, your receiver may have a fault. See an authorized dealer for service.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
140
Audio System
Radio display Invalid Channel Unsubscribed Channel
No Signal
Updating Call SIRIUS 18885397474 No Channels Available
Subscription Updated
Condition
Possible action
The channel is no
Tune to another
longer available.
channel or choose
another preset.
Your subscription does Contact SIRIUS at
not include this
18885397474 to
channel.
subscribe to the
channel, or tune to
another channel.
The signal is lost from The signal is blocked.
the SIRIUS satellite or When you move into
SIRIUS tower to your an open area, the
vehicle antenna.
signal should return.
Update of channel
No action required.
programming in
The process may take
progress.
up to three minutes.
Your satellite service is Call SIRIUS at
no longer available. 18885397474 to
resolve subscription
issues.
All the channels in the Use the channel guide
selected category are to turn off the Lock or
either skipped or
Skip function on that
locked.
station.
SIRIUS has updated No action required.
the channels available
for your vehicle.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Climate Control
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
A
B
C
D
E
12 3
A/C
0
4
MAX
A/C
141
F
A. Fan speed control: Controls the volume of air circulated in your vehicle. Adjust to select the desired fan speed or switch off. If you switch the fan off, the windshield may fog up.
B. Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. When you select recirculated air, the button illuminates and the air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.
C. Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated in your vehicle. Adjust to select the desired temperature. If you select MAX A/C, the system distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel air vents. This mode is more economical and efficient than normal air conditioning. Note: When the temperature control is in the MAX A/C position, neither the air conditioning or recirculated air can be turned off.
D. Air conditioning: Press to switch the air conditioning off and on. Air conditioning cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve air conditioning when starting your vehicle, drive with the windows slightly open for two to three minutes.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
142
Climate Control
E. Air distribution control: Adjust to select the desired air distribution.
Select to distribute air through the instrument panel air vents.
Select to distribute air through the instrument panel and footwell air vents.
Select to distribute air through the footwell air vents.
Select to distribute air through the windshield and footwell air vents.
Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. You can also increase the temperature and fan speed to improve clearing.
F. Rear defrost: Turns the heated windows and mirrors off and on. See Heated windows and mirrors later in this chapter for more information.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Climate Control
143
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
AB
AC AD AE
MAX A/C
J
AI
AH
AG
AF
A. AUTO: Press to select automatic operation. The system automatically controls the temperature, amount and distribution of the airflow to reach and maintain your previously selected temperature.
B. Fan speed: Controls the volume of air circulated in your vehicle. Press to select the desired fan speed. The setting appears in the display.
C. On and off button: Press to switch the system off and on.
D. MAX Defrost: Press to distribute outside air through the windshield air vents. The system automatically turns on the air conditioning, sets the fan to the highest speed and the temperature to HI. When the air distribution is set in this position, you are unable to select recirculated air or manually adjust the fan speed and temperature control. Press the AUTO button to return to auto mode.
E. MAX A/C: Press to distribute maximum air conditioning through the instrument panel air vents. This mode is more economical and efficient than normal air conditioning.
F. Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.
G. Defrost: Press to distribute air through the windshield air vents. You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
H. Instrument panel: Press to distribute air through the instrument panel air vents.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
144
Climate Control
I. Footwell: Press to distribute air through the footwell air vents.
J. Air conditioning: Press to switch the air conditioning off and on. Air conditioning cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve air conditioning when starting your vehicle, drive with the windows slightly open for two to three minutes.
Temperature Control
You can set the temperature between 60°F (15.5°C) and 85°F (29.5°C) in 1°F (0.5°C) increments. In position LO, 59°F (15°C), the system switches to permanent cooling. In position HI, 86°F (30°C), the system switches to permanent heating. Note: If you select either position LO or HI, the system does not regulate a stable temperature. Mono Mode In this mode, the driver's control sets the temperature for both sides. If you adjust the setting using the rotary control on the driver's side, the system sets the passenger's side to the same temperature. Switching Mono Mode Off Select a temperature for the passenger's side using the rotary control on the passenger's side. Mono mode automatically switches off. The temperature on the driver's side remains unchanged. You can now adjust the driver's side and passenger's side temperatures independently of each another. Both temperature settings appear in the display. Switching Mono Mode Back On Press and hold the AUTO button. The passenger's side temperature changes to the driver's side temperature setting.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Climate Control
145
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may cause the windows to fog up.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air from the footwell air vents regardless of the air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside your vehicle, do not drive with the system switched off or with recirculated air always switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front seats as this may interfere with the airflow to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield.
Manual Climate Control
Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield during humid weather, adjust the air distribution control to the windshield air vents position. Increase the temperature and fan speed to improve clearing if required.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is not necessary. The system automatically adjusts to heat or cool the cabin to your selected temperature as quickly as possible. For the system to function efficiently, the instrument panel and side air vents should be fully open.
Note: At low ambient temperatures with AUTO selected, the system directs airflow to the windshield and side window vents and fan may run at a slow speed until the engine warms up.
Heating the Interior Quickly
Vehicles with manual climate Vehicles with automatic
control
climate control
1 Adjust the fan speed to the
Press the high fan speed button
highest speed setting.
control.
2 Adjust the temperature control Adjust the temperature control
to the highest setting.
to the highest setting.
3 Adjust the air distribution
Press the footwell button to
control to the footwell air vents distribute air to the footwell air
position.
vents.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
146
Climate Control
Recommended Settings for Heating
Vehicles with manual climate Vehicles with automatic
control
climate control
1 Adjust the fan speed to the
Press the slow fan speed button.
second speed setting.
2 Adjust the temperature control Adjust the temperature control
to the midway point of the hot to the midway point of the hot
settings.
settings.
3 Adjust the air distribution
Press the footwell and
control to the footwell and
windshield air distribution
windshield air vents position. buttons.
4
Close the instrument panel air
vents. Open the side air vents
and direct them toward the side
windows.
Cooling the Interior Quickly
Vehicles with manual climate Vehicles with automatic
control
climate control
1 Adjust the fan speed to the
Press AUTO.
highest speed setting.
2 Adjust the temperature control Adjust the temperature control
to MAX A/C.
to the desired setting.
3 Adjust the air distribution
control to the instrument panel
air vents position.
Recommended Settings for Cooling
Vehicles with manual climate Vehicles with automatic
control
climate control
1 Adjust the fan speed to the
Press the slow fan speed button.
second speed setting.
2 Adjust the temperature control Adjust the temperature control
to the midway point of the cold to the midway point of the cold
settings.
settings.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Climate Control
147
Vehicles with manual climate Vehicles with automatic
control
climate control
3 Adjust the air distribution
Press the instrument panel vent
control to the instrument panel button to distribute air to the
air vents position.
instrument panel air vents.
Vehicle Stationary for Extended Periods During Extreme High Ambient Temperatures
Vehicles with manual climate Vehicles with automatic
control
climate control
1 Apply the parking brake.
Apply the parking brake.
2 Move the transmission selector Move the transmission selector
lever to position P.
lever to position P.
3 Adjust the temperature control Press MAX A/C.
to MAX A/C.
4 Adjust the fan speed to the
lowest speed setting.
Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather
Vehicles with manual climate Vehicles with automatic
control
climate control
1 Adjust the air distribution
Press the windshield defrosting
control to the instrument panel and defogging button.
and footwell air vents positions.
2 Press A/C.
Adjust the temperature control
to the desired setting.
3 Adjust the temperature control
to the desired setting.
4 Adjust the fan speed to the
highest setting.
5 Direct the instrument panel side
air vents toward the side
windows.
6 Close the instrument panel
vents.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
148
Climate Control
Maximum Cooling Performance in Instrument Panel or Instrument Panel and Footwell Positions
Both manual and automatic climate control 1 Adjust the temperature control to the lowest setting. 2 Press the A/C and recirculated air buttons. 3 Adjust the fan speed to the highest setting initially and then
adjust it to suit the desired comfort level.
HEATED WINDOWS AND MIRRORS (IF EQUIPPED)
Heated Rear Window
Note: The ignition must be switched on to use this feature.
Press the button to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog. Press the button again within 10 minutes to switch it off. It switches off automatically after 10 minutes, or when you switch the ignition off.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines. Your warranty does not cover this damage.
Heated Exterior Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to readjust the mirror glass that has frozen in place. These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
Both mirrors heat to remove ice, mist and fog when you turn the rear window defroster on.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Climate Control
149
CABIN AIR FILTER
Note: A cabin air filter must be installed at all times to prevent foreign objects from entering the system. Running the system without a filter in place could result in degradation or damage to the system.
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air filter; it is located in the passenger footwell area.
The particulate air filtration system is designed to reduce the concentration of airborne particles, such as dust, spores and pollen, in the air being supplied to the interior of the vehicle. The particulate filtration system gives the following benefits to customers: · Improves the customer's driving comfort by reducing particle
concentration. · Improves the interior compartment cleanliness. · Protects the climate control components from particle deposits.
The filter should be replaced at regular intervals. See the Scheduled Maintenance chapter.
For additional information, or to replace the filter, see an authorized dealer.
REMOTE START CLIMATE OPERATION
The climate control system adjusts the cabin temperature during remote start.
You cannot adjust the system during remote start operation. Turn the ignition on to return the system to its previous settings. You can now make adjustments. You will need to turn certain vehicle-dependent features back on, such as: · heated seats · heated mirrors · heated rear window.
You can adjust the settings using the information display controls. See the Information Displays chapter.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
150
Climate Control
Automatic Climate Systems
Automatic Settings
You can set the climate control to operate in AUTO mode through the information display setting: Remote Start > Climate Control > Heater A/C > Auto. The climate control system automatically sets the interior temperature to 72°F (22°C).
In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F (22°C).
In moderate weather, the system either heats or cools (based on previous settings). The rear defroster, heated mirrors and heated seats do not automatically turn on.
In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F (22°C). The rear defroster and heated mirrors automatically turn on.
Last Settings
You can set the climate control to operate using the last climate control settings through the information display setting: Remote Start > Climate Control > Heater A/C > Last Settings. The climate control system automatically uses the settings last selected before you turned off the engine.
Heated and Cooled Devices
The climate control system controls other heated and cooled devices inside the vehicle. You can switch these devices on (if available, and selected to AUTO in the information displays) during remote start. Heated devices usually switch on during cold weather, and cooled devices during hot weather.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Seats
151
SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in serious injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright against your seat back, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: Do not recline the seat back as this can cause the occupant to slide under the seat's safety belt, resulting in severe personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not place objects higher than the seat backs to reduce the risk of injury in a crash or during heavy braking or when stopping suddenly.
When you use them properly, the seat, head restraint, safety belt and airbags will provide optimum protection in the event of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these guidelines:
· Do not recline the seat back more than 30 degrees from vertical.
· Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine as far back as possible.
· Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forward as possible, remaining comfortable.
· Keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. We recommend a minimum of 10 inches (250 millimeters) between your breastbone and the airbag cover.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
152
Seats
· Hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent. · Bend your legs slightly so that you can press the pedals fully. · Position the shoulder strap of the safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is comfortable and that you can maintain full control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash, the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in or operate the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its proper position. The driver should never adjust the head restraint while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING: The adjustable head restraint is a safety device. Whenever possible, it should be installed and properly adjusted when the seat is occupied.
WARNING: Install the head restraint properly to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.
Note: Adjust the seat back to an upright driving position before adjusting any head restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forward as possible, remaining comfortable. For occupants of extremely tall stature, adjust the head restraint to its highest position.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Seats
Front Seat Head Restraints
Rear Seat Outboard Head Restraints
153
Rear Seat Center Head Restraints
The head restraints consist of: A. An energy absorbing head restraint B. Two steel stems C. Guide sleeve adjust and release button D. Guide sleeve unlock and remove button
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
154
Seats
Adjusting the Head Restraint Raise: Pull up the head restraint. Lower: 1. Press and hold button C. 2. Push the head restraint down. Remove: 1. Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest adjustment position. 2. Press and hold buttons C and D. 3. Pull the head restraint up. Install: Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the head restraint down until it locks. Make sure the front of the head restraint faces the front of the vehicle.
Tilting Head Restraints (If Equipped) The front head restraints may have a tilting feature for extra comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the following:
1. Adjust the seat back to an upright driving or riding position. 2. Tilt the head restraint forward by gently pulling the top of the head restraint.
Once it is in its forward-most position, tilt it forward once more to release it to the upright position.
Note: Do not attempt to force the head restraint backward after it is tilted. Instead, continue tilting it forward until the head restraint releases to the upright position.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Seats
155
MANUAL SEATS
WARNING: Never adjust the driver's seat or seat back when the vehicle is moving.
WARNING: Rock the seat backward and forward after releasing the lever to make sure that it is fully engaged.
Moving the Seat Backward and Forward
Adjust the Height of the Driver's Seat
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
156
Seats
Recline Adjustment
WARNING: Reclining the seat back can cause an occupant to slide under the seat's safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a crash.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Seats
157
POWER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Never adjust the driver's seat or seat back when the vehicle is moving.
WARNING: Reclining the seat back can cause an occupant to slide under the seat's safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a crash.
Lumbar Adjustment (If Equipped)
Use the lever located on the side of the seat back to adjust the lumbar.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
158
Seats
HEATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions, must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles, or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following: · Place heavy objects on the seat · Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly. · Operate the heated seats unless the engine is running. Doing so could
drain the vehicle's battery.
Adjust the control to the desired heat setting.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Seats
159
Folding the Rear Seats
Note: Before lowering the seat back(s), remove the outboard head restraints.
To lower the seat back(s) from inside the vehicle, do the following:
A
A
1. Press the unlock buttons (A) down.
2. Push the seat back forward.
Note: Your vehicle may have split seat backs that must be folded individually.
3. Stow the safety belt in the belt stowage clip. This will prevent the safety belt from getting caught in the seat latch.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
160
Seats
When raising the seat back(s), make sure you hear the seat latch into place and that no red portion is visible on the release button on both sides.
Flip Up Seat Cushions (If Equipped)
WARNING: Before returning the seat back to its original position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seat back. Make sure that the safety belt is not laying on the seat latch. After returning the seat back to its original position, pull on the seat back to make sure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or crash.
For additional cargo space, flip the seat cushions up before folding the seat back. This feature is only available on vehicles with a split folding seat back.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Auxiliary Power Points
161
AUXILIARY POWER POINTS
WARNING: Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter socket (if equipped). Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your warranty, and can result in fire or serious injury.
Note: If used when the engine is not running, the battery will discharge. There may be insufficient power to restart your engine.
Note: Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power point. This will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Note: Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the vehicle capacity of 12 volts DC 180 watts or a fuse may blow.
Note: Do not use the power point for operating a cigarette lighter element.
Note: Improper use of the power point can cause damage not covered by your warranty.
Note: Always keep the power point caps closed when not in use.
Run the engine for full capacity use of the power point. To prevent the battery from being discharged: · Do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is
not running. · Do not leave devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is
parked for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be found: · on the center console · on the rear of the center console.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
162
Storage Compartments
CENTER CONSOLE
Stow items in the cupholder carefully as items may become loose during hard braking, acceleration or collisions, including hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include: · Cupholders · Utility compartment · Auxiliary AV connections, USB port, SD slot
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
The appearance of the overhead console will vary according to your option package.
Press near the rear edge of the door to open it.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Starting and Stopping the Engine
163
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or other damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle on dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door before you start the engine.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics for approximately 5 miles (8 kilometers) after you connect it. This is because the engine management system must realign itself with the engine. You may disregard any unusual driving characteristics during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all Canadian interference-causing equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field or radio noise.
Do not press the accelerator pedal while starting the engine. If you have difficulty starting the engine, see Failure to start later in this section.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
164
Starting and Stopping the Engine
IGNITION SWITCH (IF EQUIPPED)
0 (Off): The ignition is off. Note: When you switch the ignition off and leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in the ignition. This could cause your vehicle battery to lose charge.
I (Accessory): Allows the electrical accessories, such as the radio, to operate while the engine is not running. Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this position for too long. This could cause your vehicle battery to lose charge.
II (On): All electrical circuits are operational and the warning lamps and indicators illuminate.
III (Start): Cranks the engine.
KEYLESS STARTING (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The keyless starting system may not function if the key is close to metal objects or electronic devices such as mobile phones.
Note: A valid key must be located inside the vehicle to switch the ignition on and start the engine.
Note: When locking your vehicle, any remote controls left inside the vehicle may become disabled. A message may appear in the information display indicating that there is no key detected if you try to start the engine. Press the unlock button on the remote control to enable it, then start the engine.
The start button is located on the instrument panel near the steering wheel.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Starting and Stopping the Engine
165
Ignition On Mode
ENGINE
To switch the ignition on, press the start button. All electrical circuits and accessories are operational, and warning lamps and indicators illuminate.
START STOP
STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE
When you start your engine, the idle speed increases to warm the engine up. If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
Before starting your vehicle, check the following: · Make sure all occupants have fastened their safety belts. · Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off. · Make sure the parking brake is on. · Move the transmission selector lever to position P. · Switch the ignition on.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. 1. Fully press the brake pedal. 2. Move the transmission selector lever to position P or N. 3. Start the engine. The engine may continue cranking for up to
15 seconds or until it starts.
Note: If you cannot start your engine on the first try, wait for a short period of time and try again.
If you have difficulty starting the engine when the temperature is below -13°F (-25°C), press the accelerator pedal slightly and try again.
If you cannot start your engine after three attempts, wait 10 seconds, then follow this procedure: 1. Fully press the brake pedal. 2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and hold it there. 3. Move the transmission selector lever to position P or N. 4. Start the engine.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
166
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have this checked immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes. Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects.
Important Ventilating Information If you stop your vehicle and leave the engine idling for long periods of time, we recommend that you do one of the following: · Open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5 centimeters). · Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in property damage or physical injury.
WARNING: Do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. There is a risk of electrical shock.
Note: The heater is most effective when outdoor temperatures are below 0°F (-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by warming the engine coolant. This allows the climate control system to respond quickly. The equipment includes a heater element (installed in the engine block) and a wire harness. You can connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A/C electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following for safe and correct operation:
· Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord that is product certified by Underwriter's Laboratory or Canadian Standards Association. This extension cord must be able to be used outdoors, in cold temperatures, and be clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor Appliances. Never use an indoor extension cord outdoors; it could result in an electric shock or become a fire hazard.
· Use as short an extension cord as possible. · Do not use multiple extension cords.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Starting and Stopping the Engine
167
· Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug and the heater cord plug connections are free and clear of water. This could cause an electric shock or fire.
· Make sure your vehicle is parked in a clean area, clear of combustibles.
· Make sure the heater, heater cord and extension cord are firmly connected.
· Check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has been operating for approximately 30 minutes.
· Make sure the system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving your vehicle. Make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the block heater cord plug when not in use.
· Keep plug terminals clean and free of dirt and corrosion.
· Make sure the heater system is checked for proper operation before winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with a dry cloth, if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of use. The system does not have a thermostat. It achieves maximum temperature after approximately three hours of operation. Using the heater longer than three hours does not improve system performance and unnecessarily uses electricity.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
168
Fuel and Refueling
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious personal injury.
WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled.
WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an ungrounded fuel container.
WARNING: Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: Flexible fuel components and standard unleaded gasoline fuel components are not interchangeable. If your vehicle is not serviced in accordance with flexible fuel vehicles procedures, damage may occur and your warranty may be invalidated.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel: · Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling
your vehicle. · Always turn off the vehicle before refueling.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Fuel and Refueling
169
· Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed, call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.
· Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases, excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury.
· Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury.
· Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
· Be particularly careful if you are taking antabuse or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors, or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction.
· Flex fuel vehicle fuel tanks may contain zero to 85% ethanol. Any fuel blends containing gasoline and ethanol should be treated the same as Fuel Ethanol. Flex fuel vehicles have a yellow bezel placed over the fuel fill inlet.
Pure ethanol is the alcohol which is the intoxicating agent in liquor, beer and wine. It is distilled from the fermentation of plants such as field corn and sugar cane. When ethanol is produced for use in motor fuels, a small amount of gasoline is added to make it unfit for beverage use. The resulting ethanol blend is called denatured fuel ethanol meaning that it is denatured with 2% to 5% gasoline and is suitable for automotive use.
During the summer season, fuel ethanol may contain a maximum of 85% denatured ethanol (Ed85) and 15% unleaded gasoline. The fuel ethanol has a higher octane rating than unleaded regular or premium gasoline and this allows the design of engines with greater efficiency and power.
Winter blends may contain up to 75% denatured ethanol (Ed75) and up to 25% unleaded gasoline to enhance cold engine starts. Severely cold weather may require additional measures for reliable starting.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
170
Fuel and Refueling
Ethanol is more chemically active than gasoline. It corrodes some metals and causes some plastic and rubber components to swell, break down or become brittle and crack, especially when mixed with gasoline. Special materials and procedures have been developed for flexible fuel vehicles and the dispensers used by ethanol fuel providers.
FUEL QUALITY
Note: Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause powertrain damage and a loss of vehicle performance; repairs may not be covered under warranty.
Choosing the Right Fuel
Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum of 15% ethanol. Do not use fuel ethanol (E85), diesel fuel, fuel-methanol, leaded fuel or any other fuel because it could damage or impair the emission control system.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic compounds, including manganese-based additives. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law.
Choosing the Right Fuel With a Flex Fuel Vehicle (If Equipped)
Note: If your vehicle is flex fuel capable, it will have a yellow bezel placed over the fuel fill inlet.
Flex fuel vehicles are designed to use only FUEL ETHANOL (Ed75-Ed85) fuel blends which contain 51 to 83% ethanol and UNLEADED fuel regular unleaded gasoline or any mixture of the two fuels.
It is best not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85. If you do switch fuels, it is recommended that you add as much fuel as possible--at least half a tank. Do not add less than five gallons (18.9 liters) when refueling. You should drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 miles (8 kilometers) to allow the vehicle to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration. If you exclusively use E85 fuel, it is recommended to fill the fuel tank with regular unleaded gasoline at each scheduled oil change.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic compounds, including manganese-based additives. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Fuel and Refueling
171
Octane Recommendations
Regular unleaded gasoline with a
87
(R+M)/2 METHOD
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 is recommended. Some stations offer fuels posted as Regular with an octane rating below 87,
particularly in high altitude areas. Do not use fuels with a posted octane
rating below 87.
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
· You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine. On restarting, crank time will be a few seconds longer than normal. With keyless ignition, just start the engine. Crank time will be longer than usual.
· Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8 liters) of fuel is enough to restart the engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than 1 gallon (3.8 liters) may be required.
· The service engine soon indicator may come on. For more information on the service engine soon indicator, see Warning Lamps and Indicators in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Refilling with a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of a portable fuel container or aftermarket funnel into the capless fuel system. This could damage the fuel system and its seal, and may cause fuel to run onto the ground instead of filling the tank, which could result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not try to pry open or push open the capless fuel system with foreign objects. This could damage the fuel system and its seal and cause injury to you or others.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
172
Fuel and Refueling
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels; they will not work with the capless fuel system and can damage it. The included funnel has been specially designed to work safely with your vehicle.
When filling the vehicle's fuel tank from a portable fuel container, use the funnel included with the vehicle.
1. Locate the white plastic funnel in the spare tire compartment.
2. Slowly insert the funnel into the capless fuel system.
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel from the portable fuel container.
4. When done, clean the funnel or properly dispose of it. Extra funnels can be purchased from your authorized dealer if you choose to dispose of the funnel.
REFUELING
WARNING: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others: · Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island. · Turn off your engine when you are refueling. · Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle. · Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel. · Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle - this is against the law in some places. · Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel. · Do not use personal electronic devices while refueling.
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when filling an ungrounded fuel container: · Place approved fuel container on the ground. · DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area). · Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling. · DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Fuel and Refueling
173
Using the Easy FuelTM Capless Fuel System
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. Insert the fuel nozzle slowly. If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler door, do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious personal injury.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Put the vehicle in P (Park) and turn the ignition off.
2. Open the fuel filler door.
3. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into the fuel system, and leave the nozzle fully inserted to open both doors until you are done pumping. Hold handle higher during insertion for easier access.
4. After you are done pumping fuel, slowly remove the fuel filler nozzle--allow about five to ten seconds after pumping fuel before removing the fuel filler nozzle. This allows residual fuel to drain back into the fuel tank and not spill onto the vehicle.
Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if overfilling the fuel tank. Do not overfill the tank to the point that the fuel is able to bypass the fuel filler nozzle. The overfilled fuel may run down the drain located below and in front of the fuel filler door.
If the fuel fill inlet was not properly closed, a Check Fuel Fill Inlet message may appear on the information display screen. At the next opportunity, do the following:
1. Safely pull off the road.
2. Put the vehicle in P (Park) and turn the ignition off.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
174
Fuel and Refueling
3. Open the fuel filler door and remove any visible debris from the fuel fill opening.
4. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel fill funnel provided with the vehicle several times to dislodge any debris and/or allow the inlet to close properly.
If this action corrects the problem, the message may not reset immediately. It may take several driving cycles for the message to turn off. A driving cycle consists of an engine start-up (after four or more hours with the engine off) followed by city/highway driving. Continuing to drive with the message on may cause the service engine soon lamp to turn on as well.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Filling the Tank
The advertised capacity is the indicated capacity and the empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty. Empty reserve is the amount of fuel in the tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
Note: The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank: · Turn the ignition off before fueling; an inaccurate reading results if the
engine is left running. · Use the same fill rate (lowmediumhigh) each time the tank is filled. · Allow no more than two automatic clickoffs when filling.
Results are most accurate when the filling method is consistent.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers) of driving (this is your engine's break-in period); a more accurate measurement is obtained after 2000 miles3000 miles (3200 kilometers 4800 kilometers). Also, fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are not accurate ways to measure fuel economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Fuel and Refueling
175
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading.
5. Calculate fuel economy as follows:
Standard: Divide miles traveled by gallons used.
Metric: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city or highway). This provides an accurate estimate of the vehicle's fuel economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records during summer and winter show how temperature impacts fuel economy. In general, lower temperatures mean lower fuel economy.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly:
· Use only the specified fuel listed. · Avoid running out of fuel. · Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
· Have the items listed in Scheduled Maintenance Information performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in Scheduled Maintenance Information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
176
Fuel and Refueling
If other than Ford, Motorcraft® or Ford-authorized parts are used for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon indicator, charging system warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust system inspected and repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working. Information about your vehicle's emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine. This decal also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your warranty information for complete emission warranty information.
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine's emission control system. This system is commonly known as the on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine soon indicator to illuminate. Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel--the engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel--the engine may misfire or run poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have been properly closed. See Easy Fuel® No Cap Fuel System in this chapter.
4. Driving through deep water--the electrical system may be wet.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Fuel and Refueling
177
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present, the service engine soon indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started. A driving cycle consists of a cold engine start-up followed by mixed city or highway driving. No additional vehicle service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent, continued driving with the service engine soon indicator on can result in increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and transmission smoothness, and can lead to more costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state, provincial and local governments may have Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon indicator is on or the bulb does not work, the vehicle may need to be serviced. See On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II) in this chapter.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the service engine soon indicator is on or not working properly (bulb is burned out), or if the OBD-II system has determined that some of the emission control systems have not been properly checked. In this case, the vehicle is considered not ready for I/M testing.
If the vehicle's engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the service engine soon indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if the service engine soon indicator stays on solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for I/M testing.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
178
Fuel and Refueling
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway or highway followed by 20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once the engine is started, do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will have to be repeated.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Transmission
179
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
WARNING: Do not apply the brake pedal and accelerator pedal simultaneously. Applying both pedals simultaneously for more than three seconds will limit engine rpm, which may result in difficulty maintaining speed in traffic and could lead to serious injury.
PowerShift Fuel Efficient Transmission
Your vehicle has been designed to improve fuel economy by reducing fuel usage while coasting or decelerating. When you take your foot off the accelerator pedal and the vehicle begins to slow down, the torque converter clutch locks up and aggressively shuts off fuel flow to the engine while decelerating. This fuel economy benefit may be perceived as a light to medium braking sensation when removing your foot from the accelerator pedal.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the front wheels from turning.
To put your vehicle in gear: · Press the brake pedal · Move the gearshift lever into the
desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park): · Come to a complete stop · Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward. Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R (Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
P R N D L
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
180
Transmission
D (Drive)
The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission operates in gears one through six.
D (Drive) with Overdrive Cancel/Grade Assist
Pressing the transmission control switch on the side of the gearshift lever activates overdrive cancel and grade assist.
P R N D L
Overdrive cancel/grade assist
· Overdrive is deactivated. · The transmission operates in gears one through five.
· The grade assist lamp in the instrument cluster is illuminated. · Improves driving experience in hilly terrain or mountainous areas by
providing additional grade (engine) braking and extends lower gear operation on uphill climbs.
· Provides additional engine braking through the automatic transmission shift strategy which reacts to vehicle inputs (vehicle acceleration, accelerator pedal, brake pedal and vehicle speed).
· Allows the transmission to select gears that will provide the desired engine braking based on the vehicle inputs mentioned above. This will increase engine RPM during engine braking.
Overdrive cancel with grade assist is designed to provide optimal gear selection in hilly terrain or mountainous areas. It is recommended that you return to D (Drive) on flat terrain to provide the best fuel economy and transmission function.
To return to D (Drive), press the transmission control switch again.
· The grade assist lamp in the instrument cluster will not be illuminated. · The transmission will operate in gears one through six.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Transmission
181
L (Low)
This position: · Provides maximum engine braking. · Will downshift to the lowest available gear for the current vehicle
speed; allows for first gear when vehicle reaches slower speeds. · Is not intended for use under extended or normal driving conditions
and results in lower fuel economy.
S (Sport) (If Equipped)
Moving the gearshift lever to S (Sport): · Provides additional grade (engine) braking and extends lower gear
operation to enhance performance for uphill climbs, hilly terrain or mountainous areas. This will increase engine RPM during engine braking. · Provides additional lower gear operation through the automatic transmission shift strategy which reacts to vehicle inputs (vehicle acceleration, accelerator pedal, brake pedal and vehicle speed). · Gears are selected more quickly and at higher engine speeds.
Understanding Your SelectShift Automatic® Transmission (If Equipped)
Note: Your transmission must be in S (Sport) for SelectShift to operate properly.
Your SelectShift automatic transmission gives you the ability to manually change gears if you'd like. To use SelectShift, move the gearshift lever into S (Sport). Now you can use the thumb toggle on the side of your gearshift lever to select gears.
When using the toggle for manual shifting: · Press (+) on the toggle to
upshift. · Press () on the toggle to
downshift.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
182
Transmission
Upshift to the recommended shift speeds according to the following chart.
Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel economy)
Shift from:
1-2
15 mph (24 km/h)
2-3
25 mph (40 km/h)
3-4
40 mph (64 km/h)
4-5
45 mph (72 km/h)
5-6
50 mph (80 km/h)
The instrument cluster will show the current selected gear you are in.
SelectShift will automatically make some downshifts for you if it has determined that you have not downshifted in time. Although SelectShift will make some downshifts for you, it will still allow you to downshift at any time as long as SelectShift determines that the engine will not be damaged from over-revving.
Note: If manual control is no longer desired, return the gear shift lever from S (Sport) to D (Drive).
Note: Engine damage may occur if excessive engine revving is held without shifting.
Brake-Shift Interlock
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brake lamps are working.
WARNING: When doing this procedure, you will be taking the vehicle out of park which means the vehicle can roll freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always fully set the parking brake prior to doing this procedure. Use wheel chocks if appropriate.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. See your authorized dealer.
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is in the on position unless the brake pedal is pressed.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Transmission
183
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in the on position and the brake pedal pressed, it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle's brake lamps are not operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
If the fuse is not blown and the brake lamps are working properly, the following procedure will allow you to move the gearshift lever from P (Park):
1. Apply the parking brake, turn the ignition key to the off position and remove the key.
2. Using a screwdriver (or similar tool), carefully pry off and remove the passenger side access cover. Remove the fastener, then remove the console side panel to expose the inside of the shifter assembly.
3. Locate the brake shift interlock lever on the passenger side of the shifter assembly.
4. Apply the brake pedal. Using a screwdriver (or similar tool), press and hold the white brake shift interlock lever forward while pulling the gearshift lever out of the P (Park) position and into the N (Neutral) position.
5. Reinstall the console side panel and attach the fastener. 6. Reinstall the access cover. 7. Apply the brake pedal, start the vehicle and release the parking brake.
See your authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure is used.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud or Snow Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
184
Transmission
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
Using the Clutch Manual transmission vehicles have a starter interlock that prevents starting the engine unless the clutch pedal is fully pressed.
To start the vehicle:
1. Make sure the parking brake is fully set.
2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor, then put the gearshift lever in the neutral position.
1 3 5 3. Start the engine. 4. Press the brake pedal and move the gearshift lever to the desired gear; position 1 or position R .
2 4R 5. Release the parking brake, then slowly release the clutch pedal while slowly pressing on the accelerator.
During each shift, the clutch pedal must be fully pressed to the floor. Make sure the floor mat is properly positioned so it does not interfere with the full extension of the clutch pedal.
Note: Failure to fully press the clutch pedal to the floor may cause increased shift efforts, prematurely wear transmission components or damage the transmission.
Note: Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or use the clutch pedal to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a hill. These actions will reduce the life of the clutch.
Recommended Shift Speeds
The engine is designed to operate at a minimum of 1250 RPM for optimal power, fuel economy, and durability. When driving a vehicle equipped with a manual transmission, do not operate the engine below 1250 RPM while driving with the transmission in any gear (also known as lugging). This does not apply while starting or idling the engine while the transmission is in neutral and/or the clutch pedal is pressed. Lugging the engine below 1250 RPM may result in damage to the vehicle powertrain, poor fuel economy, poor acceleration, and undesirable noise, vibration, and harshness. Choose the next lowest gear until a proper engine RPM is reached.
Note: Do not downshift into 1 (First) when your vehicle is moving faster than 15 mph (24 km/h). This will damage the clutch.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Transmission
185
Upshift according to the following chart:
Recommended upshifts (for best fuel economy) when accelerating
5-speed manual transmission
Shift from:
1-2
14 mph (23 km/h)
2-3
24 mph (39 km/h)
3-4
32 mph (51 km/h)
4-5
44 mph (71 km/h)
Reverse
Note: Make sure that your vehicle is at a complete stop before you shift into R (Reverse). Failure to do so may damage the transmission.
Note: The gearshift lever can only be moved into R (Reverse) by moving it from left of 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth) before shifting into R (Reverse). This is a lockout feature that protects the transmission from accidentally being shifted into R (Reverse) from 5 (Fifth).
Hold the clutch pedal down and move the gearshift lever into the neutral position. Shift into R (Reverse).
If R (Reverse) is not fully engaged, press the clutch pedal down and return the gearshift to the neutral position. Release the clutch pedal for a moment, then press it down and shift to R (Reverse) again.
Parking Your Vehicle
WARNING: Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move unexpectedly and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set the parking brake fully.
To park your vehicle: 1. Apply the brake and shift into the neutral position. 2. Fully apply the parking brake, hold the clutch pedal down, then shift into position 1. 3. Turn the ignition off.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
186
Transmission
HILL START ASSIST (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The hill start assist feature does not replace the parking brake. When you leave the vehicle, always apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into P (Park) for automatic transmission or 1st gear for manual transmissions.
WARNING: You must remain in the vehicle once you have activated the hill start assist feature.
WARNING: During all times, you are responsible for controlling the vehicle, supervising the hill start assist system and intervening, if required.
WARNING: If the engine is revved excessively, or if a malfunction is detected when the hill start assist feature is active, the hill start assist feature will be deactivated.
This feature makes it easier to pull away when the vehicle is on a slope without the need to use the parking brake. When this feature is active, the vehicle will remain stationary on the slope for two to three seconds after you release the brake pedal. This allows you time to move your foot from the brake to the accelerator pedal. The brakes are released automatically once the engine has developed sufficient drive to prevent the vehicle from rolling down the slope. This is an advantage when pulling away on a slope, (for example from a car park ramp, traffic lights or when reversing uphill into a parking space).
This feature is activated automatically on any slope that can result in significant vehicle rollback. This feature will not operate if the parking brake is activated.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Transmission
187
Using Hill Start Assist
Note: If the engine is revved excessively, hill start assist will be deactivated.
1. Press the brake pedal to bring the vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep the brake pedal pressed.
2. If the sensors detect that the vehicle is on a slope, the hill start assist feature will be activated automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the brake pedal, the vehicle will remain on the slope without rolling away for approximately two or three seconds. This hold time will automatically be extended if you are in the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The brakes will be released automatically.
Note: Using the brakes and the hill start assist is the recommended method of holding a position on a hill. It is not recommended to use the accelerator pedal and engine torque to hold a hill position for an extended period of time. Doing so will over heat the clutch in vehicles equipped with a manual transmissions.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
188
Brakes
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn out and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If your vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, you should take it to an authorized dealer for inspection.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the wheels, even under normal driving conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise. See the Vehicle Care chapter for wheel cleaning instructions.
See the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on the brake system warning light.
Wet brakes result in reduced braking efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a few times when driving from a car wash or standing water to dry the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
If the accelerator pedal becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady and firm pressure to the brake pedal to slow your vehicle and reduce engine power. If you experience this condition, apply the brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Turn the engine off, shift to position P and apply the parking brake, then inspect the accelerator pedal for any interferences. If none are found and the condition persists, have your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized dealer.
Brake Assist
Brake assist detects when you brake heavily by measuring the rate at which you press the brake pedal. It provides maximum braking efficiency as long as you press the pedal. Brake assist can reduce stopping distances in critical situations.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Brakes
189
Anti-Lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by keeping the brakes from locking.
The anti-lock brake system lamp momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned on. If the light does not illuminate during start-up, remains on or flashes, the anti-lock brake system may be disabled and may need to be serviced.
If the anti-lock brake system is disabled, normal braking is still effective. If the brake warning lamp illuminates with the parking brake released, have your brake system serviced immediately.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
When the system is operating, the brake pedal will pulse and may travel further. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You may also hear a noise from the system. This is normal.
The anti-lock braking system will not eliminate the dangers inherent when: · you drive too closely to the vehicle in front of you. · your vehicle is hydroplaning. · you take corners too fast. · the road surface is poor.
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. See your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the transmission selector lever is securely latched in position P (automatic transmission) or position 1 (manual transmission).
To set the parking brake, pull the parking brake handle up as far as possible. To release the parking brake: 1. Press and hold the button located at the end of the parking brake handle. 2. Pull the handle up slightly, then push the handle down.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
190
Traction Control
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system applies the brakes to individual wheels and, when needed, reduces engine power at the same time. If the wheels spin when accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces, the system reduces engine power in order to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
In certain situations (for example, stuck in snow or mud), turning the traction control off may be beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin with full engine power. Turn the traction control system off through the information display. This option may not be available for all models. See the Information Displays chapter.
System Indicator Lights and Messages
WARNING: If a failure has been detected within the Traction Control System, the stability control light will illuminate steadily. Verify that the Traction Control System was not manually disabled through the information display. If the stability control light still illuminates steadily, have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. Operating your vehicle with Traction Control disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
The stability control light temporarily illuminates on engine start-up and flashes when a driving condition activates the stability system.
The stability control off light temporarily illuminates on engine start-up and stays on when the traction control system is turned off.
When the traction control system is turned off or on, a message appears in the information display showing system status.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Stability Control
191
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Vehicle modifications involving braking system, aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire construction and wheel or tire size may change the handling characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance of the AdvanceTrac® system. In addition, installing any stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac® system. Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from the front center console, the tunnel, and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTrac® sensors. Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac® system could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNING: Remember that even advanced technology cannot defy the laws of physics. It is always possible to lose control of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage. Activation of the AdvanceTrac® system is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road; this could reduce the operator's ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If your AdvanceTrac® system activates, SLOW DOWN.
The AdvanceTrac® system helps you keep control of your vehicle when on a slippery surface. The electronic stability control portion of the system helps avoid skids and lateral slides and the traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction. See the Traction Control chapter for details on traction control system operation.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
192
Stability Control
A Vehicle without AdvanceTrac® skidding off its intended route. B Vehicle with AdvanceTrac® maintaining control on a slippery surface.
USING ADVANCETRAC®
The system automatically activates when you start your engine. The AdvanceTrac® system cannot be completely turned off, but the electronic stability control portion of the system is disabled when the transmission is in position R. You can turn off the traction control portion of the system independently. See the Traction Control chapter.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Parking Aids
193
SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, please read and understand the limitations of the system as contained in this section. Sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at parking speeds. Traffic control systems, inclement weather, air brakes, and external motors and fans may also affect the function of the sensing system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in R (Reverse) and when using the sensing system.
WARNING: This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects, particularly those close to the ground.
WARNING: Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal detection zone of the system, may create false beeps.
Note: Keep the sensors (located on the bumper/fascia) free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors are covered, the system's accuracy can be affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper/fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with MyKey®, it is possible to prevent turning the sensing system off. Refer to the MyKey® chapter.
The sensing system warns the driver of obstacles within a certain range of the bumper area. The system turns on automatically whenever the ignition is switched on.
When receiving a detection warning, the radio volume is reduced to a predetermined level. After the warning goes away, the radio volume returns to the previous level.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
194
Parking Aids
Using the Front and Rear Sensing System
Rear Sensing System
The rear sensors are only active when the transmission is in R (Reverse). As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the rate of the audible warning increases. When the obstacle is fewer than 12 inches (30 centimeters) away, the warning sounds continuously. If a stationary or receding object is detected farther than 12 inches (30 centimeters) from the side of the vehicle, the tone sounds for only three seconds. Once the system detects an object approaching, the warning sounds again.
A. Coverage area of up to 6 feet (2 meters) from the rear bumper (with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper).
A
The system detects certain objects while the transmission is in R (Reverse):
· and moving toward a stationary object at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less but not moving,
· and a moving object is approaching the rear of the vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less
· and moving at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving object is approaching the rear of the vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
The system can be turned off using the information display control. Refer to the Information Display chapter. If a fault is present in the system, a warning message appears in the information display and does not allow the driver to switch the faulted system on.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Parking Aids
195
Front Sensing System
The front sensors are active when the gearshift is in any position other than P (Park) or N (Neutral) and the vehicle speed is below 7 mph (12 km/h).
A. Coverage area of up to 27 inches
(70 centimeters) from the front of
the vehicle and about 614 inches
(1535 centimeters) to the side of
A
the front end of the vehicle. Refer
to the reverse sensing section for
details on coverage area.
The system sounds an audible warning when obstacles are near either bumper in the following manner:
· Objects detected by the front sensors are indicated by a high-pitched tone from the front radio speakers.
· Objects detected by the rear sensors are indicated by a lower pitched tone from the rear radio speakers.
· The sensing system reports the obstacle which is closest to the front or rear of the vehicle. For example, if an obstacle is 24 inches (60 centimeters) from the front of the vehicle and, at the same time, an obstacle is only 16 inches (40 centimeters) from the rear of the vehicle, the lower pitched tone sounds.
· An alternating warning sounds from the front and rear if there are objects at both bumpers that are closer than 10 inches (25 centimeters).
For specific information on the reverse sensing portion of the system, refer to that section.
Press the button to switch the system off. It will remain off for the entire ignition cycle.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
196
Parking Aids
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: This system is designed to be a supplementary park aid. It may not work in all conditions and is not intended to replace the driver's attention and judgment. The driver is responsible for avoiding hazards and maintaining a safe distance and speed, even when the system is in use.
Note: The driver is always responsible for controlling the vehicle, supervising the system and intervening if required.
The system detects an available parallel parking space and automatically steers the vehicle into the space (hands-free) while you control the accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The system visually and/or audibly instructs the driver to park the vehicle.
The system may not function correctly if something passes between the front bumper and the parking space (i.e. a pedestrian or cyclist) or if the edge of the neighboring parked vehicle is high from the ground (i.e. a bus, tow truck or flatbed truck).
Note: The sensors may not detect objects in heavy rain or other conditions that cause disruptive reflections.
Note: The sensors may not detect objects with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves.
The system should not be used if:
· a foreign object (i.e. bike rack or trailer) is attached to the front or rear of the vehicle or at another location close to the sensors.
· an overhanging object (i.e. surfboard) is attached to the roof. · the front bumper or side sensors are damaged (i.e. in a collision) or
obstructed by a foreign object (i.e. front bumper cover). · a mini-spare tire is in use.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Parking Aids
197
Using Active Park Assist
Press the button; the touch screen displays a message and a corresponding graphic to indicate it's searching for a parking space. Use the turn signal to indicate which side of the vehicle you want the system to search on.
Note: If the turn signal is not on, the system automatically searches on the vehicle's passenger side.
When a suitable space is found, the touch screen displays a message and a chime sounds. Slow down and stop at approximately position (A), then follow the instructions on the touch screen. Note: You must observe that the selected space remains clear of obstructions at all times in the maneuver. Note: Vehicles with overhanging loads (e.g. a bus or a truck), street furniture and other items may not be detected by active park assist. You must ensure the selected space is suitable for parking. Note: The vehicle should be driven as parallel to other vehicles as possible while passing a parking space. Note: The system always offers the last detected parking space (i.e. if the vehicle detects multiple spaces while you are driving, it offers the last one). Note: If driven above approximately 20 mph (35 km/h), the touch screen shows a message to alert the driver to reduce vehicle speed.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
198
Parking Aids
Automatic Steering into Parking Space
Note: If vehicle speed exceeds 7 mph (12 km/h), the system turns off and you need to take full control of the vehicle.
Note: If a maneuver is interrupted before completion, the system turns off. The steering wheel position will not indicate the actual position of the steering and you have to full take control of the vehicle.
With hands off the wheel (and nothing obstructing its movement) and the transmission in R (Reverse), the vehicle steers itself as instructions to safely move the vehicle back and forward in the space are displayed in the touch screen. While reversing, the touch screen displays a message instructing the driver to check their surroundings (for safety reasons) and to back-up slowly, accompanied by a corresponding graphic.
When you think the vehicle has enough space in front and behind it, or you hear a solid tone from the parking aid, bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
When automatic steering is finished, the touch screen displays a message indicating that the active park assist process is done. The driver is responsible for checking the parking job and making any necessary corrections before putting the transmission in P (Park).
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Parking Aids
199
Deactivating the Park Assist Feature
The system can be deactivated manually by:
· pressing the active park assist button · grabbing the steering wheel · driving above approximately 20 mph (35 km/h) for 30 seconds during
an active park search · driving above 7 mph (12 km/h) during automatic steering · turning off the traction control system.
Certain vehicle conditions can also deactivate the system:
· Traction control has activated on a slippery or loose surface. · Anti-lock brake system activation or failure. · Any door (except the driver's) opens. · Something touches the steering wheel.
If a problem occurs with the system, a warning message is displayed, followed by a chime. Occasional active park assist messages may occur in normal operation. For recurring or frequent active park assist faults, contact an authorized dealer to have your vehicle serviced.
Troubleshooting the System
The system does not look for a space The traction control system may be off Any door (except the driver's) may not be completely closed
The system does not offer a particular space Something may be contacting the front bumper or side sensors There is not enough room on both sides of the vehicle in order to park There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking space The vehicle is farther than 5 ft (1.5 m) from the parking space The vehicle is closer than 16 in. (40 cm) from neighboring parked vehicles The transmission is in R (Reverse); the vehicle must be moving forward to detect a parking space
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
200
Parking Aids
The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space
The vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission (i.e. rolling forward when R [Reverse] is selected) The transmission is in R (Reverse); the vehicle must be moving forward to detect a parking space An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning the vehicle properly Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly The vehicle was pulled too far past the parking space. The system performs best when you drive the same distance past the parking space The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly (i.e. not inflated correctly, improper size, or of different sizes) A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities A parked vehicle has a high attachment (i.e. salt sprayer, snowplow, moving truck bed, etc.) The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly (i.e. driving from a heated garage into the cold, or after leaving a car wash)
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Parking Aids
201
REAR VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The rear view camera system is a reverse aid supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with the interior and exterior mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen due to the limited coverage of the camera system.
WARNING: Back up as slow as possible since higher speeds might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle.
WARNING: Use caution when using the rear video camera and the liftgate is ajar. If the liftgate is ajar, the camera will be out of position and the video image may be incorrect. All guidelines (if enabled) have been removed when the liftgate is ajar.
WARNING: Use caution when turning camera features on or off while in R (Reverse). Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a video image of the area behind the vehicle. The image will be displayed in either in the rear view mirror or the display in the center of the instrument panel.
During operation, lines appear in the display which represent your vehicle's path and proximity to objects behind the vehicle.
The camera is located in the rear of the vehicle near the license plate. It can be found in either location depending on the vehicle model.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
202
Parking Aids
Using the Rear View Camera System
The rear view camera system displays what is behind your vehicle when you place the transmission in R (Reverse). The system uses three types of guides to help you see what is behind your vehicle: 1. Active guidelines: Show the intended path of the vehicle when
reversing. 2. Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path the vehicle is moving in while
reversing in a straight line, which can be helpful when backing into a parking space or aligning the vehicle with another object behind the vehicle. 3. Centerline: Helps align the center of the vehicle with an object (i.e. a trailer).
Note: If the transmission is in R (Reverse) and the trunk/liftgate is ajar, no rear view camera features are displayed.
Note: If the image comes on while the transmission is not in R (Reverse), have the system inspected by your authorized dealer.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees what is being towed behind the vehicle. This might not provide adequate coverage as it usually provides in normal operation and some objects might not be seen. In some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear once the trailer tow connector is engaged.
Note: The camera may not operate correctly under the following conditions: · Nighttime or dark areas if one or both reverse lamps are not operating.
Do not use the rear view camera display when lighting is low until both reverse lamps are functional. · The camera's view is obstructed by mud, water or debris. Clean the lens with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner. · The rear of the vehicle is hit or damaged, causing the camera to become misaligned. Check with your authorized dealer to have the rear view camera system checked for proper coverage and operation.
Adjusting the Rear View Camera Settings (If Equipped)
To access any of the rear view camera system settings, make the following selections in the touch screen when the transmission is not in R (Reverse): 1. Menu 2. Vehicle 3. Rear View Camera
After changing a system setting, the touch screen shows a preview of the feature(s) selected.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Parking Aids
203
Guidelines and the Centerline
Note: Active guidelines and fixed guidelines are only available when the transmission is in R (Reverse).
Note: The centerline is only available if Active or Fixed guidelines are on.
A. Active guidelines
A
B C D E B. Centerline
C. Fixed guideline: Green zone
D. Fixed guideline: Yellow zone
E. Fixed guideline: Red zone
F. Rear bumper
F
If your vehicle is equipped with active guidelines they are only shown with fixed guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn the steering wheel to point the guidelines toward an intended path. If the steering wheel position is changed while reversing, the vehicle might deviate from the original intended path.
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and out depending on the steering wheel position. When the steering wheel position is straight, the active guidelines are not shown.
Always use caution while reversing. Objects in the red zone are closest to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are further away. Objects are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the side view mirrors and rear view mirror to get better coverage on both sides and rear of the vehicle.
Selectable settings for this feature are ACTIVE + FIXED, FIXED and OFF.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
204
Parking Aids
Visual Park Aid Alert
Note: Visual park alert is only available when the transmission is in R (Reverse).
Note: The reverse sensing system is not effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects.
The visual park aid alert allows the driver to view the area that is being detected by the reverse sensing system. The system uses red, yellow and green highlights which appear on top of the video image when an object is detected by the reverse sensing system. The alert highlights the closest object detected. The reverse sensing alert can be disabled and if visual park aid alert is enabled, highlighted areas are still displayed.
Refer to Adjusting the Rear View Camera Settings above on how to enable or disable the visual park alert feature.
Manual Zoom
WARNING: When manual zoom is on, the full area behind the vehicle is not shown. Be aware of your surroundings when using the manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when the transmission is in R (Reverse).
Note: When manual zoom is enabled, only the centerline is shown.
Allows the driver to get a closer view of an object behind the vehicle. The zoomed image keeps the bumper in the image to provide a reference. The zoom is only active while the transmission is in R (Reverse), When the transmission is shifted out of R (Reverse), the feature automatically turns off and must be reset when it is used again.
Selectable settings for this feature are OFF, Level 1, Level 2 or Level 3. Press the up and down arrows to change the view. The selection level appears between the buttons (i.e. Level 1). The default setting for the manual zoom is OFF.
Rear Camera Delay
When shifting the transmission out of R (Reverse) and into any gear other than P (Park), the camera image remains in the display until the vehicle speed reaches 6 mph (10 km/h). This occurs when the rear camera delay feature is on, or until a radio button is selected.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF. The default setting for the rear camera delay is OFF.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Cruise Control
205
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
USING CRUISE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not use cruise control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, slippery or unpaved.
Note: Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up or down a steep hill. Apply the brakes if your vehicle speed increases above the set speed while driving downhill.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if your vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below your set speed while driving uphill.
The cruise controls are located on the steering wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On Press and release ON.
The indicator will appear in the instrument cluster.
Setting a Speed 1. Accelerate to the desired speed. 2. Press and release SET+. 3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
206
Cruise Control
Changing the Set Speed · Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release the control when you reach
the desired speed. · Press and release SET+ or SET-. The set speed will change in
approximately 1 mph (2 km/h) increments. · Press the accelerator or brake pedal until you reach the desired
speed. Press and release SET+.
Canceling the Set Speed Pull CAN toward you and release, tap the brake pedal or press the clutch pedal. You will not erase the set speed. Note: When you use the clutch pedal to cancel a set speed, the engine speed may briefly increase.
Resuming the Set Speed Pull RES toward you and release.
Switching Cruise Control Off Note: You will erase the set speed if you switch the system off. Press and release OFF or switch the ignition off.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Driving Aids
207
ECO MODE
This system assists the driver in driving more efficiently by constantly monitoring characteristics of gear changing, anticipation of traffic conditions and speeds while driving.
The value of these characteristics is represented by petals shown in the display, with five petals being the most efficient. The more efficiently you drive, the better the rating, and the better your overall fuel economy.
Note: These efficiency values do not result in a defined fuel consumption figure. It might vary as it is not only related to these driving habits, but also influenced by many other factors such as short trips and cold starts.
Note: Frequent short trips, where the engine does not fully warm up, will also increase fuel consumption.
The system is accessed using the information display control. Refer to the trip computer table in the Information Displays chapter.
Type 1
A. Gear shifting B. Anticipation C. Efficient speed
Gear shifting To improve fuel economy, use the highest gear appropriate for the road conditions.
Anticipation Adjust your vehicle speed and the distance to other vehicles to avoid the need for heavy braking or acceleration to improve fuel economy.
Efficient speed Reduce your cruising speed on open roads to improve economy. Higher speeds use more fuel.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
208
Driving Aids
Type 2 and 3 The relevant information is shown in the display.
Resetting Eco Mode Reset the average fuel consumption by using the information display control. Note: New values may take a short time to calculate.
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNING: The electric power steering system has diagnostic checks that continuously monitor the system to ensure proper operation. When a system error is detected a steering message will appear in the information display.
WARNING: The electric power steering system has diagnostic checks that continuously monitor the system to ensure proper operation of the electronic system. When an electronic error is detected, a message will be displayed in the information display. If this happens, stop the vehicle in a safe place, and turn off the engine. After at least 10 seconds, reset the system by restarting the engine, and watch the information display for a steering message. If a steering message returns, or returns while driving, take the vehicle to your dealer to have it checked.
WARNING: Obtain immediate service if a system error is detected. You may not notice any difference in the feel of your steering, but a serious condition may exist. Failure to do so may result in loss of steering control.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric power-assisted steering system. There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Driving Aids
209
If your vehicle loses electrical power while you are driving (or if the ignition is turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort. Extreme continuous steering may increase the effort it takes for you to steer. This occurs to prevent internal overheating and permanent damage to your steering system. If this should occur, you will neither lose the ability to steer the vehicle manually nor will it cause permanent damage. Typical steering and driving maneuvers will allow the system to cool and steering assist will return to normal.
When a steering system error is detected, steering messages may appear in the information display.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
· an improperly inflated tire · uneven tire wear · loose or worn suspension components · loose or worn steering components · improper vehicle alignment
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering seem to wander/pull.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
210
Load Carrying
LUGGAGE COVERS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Make sure that the posts are properly latched in the mounting features. The cover may cause injury in a sudden stop or crash if it is not securely installed.
WARNING: Do not place any objects on the cargo area shade. They may obstruct your vision or strike occupants of your vehicle in the case of a sudden stop or crash.
You can remove the cargo cover to load tall items in the cargo area.
To Remove the Cover 1
2
Note: You must repeat the steps on both sides of your vehicle.
1. Open the liftgate and disconnect the tether by pulling it out.
2. Rotate the cargo cover upward, and then tap the bottom of the cargo cover upward near the pivot rod.
Reverse the steps to install the cargo cover.
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle loading
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability. Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings from the vehicle's Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Load Carrying
211
Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.
Payload is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver's door (vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire Label). Look for "THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb." for maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle, do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
212
Example only:
Load Carrying
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Load Carrying
213
Cargo Weight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight, including cargo and optional equipment. GAW (Gross Axle Weight) is the total weight placed on each axle (front and rear) including vehicle curb weight and all payload. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position. The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo + passengers. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
214
· Example only:
Load Carrying
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury. WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Load Carrying
215
WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.). In metric units (635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
· Suppose your vehicle has a 1400 lb. (635 kg) cargo and luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 (5 x 220) (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (5 x 99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
216
Load Carrying
· Suppose your vehicle has a 1400 lb. (635 kg) cargo and luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for 12-100 lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each weigh 220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 1200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then the load calculation would be:
1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (9 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Towing
217
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNING: Never tow a trailer with this vehicle. Your vehicle is not equipped to tow. No towing packages are available through an authorized dealer.
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your roadside assistance service provider. We recommend the use of a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle damage may occur if towed incorrectly, or by any other means. Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
218
Towing
The front wheels (drive wheels) must be on a tow dolly when towing your vehicle from the rear using wheel lift equipment. This prevents damage to the transmission.
We recommend placing the rear wheels on a tow dolly when towing your vehicle from the front using wheel lift equipment. This prevents damage to the rear fascia.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle becomes inoperable (without access to wheel dollies, car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle), it can be flat-towed (all wheels on the ground, regardless of the powertrain and transmission configuration) under the following conditions: · Your vehicle is facing forward for towing in a forward direction. · Place the transmission in position N. See Automatic transmission in
the Transmission chapter if you cannot move the transmission into N. · Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h). · Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 kilometers).
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust fumes from entering your vehicle. Refer to the Climate Controls chapter for more information.
Note: You must tow your vehicle in the forward direction to avoid damage to the internal transmission components. In addition, we recommend you follow the instructions provided by the aftermarket manufacturer of the towing equipment, if provided.
Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational towing, such as towing your vehicle behind a motorhome. We designed these guidelines to prevent damage to your transmission.
Before you tow your vehicle, follow these directions for your specific vehicle configuration after it is hooked-up to the recreational vehicle or tow dolly:
Vehicles with a Manual Transmission
1. Release the parking brake. 2. Move the gearshift to the neutral position.
· The maximum towing speed is 70 mph (113 km/h). · There is no limitation on towing distance.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Towing
219
Vehicles with an Automatic Transmission but No Push Button Start System
Note: There must be battery power to properly move the transmission's internal components to position N in Step 3. In addition, moving the gearshift to position N without first turning the ignition to the on (II) position limits the towing capability to 35 mph (56 km/h) and 50 miles (80 kilometers). 1. Release the parking brake. 2. Turn the ignition to the on (II) position. 3. Press the brake pedal, then move the gearshift to position N. 4. Wait for TRANSMISSION READY to appear in the multi-function
display, then turn the ignition to the off (0) position and release the brake pedal. 5. Disconnect the negative (black) cable from the battery. (The anti-theft system does not function until the battery cable is reconnected.) See Changing the vehicle battery in the Maintenance chapter when disconnecting and reconnecting the battery cable. · The maximum towing speed is 70 mph (113 km/h). · There is no limitation on towing distance.
When done towing, start the engine within 15 minutes of reconnecting the battery cable. When reconnecting that cable, tighten it until it is snug against the terminal. Be careful not to over-tighten.
Vehicles with an Automatic Transmission and Push Button Start System
Note: There must be battery power to properly move the transmission's internal components to position N in Step 3. In addition, moving the gearshift to position N without first turning the ignition to the on (II) position limits the towing capability to 35 mph (56 km/h) and 50 miles (80 kilometers). 1. Release the parking brake. 2. Activate the ignition by pressing the START button, but not applying
the brake pedal.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
220
Towing
3. Press the brake pedal, and then move the gearshift to position N. Release the brake pedal.
4. Wait for TRANSMISSION READY to appear in the multi-function display, and then switch the ignition off by pressing the START button.
5. Disconnect the negative (black) cable from the battery. (You need the door key [inside the Intelligent Access Key] to lock and unlock doors when the battery cable is disconnected. In addition, the anti-theft system does not function until the battery cable is reconnected.) See Changing the vehicle battery in the Maintenance chapter when disconnecting and reconnecting the battery cable. · The maximum towing speed is 70 mph (113 km/h). · There is no limitation on towing distance.
When done towing, start the engine within 15 minutes of reconnecting the battery cable. When reconnecting that cable, tighten it until it is snug against the terminal. Be careful not to over-tighten.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Driving Hints
221
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for approximately 300 miles (480 kilometers). During this time, your vehicle may exhibit some unique driving characteristics. Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers). Vary your speed frequently and change up through the gears early. Do not labor the engine. Do not tow during the first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers).
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things, such as how you drive, the conditions you drive under and how you maintain your vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind that may improve your fuel economy: · Accelerate and slow down in a smooth, moderate fashion. · Drive at steady speeds without stopping. · Anticipate stops; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop. · Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving. · Close the windows for high-speed driving. · Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]). · Keep the tires properly inflated and use only the recommended size. · Use the recommended engine oil. · Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
There are also some things you may not want to do because they may reduce your fuel economy: · Sudden or hard accelerations. · Rev the engine before turning it off. · Idle for periods longer than one minute. · Warm up your vehicle on cold mornings. · Use the air conditioner or front defroster. · Use the speed control in hilly terrain. · Rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. · Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a trailer.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
222
Driving Hints
· Carry unnecessary weight (approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 pounds [180 kilograms] of weight carried).
· Add particular accessories to your vehicle (e.g.; bug deflectors, rollbars or light bars, running boards, ski racks).
· Drive with the wheels out of alignment.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very slowly. Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom of the hubs (for trucks).
When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited. Also, water may enter your engine's air intake and severely damage your engine or your vehicle may stall.
Note: Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause internal transmission damage.
Note: Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal. Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Driving Hints
223
FLOOR MATS
WARNING: Always use floor mats that are designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle. Only use floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed. Only use floor mats that are firmly secured to retention posts so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. · Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury. · Always make sure that the floor mats are properly attached to the retention posts in the carpet that are supplied with your vehicle. Floor mats must be properly secured to both retention posts to ensure mats do not shift out of position. · Never place floor mats or any other covering in the vehicle footwell that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle. · Never place floor mats or any other covering on top of already installed floor mats. Floor mats should always rest on top of the vehicle carpeting surface and not another floor mat or other covering. Additional floor mats or any other covering will reduce the pedal clearance and potentially interfere with pedal operation.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
224
Driving Hints
WARNING (Continued)
· Check attachment of floor mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning or replacement.
· Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects that are loose can become trapped under the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
· Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or attachment instructions can potentially cause interference with pedal operation causing loss of control of vehicle.
· To install floor mats, position the floor mat so that the eyelet is over the retention post and press down to lock in.
· To remove the floor mat, reverse the installation procedure.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
225
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the U.S.: Getting Roadside Assistance To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service is available: · 24 hours a day, seven days a week · for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card
included in your owner's manual portfolio.
Roadside assistance will cover:
· a flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles that have been supplied with a tire inflation kit).
· battery jump start. · lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer's responsibility). · fuel delivery Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
state, local or municipal law, shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5 liters) of gasoline or 5.0 gallons (18.9 liters) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Fuel delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences within a 12-month period.
· winch out available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or county maintained road, no recoveries.
· towing Ford and Lincoln eligible vehicles towed to an authorized dealer within 35 miles (56 kilometers) of the disablement location or to the nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to an authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56 kilometers) from the disablement location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 35 miles (56 kilometers).
Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled, but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any roadside services.
Vehicles Sold in the U.S.: Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference. This card is found in the owner's manual portfolio in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance, call 1-800-241-3673.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
226
Roadside Emergencies
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest dealership within 35 miles (56 kilometers). To obtain reimbursement information, U.S. Ford vehicle customers call 1-800-241-3673. Customers will be asked to submit their original receipts.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside Assistance
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call 18006652006.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference. In Canada, the card is found in the warranty information in the glove box.
Canadian roadside coverage and benefits may differ from the U.S. coverage. Please see your warranty information or visit our website at www.ford.ca for information on Canadian services and benefits.
Canadian customers who need to obtain roadside information, call 1-800-665-2006 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The hazard flasher control is located on the instrument panel by the radio. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. · Press the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will flash. · Press the flasher control again to turn them off. Note: With extended use, the flashers may run down your 12volt battery.
FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary repair fuel leaks after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury. Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected by an authorized dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe collision, this vehicle is equipped with a fuel pump shut-off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the engine. Not every impact will cause a shut-off.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
227
Should your vehicle shut off after a collision, you may restart your vehicle by doing the following: 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Turn the ignition on. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to re-enable fuel pump. Note: If your vehicle has the push button start system, press the stop/start button twice to reactivate the fuel system.
JUMP-STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage.
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes and clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause transmission damage.
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the transmission may exhibit a combination of firm and soft shifts. This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Note: Use only a 12volt supply to start your vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle's electrical system.
1. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
228
Roadside Emergencies
2. Check all battery terminals. Remove the positive terminal cover (if equipped) and any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
3. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
Note: Do not attach the negative (-) cable to fuel lines, engine rocker covers, the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points.
Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate the assisting (boosting) battery.
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the
1
positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the
assisting battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to
the negative (-) terminal of the
3
4 assisting battery.
2
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle's
engine, away from the battery and
the carburetor or fuel injection
system.
Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
229
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at a moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate the assisting (boosting) battery.
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from
the ground metal surface.
4
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle's battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle's battery.
1
4. Remove the jumper cable from
2
the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle's battery.
3
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can relearn its idle conditions.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
230
Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized dealer. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training, equipment or both, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by Ford.
Away from Home
If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed below to find the nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing Address Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P.O. Box 6248 Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone 1-800-392-3673 (FORD) (TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
Online Additional information and resources are available online at www.fordowner.com.
These are some of the items that can be found online: · U.S. Dealer Locator by Dealer Name, City/State, or Zip Code · Owner Manuals · Maintenance Schedules · Recalls · Ford Extended Service Plans
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
231
· Ford Genuine Accessories · Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited P.O. Box 2000 Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8
Telephone 1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Online www.ford.ca
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling or servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center.
In order to help serve you better, please have the following information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center: · Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) · Your telephone number (home and business) · The name of the authorized dealer and city where located · The vehicle's current odometer reading.
In some states, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state's warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
232
Customer Assistance
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle's applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18000 mi (29 000 km), whichever occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address:
Ford Motor Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE-B Dearborn, MI 48126
You are required to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting in court any rights or remedies conferred by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You are also required to use BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resorting to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
233
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer. If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step procedure outlined earlier in this chapter in the Getting the Services You Need section, you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts mediation and arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not want to participate in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you may participate in the arbitration process. An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person. The arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within 40 days after you file your claim with the BBB. You are not bound by the decision, and may reject the decision and proceed to court where all findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute, and decision, are admissible in the court action. Should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford is then bound by the decision, and must comply with the decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below, please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle, information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE 3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600 Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without obligation.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
234
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION or ARBITRATION PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
This pertains to vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases, where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation or arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straightforward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator's award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces. For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact our Customer Relationship Center.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company or Ford of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the United States.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
235
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region, Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands, Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS & GLOBAL INITIATIVES Customer Relationship Center 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park #3 Allen Park, Michigan 48101 U.S.A. Telephone: (313) 594-4857 FAX: (313) 390-0804 Email: expcac@ford.com
For customers in Guam, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the U.S. Virgin Islands, please feel free to call our Toll-Free Number: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Puerto Rico, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS & GLOBAL INITIATIVES Customer Relationship Center 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park #3 Allen Park, Michigan 48101 U.S.A. Telephone: (313) 594-4857 FAX: (313) 390-0804 Email: www.ford.com.pr
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in the Middle East, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
Ford Middle East Customer Relationship Center P.O. Box 21470 Dubai, United Arab Emirates Telephone: +971 4 3326084 Toll-Free Number of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia: 800 8971409 Local Telephone Number of Kuwait: 24810575 FAX: +971 4 3327299 Email: menacac@ford.com www.me.ford.com
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
236
Customer Assistance
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the above locations, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations & Global Growth Initiatives by emailing expcac@ford.com.
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized dealer. In the event your inquiry is unresolved, communicate your concern with the dealership's Sales Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager. If you require additional assistance or clarification, please contact the respective Customer Relationship Center as previously listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER'S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED 47911 Halyard Drive Plymouth, Michigan 48170 Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website: www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner's Manual
A French owner's manual can be obtained from your authorized dealer or by contacting Helm, Incorporated using the contact information listed previously in this section.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
237
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 18883274236 (TTY: 18004249153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator 1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada, using their toll-free number: 18003330510, or online at: https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
238
Fuses
CHANGING A FUSE Fuses
WARNING: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire.
If electrical components in the vehicle
are not working, a fuse may have
blown. Blown fuses are identified by a
broken wire within the fuse. Check
15
the appropriate fuses before replacing
any electrical components.
Standard Fuse Amperage Rating and Color
Fuse rating
2A 3A 4A 5A 7.5A 10A 15A 20A 25A 30A 40A 50A 60A 70A 80A
Mini fuses
Grey Violet Pink Tan Brown Red Blue Yellow Natural Green
-- -- -- -- --
COLOR
Standard fuses
Maxi fuses
Grey Violet Pink Tan Brown Red Blue Yellow Natural Green
-- -- -- -- --
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- Yellow -- Green Orange Red Blue Tan Natural
Cartridge maxi fuses -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Blue Natural Pink Green Red Yellow -- Black
Fuse link cartridge
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- Blue Natural Pink Green Red Yellow Brown Black
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Fuses
239
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART Power Distribution Box
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. It has high-current fuses that protect your vehicle's main electrical systems from overloads.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, see Changing the Vehicle Battery in the Maintenance chapter.
F31 F30 F24 F21 F20
F25
F22
F17
F32
F27 F26 F23
F33
F18
F34
F35
F28
R12
F36
F29
R14
R13
F19
F8
F7
R16
R15
R9
R6
F15
F13 F11 F9
F16
F14 F12 F10
R10
R7
F37
F42 F38
F43 F39
F46 F44
F40
F48 F47
F45 F41
R3
R1
R11
R8
R5
R4
R2
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
240
Fuses
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse or relay number F7
F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14
F15 F16 F17 F18 F19
F20 F21 F22 F23 F24 F25
F26
F27 F28 F29 F30
F31
Fuse amp rating 40A**
30A** 30A** 40A**
-- 30A** 30A** 25A**
25A** -- --
20A** 5A*
15A* 5A* 15A* 5A* 15A* 10A*
15A*
15A* 5A* 20A* 5A*
--
Protected components
Anti-lock brake system/Electronic stability program pump Electronic stability program valve Heated rear window Heater blower motor Not used Engine control relay Fuse Starter relay Rear power window (without door control unit) Automatic transmission Not used Not used Front wiper motor Anti-lock brake system/Electronic stability program 15 feed Horn Stop light switch Battery monitor system Relay coils, Light switch module Not used (spare) Power exterior mirror (without door control unit) Transmission control module 30 feed automatic transmission Air conditioning clutch Mass air flow fuel relay feed Not used (spare) Electronic control module keep-alive power Not used
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Fuse or relay number F32
F33
F34 F35 F36 F37 F38
F39
F40
F41 F42 F43
F44 F45 F46
F47
F48
R1 R2 R3 R4
Fuses
241
Fuse amp rating 10A*
10A* 15A* 10A* 5A* 10A*
-- 15A*
5A*
5A*
20A* 15A* 15A*
-- -- 25A*
7.5A*
5A*
-- Micro relay
-- --
Protected components
Exhaust gas recovery valve, Swirl control valves, Heated oxygen sensors Ignition coils Ignition coils (Focus ST) Injectors Active grill shutter Engine control module Not used Engine control module/Transmission control module 15 feed Headlamp control module (Focus ST) Electronic power assist steering 15 feed Body control module 15 feed Rear Wiper HID headlamp leveling (Focus ST) Not used Not used Power windows front (without door control unit) Heated mirror (without door control unit) Power exterior mirror (without door control unit) Not used Horn Not used Not used
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
242
Fuses
Fuse or relay Fuse amp
number
rating
R5
Micro relay
R6
--
R7
--
R8
--
R9
--
R10
Mini relay
R11
Micro relay
R12
Power relay
R13
Mini relay
R14
Mini relay
R15
Power relay
R16
Power relay
*Mini Fuses **Cartridge Fuses
Protected components
Rear wiper Not used Not used Not used Not used Starter relay Air conditioning clutch Cooling fan Heater blower Engine control relay Heated rear window Ignition 15
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Fuses
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel The fuse panel is located on the right side below the glove box.
243
Fuse or relay number 56
57 58 59 60
61 62
Fuse amp rating 20A
-- -- 5A 10A
20A 5A
Protected components
Fuel pump supply, Mass air flow sensor Not used Not used Passive anti-theft transceiver Interior light, Driver door switch pack, Glove box illumination, Overhead console switch bank Cigar lighter, Power point Rain sensor module, Humidity sensor, Auto-dimming rear view mirror
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
244
Fuse or relay number 63 64 65 66
67
68 69 70 71
72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79
80 81 82 83 84
Fuses
Fuse amp rating -- -- 10A 20A
7.5A
-- 5A 20A 10A
7.5A 5A 15A 15A 10A 20A 5A 15A
20A 5A 20A 20A 20A
Protected components
Not used Not used Luggage compartment release Driver door unlock supply, double lock SYNC®, Multifunction display, Global positioning system module, Compass Not used Instrument cluster Central lock and unlock supply Heating control head (manual air conditioning), Duel electronic automatic temperature control Steering wheel module Data link connector Low beam headlamp supply Fog lamp supply Reversing lamp supply Windshield washer supply Ignition switch, Start button Radio, Navigation DVD player, Touch screen, Hazard light switch, Door lock switch Moonroof supply Radio frequency receiver Windshield washer relay Central locking Driver door unlock supply, double lock
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Fuses
245
Fuse or relay number 85
86
87 88 89
Fuse amp rating 7.5A
10A
-- -- --
Protected components
Passenger air bag deactivation indicator, Front seat heater switch, Heating module (manual air conditioning), Air quality sensor, Radio, In-car temperature and humidity sensor Air bag module, Occupant classification system, Passenger air bag deactivation indicator Not used Not used Not used
Luggage Compartment Fuse Panel
The fuse panel is located in the luggage compartment behind the left side wheel well. Remove the fuse panel cover to gain access to the fuses.
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F16 F44
R3
R2
R1
R4
R5
R6
F28
F27
F26
F25
F24
F29
F30
F31
F32
F33
F34
F35
F36
F37
F38
F39
F40
F41
F42
F43
F45
F46
Fuse/Relay Number F1 F2 F3 F4
Fuse Amp Rating -- 10A 5A 25A
Protected Components
Not used Keyless vehicle module Keyless vehicle door handles Door control unit front left
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
246
Fuse/Relay Number F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 F17 F18 F19 F20 F21 F22 F23 F24 F25 F26 F27 F28 F29 F30 F31 F32 F33 F34 F35
Fuses
Fuse Amp Rating 25A 25A 25A -- 25A -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 25A -- -- -- -- -- 5A 5A -- -- -- 15A 15A
Protected Components
Door control unit front right Door control unit rear left Door control unit rear right Not used Driver seat motor Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Audio amplifier Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Park assist camera Parking aid module Not used Not used Not used Driver seat heater Passenger seat heater
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay Number F36 F37 F38 F39 F40 F41 F42 F43 F44 F45 F46 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6
Fuses
247
Fuse Amp Rating -- 5A -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Power relay -- -- -- -- --
Protected Components
Not used Moonroof Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Rear 15 relay (2/88) Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
248
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help maintain its roadworthiness and resale value. There is a large network of Ford authorized dealers who are there to help you with their professional servicing expertise. We believe that their specially trained technicians are best qualified to service your vehicle properly and expertly. They are supported by a wide range of highly specialized tools developed specifically for servicing your vehicle.
To help you service your vehicle, we provide Scheduled Maintenance Information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can provide the necessary parts and service. Check your warranty information to find out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts conforming to specifications. Motorcraft® parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle.
Precautions · Do not work on a hot engine. · Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts. · Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation. · Keep all open flames and other burning material (such as cigarettes)
away from the battery and all fuelrelated parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, set the parking brake and shift to position P. For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, set the parking brake, press and hold the clutch pedal, shift to 1 (First), and release the clutch pedal.
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Maintenance
249
Working with the Engine On
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
1. For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, set the parking brake and shift to position P. For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, set the parking brake, press and hold the clutch pedal, shift to position N, then release the clutch pedal.
2. Block the wheels.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD 1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release handle located under the instrument panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and locate the auxiliary latch located under the front of the hood (left of center) and then release it by pushing the auxiliary latch to the right. 3. Open the hood and support it with the prop rod.
To close the hood, lower the hood and allow it to drop from under its own weight for the last 8-11 inches (20-30 centimeters). Note: Make sure that the hood is closed properly.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
250
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW 2.0L Engine
A
B
CD
H
G
F
E
(Shown without engine cover, if equipped) A. Engine coolant reservoir B. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir C. Battery D. Power distribution box E. Air filter assembly F. Engine oil filler cap G. Engine oil dipstick H. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Maintenance
251
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
A
B
A. MIN B. MAX
ENGINE OIL CHECK Note: Check the level before starting the engine.
Note: Make sure that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks.
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 10 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan.
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean, lint-free cloth. Replace the dipstick and remove it again to check the oil level.
If the level is at the MIN mark, add oil immediately.
Adding Engine Oil Note: Do not remove the filler cap when the engine is running.
Note: Do not add engine oil further than the MAX mark. Oil levels above the MAX mark may cause engine damage.
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the American Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricants Specification Advisory Council (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese automobile manufacturers.
1. Remove the filler cap.
2. Add engine oil that meets Ford specifications. See Capacities and Specifications for more information.
3. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you feel a strong resistance.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
252
Maintenance
Resetting the Oil Life Monitoring System
Note: Reset the oil life monitoring only after an oil change.
1. Turn the ignition key to the on position. Do not start the engine. For vehicles with push-button start, press and hold the start button for two seconds without pressing the brake pedal. Do not attempt to start the engine. 2. Press both the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time. 3. Keep both pedals fully pressed. 4. After three seconds, the Service: Oil reset in prog. message will be displayed. 5. After 25 seconds, the Service: Oil reset complete message will be displayed. 6. Release both the accelerator and brake pedals. 7. The Service: Oil reset complete message will no longer be displayed. 8. Rotate the key to the off position. For vehicles with push-button start, press the start button to turn the vehicle off completely.
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
Checking the Engine Coolant Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine, refer to Maintenance and Specifications section of your Diesel Supplement
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information.
Note: Make sure that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks on the coolant reservoir.
The coolant concentration should be maintained within 48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C).
Note: For best results, coolant concentration should be tested with a refractometer such as Rotunda tool 300-ROB75240 available from your dealer. Ford does not recommend the use of hydrometers or coolant test strips for measuring coolant concentrations.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
If the level is at the MIN mark, add coolant immediately.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine coolant/antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Maintenance
253
Adding Engine Coolant
WARNING: Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts.
WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
WARNING: Do not add coolant further than the MAX mark.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets or cooling system sealants/additives as they can cause damage to the engine cooling and/or heating systems. This damage would not be covered under your vehicle's warranty.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the engine coolant may change color from orange to pink or light red. As long as the engine coolant is clear and uncontaminated, this color change does not indicate the engine coolant has degraded nor does it require the engine coolant to be drained, the system to be flushed, or the engine coolant to be replaced.
· DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle. Make sure the correct coolant is used. Mixing of engine coolants may harm your engine's cooling system. The use of an improper coolant may harm engine and cooling system components and may void the warranty.
· In case of emergency, a large amount of water without engine coolant may be added in order to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the cooling system must be drained, chemically cleaned with Motorcraft Premium Cooling System Flush, and refilled with engine coolant as soon as possible. Water alone (without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating or freezing.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
254
Maintenance
· Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing.
· Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant.
Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure will escape as you unscrew the cap.
Add prediluted engine coolant meeting the Ford specification. See Capacities and Specifications for more information.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If necessary, add enough prediluted engine coolant to bring the coolant level to the proper level.
Recycled Engine Coolant
Ford Motor Company does not recommend the use of recycled engine coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available.
Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner. Follow your community's regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
· It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer increase the coolant concentration above 50%.
· A coolant concentration of 60% will provide improved freeze point protection. Engine coolant concentrations above 60% will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
· It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer decrease the coolant concentration to 40%.
· A coolant concentration of 40% will provide improved overheat protection. Engine coolant concentrations below 40% will decrease the corrosion and freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use prediluted engine coolant for optimum cooling system and engine protection.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Maintenance
255
Powertrain Limiting and Protection
Note: Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
The engine control module (ECU) is equipped with a feature called powertrain limiting and protection (PTLP). PTLP will help protect the engine from damage in case the engine is overheating (coolant and/or oil temperature too hot). PTLP will automatically intervene during normal engine operation should it determine the engine coolant and/or oil temperatures are too hot. It does this by gradually reducing the maximum allowable engine rpm until the engine has cooled sufficiently. PTLP will automatically reinstate normal engine operation if it determines the engine temperatures have cooled sufficiently.
During an engine overheating condition, the instrument cluster will display a message and a chime will sound. The engine may also have temporarily reduced power and reduced rpm limit during an overheating condition.
Operating the engine with high engine coolant temperature (coolant gauge indicator is red) may cause powertrain damage. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and let the engine cool off while idling.
TRANSMISSION FLUID CHECK
Checking Automatic Transmission Fluid
Note: Transmission fluid should be checked and, if required, added by an authorized dealer.
The automatic transmission does not have a transmission fluid dipstick.
See your Scheduled Maintenance Information for scheduled intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not working properly, (i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts slowly) or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
Checking and Adding Manual Transmission Fluid (If Equipped)
1. Clean the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug and inspect the fluid level.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
256
Maintenance
3. Fluid level should be at the bottom of the opening.
4. Add enough fluid through the filler opening so that the fluid level is at the bottom of the opening. 5. Install and tighten the fill plug securely. Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to the Technical Specifications section in the Capacities and Specifications chapter.
BRAKE FLUID CHECK Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines are within the normal operating range; there is no need to add fluid. If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range, the performance of the system could be compromised; seek service from your authorized dealer immediately.
POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK Your vehicle is equipped with an electric power steering (EPS) system. There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill.
FUEL FILTER Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed.
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low. Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specifications. See the technical specifications chart in the Capacities and Specifications chapter.
Note: The front and rear washer systems are supplied from the same reservoir.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive. Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle's paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Maintenance
257
CHANGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft® maintenance-free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service.
Note: If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
258
Maintenance
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period of time.
To ensure proper operation of the battery management system (BMS), any electrical devices that are added to the vehicle should not have their ground connection made directly at the negative battery post. A connection at the negative battery post can cause inaccurate measurements of the battery condition and potential incorrect system operation.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability and may also affect the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle.
When a battery replacement is required, the battery should only be replaced with a Ford recommended replacement battery that matches the electrical requirements of the vehicle.
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the automatic transmission must relearn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the transmission may shift firmly when first driven. This operation is considered normal and will fully update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed, the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is reconnected.
Note: Always dispose of automotive batteries in a responsible manner. Follow your local authorized standards for disposal. Call your local authorized recycling center to find out more about recycling automotive batteries.
CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or water applied with a soft sponge or cloth.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Maintenance
259
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
The wiper arms can be manually moved when the ignition is off. This allows for ease of blade replacement and cleaning under the blades.
1. Turn the ignition off before removing the wiper blade.
2. Pull the wiper blade and arm away from the glass.
3. Squeeze the locking tabs to release the blade from the arm and pull the blade away from the arm to remove it.
4. Attach the new blade to the arm and snap it into place. Lower the wiper arm and blade back to the windshield. The wiper arms will automatically return to their normal position when the ignition is turned on.
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the windshield. Refer to the Vehicle Care chapter.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the wiper rubber element.
Changing the Rear Window Wiper Blade (If Equipped)
To replace the rear wiper blade:
1. Press the wiper blade against the glass with one hand and hold it.
2. Pull the wiper arm away from the wiper blade to separate.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
260
Maintenance
1
3. To attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm, align the slot (1) and
cross pin (2) and firmly press the
wiper arm into the wiper blade until
a click is heard.
2
If you find this procedure too difficult, please see your authorized dealer.
AIR FILTER CHECK
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
When changing the air filter element, use only the air filter element listed. Refer to Motorcraft® Part Numbers in the Capacities and Specifications chapter.
For EcoBoostequipped vehicles: When servicing the air cleaner, it is important that no foreign material enter the air induction system. The engine and turbocharger are susceptible to damage from even small particles.
Refer to Scheduled Maintenance for the appropriate intervals for changing the air filter element.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Maintenance
261
Changing the Air Filter Element A B
1. Loosen the screws that secure the air filter housing cover (A).
2. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
3. Remove the air filter element (B) from the air filter housing (C).
4. Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or debris and to ensure good sealing.
5. Install a new air filter element. Slide the open end of the air filter element in first, below the tab.
C
6. Align the tab on the closed end of the air filter element (B) with the A slot in the air filter housing.
7. Install the air filter housing B cover (A).
8. Tighten the screws that secure the air filter housing cover to the air filter housing.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
262
Maintenance
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant. If your vehicle has been in an accident, the alignment of your headlamps should be checked by your authorized dealer.
Vertical Aim Adjustment
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface, approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
A
· (A) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
· (B) Center height of lamp to
ground
D
· (C) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
· (D) Horizontal reference line
C
B
2. Measure the height of the headlamp bulb center from the ground and mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter) horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height.
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood.
To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting, you may want to block the light from one headlamp while adjusting the other.
For Vehicles with Halogen Headlamps:
On the wall or screen you will observe a flat zone of high intensity light located at the top of the right hand portion of the beam pattern. If the top edge of the high intensity light zone is not at the horizontal reference line, the headlamp will need to be adjusted.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Maintenance
263
For Vehicles with HID Headlamps:
There is a distinct cut-off (change from light to dark) in the left portion of the beam pattern. The top edge of this cut-off should be positioned 2 inches (5 centimeters) below the horizontal reference line.
4. Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp. Using a Phillips #2 screwdriver, turn the adjuster either clockwise or counterclockwise in order to aim the headlamp. The horizontal edge of the brighter light should touch the horizontal reference line.
5. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS NOT ADJUSTABLE.
REMOVING A HEADLAMP
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position and open the hood.
2. Remove the two screws from the headlamp assembly.
3. Carefully pull the headlamp assembly as far as possible towards the front of the vehicle to disengage it from the lower fixing point.
4. Carefully lift the outer side of the headlamp and remove it. 5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
264
Maintenance
CHANGING A BULB
Lamp Assembly Condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure. Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal condensation occurs, a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the lens. The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during normal operation. Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions.
These are examples of acceptable condensation:
· Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip marks or droplets). · Fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens.
These are examples of unacceptable moisture (usually caused by a lamp water leak):
· Water puddle inside the lamp. · Large water droplets, drip marks or streaks present on the interior of
the lens.
Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if any of the above conditions of unacceptable moisture are present.
Replacing Headlamp Bulbs
WARNING: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children's reach. Grasp the bulb by only its plastic base and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated.
Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol before being used.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Maintenance
265
A
B Headlamp assembly:
A. High beam headlamp bulb
B. Side marker bulb
C. Low beam headlamp bulb
D. Front parking lamp and turn signal bulb
D
C
High beam headlamp bulb:
1. Remove the headlamp assembly.
2. Remove the service cap.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the bulb from the headlamp assembly by turning it counterclockwise, then pull it straight out.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Low beam headlamp bulb:
1. Remove the headlamp assembly.
2. Remove the service cap.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the bulb from the headlamp assembly by turning it counterclockwise, then pull it straight out.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Note: Be sure that the spring clip is not damaged or detached from the headlamp assembly during the replacement procedure.
Replacing HID Headlamp Bulbs (If Equipped) The low beam headlamps on your vehicle use a "high intensity discharge" source. These lamps operate at a high voltage. When the bulb is burned out, the bulb and starter capsule assembly must be replaced by your authorized dealer.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
266
Maintenance
Replacing Front Parking Lamp and Turn Signal Bulbs
1. Remove the service cap by turning it counterclockwise.
2. Remove the bulb socket from the headlamp assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Remove the bulb by gently pulling the bulb straight out of the socket
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing Side Marker Bulbs
1. Remove the service cap.
2. Remove the bulb socket from the headlamp assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Remove the bulb by gently pulling the bulb straight out of the socket
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing Fog Lamp Bulbs (If Equipped) 1. Make sure the lighting control switch is in the off position. 2. Reach under the front fender and remove the aero shield. 3. Remove the harness/bulb assembly from the fog lamp by turning it counterclockwise. 4. Disconnect the harness from the bulb by pulling it straight out.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Maintenance
267
Replacing Rear Lamps - 4 Door
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position and open the trunk.
2. Remove the trim panel from inside the luggage compartment.
3. Remove the two nuts from the lamp assembly
4. Gently pull the lamp assembly away from the vehicle
5. Remove the bulb by turning the bulb socket counterclockwise. Gently pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
1
· Turn signal bulb (1)
· Stop and tail lamp bulb (2)
2
Install the new bulb in reverse order. Note: The reverse lamp bulb is located in the luggage compartment lid. If replacement is required, it is recommended that you see your authorized dealer.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
268
Maintenance
Replacing Rear Lamps - 5 Door
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position and open the trunk.
2. Remove the trim panel from inside the luggage compartment.
3. Remove the two nuts from the lamp assembly
4. Gently pull the lamp assembly away from the vehicle 5. Remove the bulb by turning the bulb socket counterclockwise. Gently pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
A. Brake lamp bulb B. Reverse lamp bulb A C. Tail lamp and side marker lamp B bulb D. Turn signal bulb C
D
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing License Plate Lamp Assembly Your vehicle is equipped with an LED license plate lamp assembly. It is designed to last the life of the vehicle. If replacement is required, it is recommended that you see your authorized dealer.
Replacing High-Mount Brake Lamp Assembly Your vehicle is equipped with an LED center high-mount stop lamp. It is designed to last the life of the vehicle. If replacement is required, it is recommended that you see your authorized dealer.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Maintenance
269
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized "D.O.T." for North America to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time.
Function
Trade number
Headlamp high beam
H1LL
Headlamp low beam (halogen)
H11LL
Headlamp low beam (HID)
D8S
Turn lamp (front)
W21W
Park/Side marker lamp (front)
168NA
Fog lamps (if equipped)
H11LL
Stop/tail lamp
3157K
Turn lamp
3757AK
Backup lamp
921
Dome lamp
H5W
* License plate lamp
LED
* High-mount brake lamp
LED
* To replace these lamps - see your authorized dealer.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
270
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS For best results, use the following products or products of equivalent quality: Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42) Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15) Motorcraft® Detail Wash (ZC-3-A) Motorcraft® Dusting Cloth (ZC-24) Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20) Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A) Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101) Motorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100) Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid (Canada only) [CXC-37-(A, B, D or F)] Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (U.S. only) (ZC-32-A) Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54) Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14) Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23) Motorcraft® Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93) Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft® Detail Wash. · Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces. · Never wash a vehicle that is hot to the touch or during exposure to strong, direct sunlight.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Vehicle Care
271
· Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting.
· Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle's paintwork and trim over time. Use Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover.
· Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle, wash it off as soon as possible.
· Remove any exterior accessories before entering a car wash.
Exterior Chrome
Note: Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as they can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal cleaner or polish on wheels and wheel covers.
· Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft® Detail Wash.
· Use Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner. Apply the product as you would a wax to clean bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a few minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.
· Do not apply cleaning product to hot surfaces and do not leave cleaning product on chrome surfaces for a period of time exceeding that which is recommended.
· Note: Using other non-recommended cleaners can result in severe and permanent cosmetic damage.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt.
Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. · For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft® Detail Wash. · If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft® Bug and Tar
Remover.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
272
Vehicle Care
WAXING · Wash the vehicle first. · Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives. · Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl area. The paint sealant will grey or stain the parts over time.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle's color. Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver's door jamb) to your authorized dealer to make sure you get the correct color.
· Remove particles, such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout, before repairing paint chips.
· Always read the instructions before using the products.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
· Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage.
· Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other engine components.
· Spray Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada, use Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo.
· Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running; water in the running engine may cause internal damage.
· Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug well, or the area in and around these locations.
· Cover the battery, power distribution box, and air filter assembly to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Vehicle Care
273
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windows and wiper blades should be cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the vehicle's glass or the wiper blades may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:
· The windows may be cleaned with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner.
· The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate in the U.S., or Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid in Canada. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly.
· Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches. · Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water.
Note: Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause damage to the rear window defroster's heated grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
WARNING: On vehicles equipped with seat-mounted airbags, do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such products could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the side airbag in a crash.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
274
Vehicle Care
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats equipped with side airbags:
· Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. · Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft® Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
· If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first with Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover. In Canada, use Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner.
· If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
· Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials.
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER LENS
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system.
Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens with a clean, damp, white, cotton cloth, then use a clean and dry, white, cotton cloth to dry these areas.
· Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
· Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products, such as insect repellent and suntan lotion, in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces.
· Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
· Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill on interior surfaces. If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Damage may not be covered by your warranty.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, white, cotton cloth.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Vehicle Care
275
2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean, white, cotton cloth. For more thorough cleaning, use a mild soap and water solution. If the spot cannot be completely cleaned by this method, the area may be cleaned using a commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive interiors.
3. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product to a clean, white, cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area; allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes.
4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds.
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean, white, cotton cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED) · Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. · Clean spills and stains as quickly as possible. · For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For
more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water solution. In Canada, use Motorcraft® Vinyl Cleaner. Dry the area with a soft cloth.
· If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and water solution, the leather may be cleaned using a commercially available leather cleaning product designed for automotive interiors.
· To check for compatibility, first test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the leather.
· Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics or petroleum-based leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing or damage to the leather.
CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal cleaner or polish on wheels and wheel covers.
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish. In order to maintain their shine:
· Clean weekly with Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner. Heavy dirt and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water.
· Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or covers.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
276
Vehicle Care
· Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims or covers. Industrial-strength (heavy-duty) cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
· Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
· To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period of time (30 days or more), read the following maintenance recommendations to make sure your vehicle stays in good operating condition.
All motor vehicles and their components were engineered and tested for reliable, regular driving. Long-term storage under various conditions may lead to component degradation or failure unless specific precautions are taken to preserve the components.
General
· Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place. · Protect from sunlight, if possible. · If vehicles are stored outside, they require regular maintenance to
protect against rust and damage.
Body
· Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing and underside of front fenders.
· Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed locations. · Touch up raw or primed metal to prevent rust. · Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax to
prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when the vehicle is washed.
· Lubricate hood latch, all door latches and trunk lid hinges with a light grade oil.
· Cover interior trim to prevent fading. · Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents.
Engine
· The engine oil and filter should be changed prior to storage, as used engine oil contains contaminates that may cause engine damage.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Vehicle Care
277
· Start the engine every 15 days. Run at fast idle until it reaches normal operating temperature.
· With your foot on the brake, shift through all the gears while the engine is running.
Fuel system
· Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle.
Note: During extended periods of vehicle storage (30 days or more), fuel may deteriorate due to oxidation. Add a quality gas stabilizer product to the vehicle fuel system whenever actual or expected storage periods exceed 30 days. Follow the instructions on the additive label. The vehicle should then be operated at idle speed to circulate the additive throughout the fuel system.
Cooling system
· Protect against freezing temperatures. · When removing vehicle from storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm there are no cooling system leaks, and fluid is at the recommended level.
Battery
· Check and recharge as necessary. Keep connections clean. · If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the
battery, it may be advisable to disconnect the battery cables to ensure battery charge is maintained for quick starting.
Note: If battery cables are disconnected, it will be necessary to reset memory features.
Brakes
· Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released.
Tires
· Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
· Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and pins under vehicle are covered with grease to prevent rust.
· Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8 meters) every 15 days to lubricate working parts and prevent corrosion.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
278
Vehicle Care
Removing Vehicle from Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage, do the following:
· Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build-up on window surfaces.
· Check windshield wipers for any deterioration. · Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected
during storage (mice/squirrel nests).
· Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected during storage.
· Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label. · Check brake pedal operation. Drive the vehicle 15 feet (4.5 meters)
back and forth to remove rust build-up.
· Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil and gas) to make sure there are no leaks and fluids are at recommended levels.
· If the battery was removed, clean the battery cable ends and inspect.
Contact your authorized dealer if you have any concerns or issues.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires
279
TIRE CARE
IMPORTANT INFORMATION FOR235/40R18 LOW-PROFILE TIRES AND WHEELS
If your vehicle is equipped with 235/40R18 tires, they are low-profile tires. These tires and wheels are designed to give your vehicle a sport appearance. With low-profile tires, you may notice an increase in road noise and faster tire wear, depending on road conditions and driving styles. Due to their design, low-profile tires and wheels are more prone to road damage from potholes, rough or unpaved roads, car wash rails and curb contact than standard tires and wheels.
Note: Your vehicle's warranty does not cover these types of damage. Tires should always be kept at the correct inflation pressures and extra caution should be taken when operating on rough roads to avoid impacts that could cause wheel and tire damage.
Information About Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. The Tire Quality Grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
· Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, light truck or LT type tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S. Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
280
Wheels and Tires
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear 11/2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
Note: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires
281
Glossary of Tire Terminology
· Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes, recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry.
· Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred to as DOT code.
· Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
· Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire's load-carrying capability.
· Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire's load-carrying capability.
· kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
· PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
· Cold tire pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 kilometers).
· Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position) or Tire Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver's door.
· B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door.
· Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
· Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
· Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
· Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
282
Wheels and Tires
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
Information on P Type Tires
B A
CD E F G
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire size, load index and speed rating. The definitions of these
H items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
I rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
M
J
L K
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that may be used for service on cars, sport utility vehicles, minivans and light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not begin with a letter, this may mean it is designated by either the European Tire and Rim Technical Organization or the Japan Tire Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires
283
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load index. It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your owner's manual. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed rating. The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph (299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law.
Letter rating
Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M
81 (130)
N
87 (140)
Q
99 (159)
R
106 (171)
S
112 (180)
T
118 (190)
U
124 (200)
H
130 (210)
V
149 (240)
W
168 (270)
Y
186 (299 )
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
284
Wheels and Tires
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or AT: All Terrain, or AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. See the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
· Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (11/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
· Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
· Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires
285
M. Maximum Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire manufacturer's maximum permissible pressure or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer's recommended cold inflation pressure, which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver's door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings, such as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
Additional Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires
B A
LT type tires have some additional
C
information beyond those of P type tires. These differences are
described below.
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that is intended for service on light trucks.
D
B
B. Load Range/Load Inflation Limits: Indicates the tire's load-carrying capabilities and its inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual, defined as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single, defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
286
Wheels and Tires
Information on T Type Tires
BC D
A
E
T type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires. These differences are described below.
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example. Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire.
A. T: Indicates a type of tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that is intended for temporary service on cars, sport-utility vehicles, minivans and light trucks. B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the wider the tire. C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio, which gives the tire's ratio of height to width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall. D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire. R: Indicates a radial type tire. E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter.
Location of the Tire Label You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver's door. See the payload description and graphic in the Load Carrying chapter.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires
287
INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if required.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or blowout, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in heat build-up and internal damage to the tire. It also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat!
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns.
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver's door. Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer's maximum permissible pressure or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer's recommended cold inflation pressure, which can be found
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
288
Wheels and Tires
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver's door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving even a mile.
Note: If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot (for example, driven more than 1 mile [1.6 kilometers]), never bleed or reduce air pressure. The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pressing on the metal stem in the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the other tires. For T-type mini-spare tires, see the Dissimilar Spare Tire and Wheel Assembly Information section. Store and maintain at 60 psi (4.15 bar). For full-size and dissimilar spare tires, see the Dissimilar Spare Tire and Wheel Assembly Information section. Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires
289
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire Wear
When the tread is worn down to 1/16th of an inch (2 millimeters), tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear indicators, or wear bars, which look like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on the tire when the tread is worn down to 1/16th of an inch (2 millimeters).
When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars, the tire is worn out and must be replaced.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
290
Wheels and Tires
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected, have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also recommended.
WARNING: Age Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (such as load, speed, inflation pressure) the tires experience throughout their lives. In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be replaced more frequently. You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires
291
Tire Replacement Requirements
WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or the Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver's door. If this information is not found on these labels, then you should contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer case or power transfer unit failure. If you have questions regarding tire replacement, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, when mounting replacement tires and wheels, you should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below. If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate and try again. When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size. 2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again. 3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66 meters) away from the tire wheel assembly. 4. Use both eye and ear protection. For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the maximum pressure, a Ford dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting. Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66 meters) away from the tire wheel assembly.
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
292
Wheels and Tires
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle.
The two front tires or two rear tires should generally be replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring system indicator is flashing, the system is malfunctioning. Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your tire pressure monitoring system, or some component of the system may be damaged.
Safety Practices
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, or sand, do not rapidly spin the tires. Spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety. · Observe posted speed limits. · Avoid fast starts, stops and turns. · Avoid potholes and objects on the road. · Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking.
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive, there is always the possibility that you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged, deflate it, remove the wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires
293
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your vehicle seems to pull to one side when you are driving, the wheels may be out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer. Front-wheel drive vehicles and those with an independent rear suspension may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire Rotation
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly. A dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly is defined as a spare tire and wheel that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If you have a dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly, it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the scheduled maintenance information) will help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and longer tire life.
· Front-wheel drive vehicles (front tires at left of diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
294
Wheels and Tires
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING: Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally, the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer case or power transfer unit failure.
Note: The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using snow tires and chains.
The tires on your vehicle may have all-weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow tires and chains. Use chains on the tires only in an emergency or if the law requires them.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
· If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle. · Chains may damage aluminum wheels. · Use SAE Class S chains with 195/65R15 or 215/55R16 tires only; do
not use tire chains with any other size tires.
· Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
· Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your vehicle, stop and retighten the chains. If this does not work, remove the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
· Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use tire chains on dry roads.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires
295
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge. See Inflating Your Tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
296
Wheels and Tires
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
The tire pressure monitoring system complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changing Tires with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire pressure sensor located inside the tire and wheel assembly cavity. The pressure sensor is attached to the valve stem. The pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is not visible unless the tire is removed. Take care when changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor.
You should always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at least monthly) using an accurate tire gauge. See Inflating Your Tires in this chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your four road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The low tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly low. Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under-inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer's recommended tire pressure. Even if the light turns on and a short time later turns off, your tire pressure still needs to be checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire Is Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary spare, the system will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel and tire assembly needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire pressure monitoring system, have the damaged road wheel and tire assembly repaired and remounted on your vehicle. For additional information, see Changing Tires with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System in this section.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires
297
When You Believe Your System Is Not Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended. See the following chart for information concerning your tire pressure monitoring system:
Low tire pressure warning light Solid warning light
Possible cause Customer action required
Tire(s)
1. Make sure tires are at the proper
under-inflated pressure. See Inflating Your Tires
in this chapter.
2. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer's recommended
pressure as shown on the Tire
Label (located on the edge of
driver's door or the B-Pillar),
the vehicle must be driven for at
least two minutes over 20 mph
(32 km/h) before the light
turns off.
Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel
and tire and reinstall it on the
vehicle to restore system function.
For a description on how the
system functions, see When Your
Temporary Spare Tire is Installed
in this section.
TPMS
If the tires are properly inflated
malfunction
and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
298
Wheels and Tires
Low tire pressure warning light Flashing warning light
Possible cause Customer action required
Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly and reinstall it on
the vehicle to restore system
function. For a description on how
the system functions, see When
Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed in this section.
TPMS
If the tires are properly inflated
malfunction
and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
When Inflating Your Tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your garage), the tire pressure monitoring system may not respond immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn off after you have filled your tires to the recommended inflation pressure.
How Temperature Affects Your Tire Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical passenger tire inflation pressure may increase about 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary overnight with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This lower pressure value may be detected by the tire pressure monitoring system as being significantly lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the system warning light for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is on, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one or more tires are flat, repair as necessary. Check the air pressure in the road tires. If any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the recommended inflation pressure.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires
299
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNING: The use of tire sealants may damage your tire pressure monitoring system and should not be used. However, if you must use a sealant, the tire pressure monitoring system sensor and valve stem on the wheel must be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer.
WARNING: See Tire Pressure Monitoring System in this chapter for important information. If the tire pressure monitoring sensor becomes damaged, it will no longer function.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system indicator light will illuminate when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full function of the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on this vehicle.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the system sensors. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System earlier in this chapter. Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible. During repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have the authorized dealer inspect the tire pressure monitoring system sensor for damage.
Dissimilar Spare Tire and Wheel Assembly Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly, then it is intended for temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should replace it as soon as possible with a road tire and wheel assembly that is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be replaced rather than repaired.
A dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly is defined as a spare tire or wheel that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
300
Wheels and Tires
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has a label on the wheel that states: THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not: · exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). · load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label. · tow a trailer. · use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire. · use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time. · use commercial car washing equipment. · try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following: · Handling, stability and braking performance · Comfort and noise · Ground clearance and parking at curbs · Winter weather driving capability · Wet weather driving capability · All-wheel driving capability
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly, do not: · exceed 70 mph (113 km/h). · use more than one dissimilar spare tire and wheel at a time. · use commercial car washing equipment. · use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire and wheel.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires
301
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly can lead to impairment of the following:
· Handling, stability and braking performance · Comfort and noise · Ground clearance and parking at curbs · Winter weather driving capability · Wet weather driving capability · All-wheel driving capability (if applicable) · Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly, additional caution should be given to:
· towing a trailer. · driving vehicles equipped with a camper body. · driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel, and seek service as soon as possible.
Tire Change Procedure
WARNING: When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack, even if the transmission selector lever is in position P or N.
WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire, be sure to place the transmission selector lever in position P or N, set the parking brake and block (in both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed.
WARNING: Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported only by a jack. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be seriously injured.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
302
Wheels and Tires
WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.
WARNING: Always use the jack provided as original equipment with your vehicle. If using a jack other than the one provided as original equipment with your vehicle, make sure the jack capacity is adequate for the vehicle weight, including any vehicle cargo or modifications.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking brake and activate the hazard flashers.
2. Place the transmission selector lever in position P or N and turn the engine off.
3. Remove the carpeted wheel cover.
4. Remove the wing nut and bolt assembly that secures the spare tire and jack by turning it counterclockwise.
5. Remove the lug wrench and jack from the foam holder.
6. Block the diagonally opposite wheel.
7. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn counterclockwise but do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires
303
8. The vehicle jacking points are shown here, and are depicted on the yellow warning label on the jack.
Note: Jack at the specified locations to avoid damage to the vehicle.
9. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
10. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
11. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
12. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown. See Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications in this chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification.
13. Put the flat tire, jack and lug wrench away. Make sure the jack is fastened so it does not rattle when you drive. Unblock the wheels.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
304
Wheels and Tires
Bolt size
Wheel lug nut torque*
ft-lb
N·m
M12 x 1.5
100
135
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
Note: Inspect the wheel pilot bore and mounting surface prior to installation. Remove any visible corrosion or loose particles.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Engine Cubic inches Required fuel Firing order Ignition system Compression ratio Spark plug gap
2.0L GDI engine 121 Minimum 87 octane or E85 1342 Coil On Plug 12.0:1 .035 +/ - .001 in. (0.9 +/- .05 mm)
Engine Drivebelt Routing 2.0L GDI
305
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Capacity
Brake fluid (and clutch fluidif equipped)1
Door latch, hood latch, auxiliary hood latch, trunk latch, seat tracks.
Between MIN and MAX on
reservoir
--
Lock cylinder
--
Automatic transmission
fluid2,3
1.9 quarts (1.8L)
Manual transmission fluid2
1.9 quarts (1.8L)
Ford Part Name or Equivalent
Motorcraft® High Performance DOT 4 Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid
Multi-Purpose Grease (Lithium grease)
Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock
Lubricant Motorcraft® Dual
Clutch Transmission Fluid Motorcraft® Full Synthetic Manual Transmission Fluid
Ford Part Number / Ford Specification
PM-1-C / WSS-M6C65-A2
XG-4 or XL-5 or equivalent /
ESB-M1C93-B
XL-1 / None
XT-11-QDC
BOT350-M3 / WSS-M2C200-D2
Capacities and Specifications
306
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Item
Engine oil4,5
Engine coolant 6 Windshield washer
fluid
Capacity
Ford Part Name or Equivalent
·Motorcraft® SAE
5W-20 Premium
Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil (US) ·Motorcraft® SAE
2.0L engine 4.5 quarts (4.3L)
5W-20 Full Synthetic
Motor Oil (US) ·Motorcraft® SAE
5W-20 Super Premium
Motor Oil (Canada) ·Motorcraft® SAE
5W-20 Synthetic Motor
Oil (Canada)
2.0L engine 5.3 quarts (5.0L)
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant
Prediluted
Motorcraft® Premium
Windshield Washer
Fill as required
Concentrate (US) Premium Quality
Windshield Washer
Fluid (Canada)
Ford Part Number / Ford Specification
·XO-5W20-QSP (US) ·XO-5W20-QFS (US) ·CXO-5W20-LSP12 (Canada) ·CXO-5W20-LFS12 (Canada) / WSS-M2C945-A and API Certification Mark
VC-3DIL-B (US) CVC-3DIL-B (Canada) /
WSS-M97B44-D2
ZC-32-A (US) CXC-37-(A, B, D, and F)
(Canada) / WSB-M8B16-A2/- -
307
Capacities and Specifications
308
Capacities and Specifications
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Item
Capacity
Ford Part Name or Ford Part Number / Ford
Equivalent
Specification
Fuel tank
12.4 gallons (46.9L)
--
--
1Use only Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting
WSS-M6C65-A2 and ISO 4925 Class 6. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may
cause brake system damage.
2Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
3Automatic transmissions that require Motorcraft® Dual Clutch Transmission Fluid should only
use Motorcraft® Dual Clutch Transmission Fluid. Refer to scheduled maintenance to determine
the correct service interval. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause
transmission damage.
4Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the
requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C945-A, SAE 5W-20 and display the API Certification
Mark.
5Your engine has been designed to be used with Ford engine oil, which gives a fuel economy
benefit while maintaining the durability of your engine. Using oils other than the one specified
can result in longer engine cranking periods, reduced engine performance, reduced fuel economy
and increased emission levels.
6Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
Capacities and Specifications
309
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component
Air filter element Oil filter
2.0L GDI engine / 2.0L GTDI EcoBoost engine FA-19081 FL-910- S2
Battery Spark plugs
BXT-96R-500/BXT-96R-590
3
Cabin air filter
FP70
Windshield wiper blade
WW-2802 (driver side) / WW-2803 (passenger side)
1 Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
2 Only use the specified replacement oil filter. The use of a non-specified oil filter can result in engine damage.
3 For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the spark plugs.
Note: Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft® or equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not used.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
310
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is located on the driver's side instrument panel.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification number.
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following information:
A. World manufacturer identifier
B. Brake system / Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) / Restraint Devices and their location
C. Make, vehicle line, series, body type
D. Engine type
E. Check digit
F. Model year
G. Assembly plant
H. Production sequence number.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Capacities and Specifications
311
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require that a Safety Compliance Certification Label be affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the Safety Compliance Certification Label may be located. The Safety Compliance Certification Label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar, the door latch post, or the edge of the door near the door latch, next to the driver's seating position.
TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATION
You can find a transmission code on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. The following table tells you which transmission each code represents.
Description Six-speed automatic (DPS6) Five-speed manual (MTX75)
Code W Z
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
312
Accessories
ACCESSORIES
For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your vehicle, please contact your dealer or visit our online store at: Accessories.Ford.com (U.S. only).
Ford Custom Accessories are available for your vehicle through your local Ford or Ford of Canada dealer. Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any properly dealer-installed Ford Custom Accessories found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective accessories. The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides you the greatest benefit:
· 12 months or 12000 miles (20000 kilometers) (whichever occurs first), or
· the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
Exterior Style
·Hood deflectors ·Body styling kit ·Side window deflectors ·Graphics kit · Rear bumper protector
·Spoilers ·Wheels ·Splash guards ·Custom graphics*
Interior Style
·Floor mats
· Illuminated gear knob
·Stainless steel door sill plates
·Auto dimming rearview mirror with compass and temperature
Lifestyle
·Ash cup / smoker's package ·Cargo net* ·Cargo area protector ·Cargo area protector ·Car covers*
·Roof racks and carriers* ·Soft cargo organizers ·Premium carpeted trunk mat ·Premium carpeted trunk mat
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Accessories
313
Peace of mind
·Keyless entry keypad ·Remote start
·Vehicle security systems
·Wheel locks ·Bumper mounted parking assist system* ·Car cover
*Ford Licensed Accessories (FLA) are warranted by the accessory manufacturer's warranty. Ford Licensed Accessories are fully designed and developed by the accessory manufacturer and have not been designed or tested to Ford Motor Company engineering requirements. Contact your Ford dealer for details regarding the manufacturer's limited warranty and/or a copy of the FLA product limited warranty offered by the accessory manufacturer.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
· When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification label). Consult your authorized dealer for specific weight information.
· The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile communications systems -- such as two-way radios, telephones and theft alarms -- that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service technician.
· Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use.
· To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas onto their vehicle should not locate the amateur radio antennas in the area of the driver's side hood.
· Any non-Ford custom electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability, and may also adversely affect the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
314
Ford Extended Service Plan
FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS (U.S. ONLY)
More than 32 million Ford and Lincoln owners have discovered the powerful protection of Ford ESP. It is the only extended service plan backed by Ford Motor Company, and provides "peace of mind" protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.
Up to 500+ Covered Vehicle Components
There are four, new-vehicle Extended Service Plans with different levels of coverage. Ask your dealer for details.
PremiumCare Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 500 covered components, this plan is so complete that we generally only discuss what is not covered!
ExtraCare Covers 113 components, and includes many high-tech items.
BaseCare Covers 84 components.
PowertrainCare Covers 29 critical components.
Ford ESP is honored by all Ford and Lincoln Dealers in the U.S. and Canada. It is the only extended service plan authorized and backed by Ford Motor Company. That means you get:
· Reliable, quality service anywhere you go. · Factory-trained technicians. · Ford Authorized Parts used with every covered repair.
Rental Car Reimbursement
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs, you are eligible for rental car coverage, including Bumper-to-Bumper warranty repairs, or manufacturer's recalls.
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford ESP coverage expires, you can transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner. Whenever you are ready to sell your car, prospective buyers may feel better about taking a risk on your used vehicle. Ford ESP may add resale value!
Plus, exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
· Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts. · Out-of-fuel and lock-out assistance. · Travel expense reimbursement for lodging, meals and rental car. · Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car coverage and
emergency transportation.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Ford Extended Service Plan
315
Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill the cost of parts and labor can easily exceed the price of your Ford ESP Service Contract. With Ford ESP, you minimize your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs.
Avoid the rising cost of properly maintaining your vehicle!
Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers items that routinely wear out.
The coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about affording your vehicle maintenance. It covers regular checkups, routine inspections, preventive care and replacement of items that require periodic attention for normal wear:
· Wiper blades · Spark plugs (except California) · Clutch disc
· Brake pads and linings · Shock absorbers · Belts and hoses.
Contact your selling Ford or Lincoln dealership today so they can customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving lifestyle and budget.
Interest Free Finance Options Available
Take advantage of our installment payment plan, just a 10% down payment will provide you with an affordable no interest, no-fee payment opportunity.
Protect Yourself from the Rising Cost of Vehicle Repairs with a Ford Extended Service Plan
To learn more, call our Ford ESP specialists at 8003673377, and do not forget to ask about our interest free payment program, allowing you all the security and benefits Ford ESP has to offer while paying over time. You're pre-approved with no credit checks, no hassles!
Or, mail your name, address, city, state and zip code to:
Ford ESP P.O. Box 8072 Royal Oak, MI 480689933
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
316
Ford Extended Service Plan
FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford Extended Service Plan (ESP). Ford ESP is the only service contract backed by Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan you purchase, Ford ESP provides benefits such as:
· rental reimbursement · coverage for certain maintenance and wear items · protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty Coverage expires
· Roadside Assistance benefits.
There are several Ford ESP plans available in various time, distance and deductible combinations. Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving needs, including reimbursement for towing and rental.
When you purchase Ford ESP, you receive added peace of mind protection throughout Canada and the United States, provided by a network of participating Ford Motor Company dealers. The Lincoln Maintenance Protection Plan is honored at authorized Lincoln dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada and the United States are not eligible for Ford ESP coverage.
This information is subject to change.
For more information, visit your local Ford of Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for you.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance
317
GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance schedule helps protect against major repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and may also help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for completed maintenance with the vehicle.
Regular maintenance intervals for your vehicle have been established based upon rigorous testing. It is important that you have your vehicle serviced at the proper times. These intervals serve two purposes; one is to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and the second is to keep your cost of owning the vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to see that all scheduled maintenance is performed and that the materials used meet the specifications identified in the Capacities and Specifications chapter. Failure to perform scheduled maintenance invalidates warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive factory-sponsored certification training to help them become experts on the operation of your vehicle. Ask your dealership about the training and certification their technicians have received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft® Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft® and Ford-authorized branded remanufactured replacement parts. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company's specifications. Parts installed at your dealership carry a nationwide, 12 month/12000 mile (20000 kilometer) parts and labor limited warranty. If you do not use Ford authorized parts, they may not meet Ford specifications and, depending on the part, it could affect emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make your service visit more convenient and they offer one stop shopping. They can perform any services that are required on your vehicle, from general maintenance to collision repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours or bodyshops. Please contact your dealer for details.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
318
Scheduled Maintenance
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays dividends in the form of improved reliability, durability and resale value. To maintain the proper performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems, it is imperative that scheduled maintenance be completed at the designated intervals.
Your vehicle is equipped with the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor® (IOLM) system which shows a message in the information display at the proper oil change service interval; this interval may be up to two years or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers). When ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED appears in the information display, it's time for an oil change; the oil change must be done within two weeks or 500 miles (800 kilometers) of the ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing. The Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor® must be reset after each oil change. See Engine oil check in the Maintenance chapter.
If your information display is prematurely reset or becomes inoperative, you should perform the oil change interval at six months or 5000 miles (8000 kilometers) from your last oil change. Never exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between oil change intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems using different specifications and performance features. That is why it is important to rely upon your dealership to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended maintenance intervals for various parts and component systems based upon engineering testing. Ford Motor Company relies upon this testing to determine the most appropriate mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you and recommends against maintenance schedules that deviate from the scheduled maintenance information.
Ford strongly recommends using only genuine Ford, Motorcraft® or Ford-authorized remanufactured replacement parts because they are engineered for your vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
Ford Motor Company recommended additives and chemicals are listed in this book and in the Workshop Manual. Additional chemicals or additives not approved by Ford Motor Company are not recommended as part of normal maintenance. Please consult your warranty information.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance
319
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic and, by itself, does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid needs to be changed. However, discolored fluids that also show signs of overheating and/or foreign material contamination should be inspected immediately by a qualified expert such as the factory-trained technicians at your dealership. Your vehicle's oils and fluids should be changed at the specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable way to change fluid for many vehicle sub-systems during scheduled maintenance. It is critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system, or using a Ford-approved flushing chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Certain basic maintenance checks and inspections should be performed every month or at six month intervals.
Check every month Engine oil level. Function of all interior and exterior lights. Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure. Windshield washer fluid level.
Check every six months Battery connections. Clean if necessary. Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary. Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength. Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary. Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary. Parking brake for proper operation. Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function. Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag, safety belt) for operation. Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
320
Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right, it is important to have the systems on your vehicle checked regularly. This can help identify potential issues and prevent major problems. Ford Motor Company recommends the following multi-point inspection be performed at every scheduled maintenance interval to help make sure your vehicle keeps running great.
Multi-point Inspection
Accessory drive belt(s)
Half-shaft dust boots
Battery performance
Horn operation
Clutch operation (if equipped) Radiator, cooler, heater and A/C hoses
Engine air filter
Suspension components for leaks or damage
Exhaust system
Steering and linkage
Exterior lamps and hazard warning system operation Fluid levels*; fill if necessary
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure**
Windshield for cracks, chips or pits
For oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operation
*Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, manual transmission, automatic transmission and window washer.
**If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service advisor or technician about the multi-point vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive way to perform a thorough inspection of your vehicle. It is your checklist that gives you immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle. You will know what has been checked, what is okay, as well as those things that may require future or immediate attention. The multi-point vehicle inspection is one more way to keep your vehicle running great!
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance
321
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
322
Scheduled Maintenance
NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE AND LOG
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor®
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor® that determines when the engine oil needs to be changed based on how your vehicle is used. By using several important factors in its calculations, the monitor helps reduce the cost of owning your vehicle and reduce environmental waste at the same time. This means you won't have to remember to change the oil on a mileage-based schedule; the vehicle lets you know when an oil change is due by displaying ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED in the information display. The following table is intended to provide examples of vehicle use and its impact on engine oil change intervals; it is provided as a guideline only. Actual engine oil change intervals depend on several factors and generally decrease with severity of use.
When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message
Miles (km)
Vehicle use and examples
Normal
7500-10000 (12000-16000)
Normal commuting with highway driving No, or moderate, load or towing Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5000-7499 (8000-11999)
Moderate to heavy load or towing Mountainous or off-road conditions Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation
3000-4999 (4000-7999)
Extreme Maximum load or towing Extreme hot or cold operation
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance
323
Normal Scheduled Maintenance* At every oil change Change engine oil and filter.** interval as indicated by Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure the information display tread depth.
Perform multi-point inspection (recommended). Inspect automatic transmission fluid level (if equipped with dipstick). Consult dealer for requirements. Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and parking brake. Inspect cabin air filter (if equipped). Inspect engine cooling system strength and hoses. Inspect exhaust system and heat shields. Inspect half-shaft boots. Inspect steering linkage, ball joints, suspension and tie-rod ends. Lubricate if equipped with grease fittings. Inspect wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
*Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service intervals. **Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change. See Engine oil check in the Maintenance chapter.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
324
Scheduled Maintenance
Additional Maintenance Items1
Every 20000 miles
Replace cabin air filter (if equipped).
(32000 km)
Every 30000 miles
Replace engine air filter.
(48000 km) At 100000 miles
Change engine coolant.2
(160000 km)
Every 100000 miles (160000 km)
Replace spark plugs. Inspect accessory drive belt(s).3
Every 150000 miles Change automatic transmission fluid and filter.
(240000 km)
Change manual transmission fluid.
Replace accessory drive belt(s) if not replaced
within the last 100000 miles (160000 km).
1Additional maintenance items can be performed within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last oil change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.
2Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every three years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).
3After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance
Maintenance Schedule Log
DEALER VALIDATION:
DEALER VALIDATION:
325
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE:
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
326
Scheduled Maintenance
DEALER VALIDATION:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE:
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance
DEALER VALIDATION:
DEALER VALIDATION:
327
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE:
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
328
Scheduled Maintenance
SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any of the following conditions, you need to perform additional maintenance as indicated. If you occasionally operate your vehicle under any of these conditions, it is not necessary to perform the additional maintenance. For specific recommendations, see your dealership service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the following tables when specified or within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing in the information display.
Example #1: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message comes on at 28751 miles (46270 kilometers); perform the 30000 mile (48000 kilometer) automatic transmission fluid replacement.
Example #2: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message has not come on, but the odometer reads 30000 miles (48000 kilometers); perform the engine air filter replacement. (i.e., Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor® was reset at 25000 miles [40000 kilometers].)
As required
Every 60000 miles (96000 km)
Using a Car-top Carrier Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart. Change manual transmission fluid.
Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances as in
Heavy Commercial Use (i.e., Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or
Livery)
As required
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by
the information display and perform services
listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance
chart.
Inspect frequently,
Replace cabin air filter (if equipped).
service as required Replace engine air filter.
Every 60000 miles
Replace spark plugs.
(96000 km)
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance
329
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads
Inspect frequently, service as required
Replace cabin air filter (if equipped). Replace engine air filter.
Every 5000 miles (8000 km)
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Every 5000 miles (8000 km) or six months
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth. Change engine oil and filter.*
Perform multi-point inspection.
Every 50000 miles (80000 km)
Change manual transmission fluid.
*Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor® after each engine oil and filter change. See the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Exclusive Use of E85 (Flex Fuel Vehicles only)
Every oil change
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full
with regular unleaded fuel.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
330
Scheduled Maintenance
Special Operating Condition Log
DEALER VALIDATION:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE:
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance
DEALER VALIDATION:
DEALER VALIDATION:
331
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE:
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
332
Scheduled Maintenance
SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any of the following conditions, you need to perform additional maintenance as indicated. If you occasionally operate your vehicle under any of these conditions, it is not necessary to perform the additional maintenance. For specific recommendations, see your dealership service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the following tables when specified or within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing in the information display.
Example #1: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message comes on at 28751 miles (46270 kilometers); perform the 30000 mile (48000 kilometer) automatic transmission fluid replacement.
Example #2: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message has not come on, but the odometer reads 30000 miles (48000 kilometers); perform the engine air filter replacement. (i.e., Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor® was reset at 25000 miles [40000 kilometers].)
Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances as in
Heavy Commercial Use (i.e., Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or
Livery)
As required
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by
the information display and perform services
listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance
chart.
Inspect frequently,
Replace cabin air filter.
service as required Replace engine air filter.
Every 60000 miles
Replace spark plugs.
(96000 km)
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions such as Unpaved or
Dusty Roads
Inspect frequently,
Replace cabin air filter.
service as required Replace engine air filter.
Every 5000 miles
Inspect the wheels and related components for
(8000 km)
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and
measure tread depth.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance
333
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions such as Unpaved or
Every 5000 miles
Dusty Roads Change engine oil and filter.*
(8000 km) or six months
Perform multi-point inspection.
*C-MAX Energi only: Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor® after each engine oil and filter change. See Engine oil check in the Maintenance chapter.
ENGINE COOLANT CHANGE RECORD
Initial change
Six years or 100000 miles (160000 km)
(whichever comes first)
After initial change Every three years or 50000 miles (80000 km)
Engine Coolant Change Log
DEALER VALIDATION:
DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE: DEALER VALIDATION:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE:
RO#: DATE:
P&A CODE: HOURS: MILEAGE:
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
334
SYNC®
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications system that works with your Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and portable media player. This allows you to: · Make and receive calls. · Access and play music from your portable music player. · Use 911 Assist®, Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services (Traffic,
Directions & Information) (if equipped). · Use applications, such as Pandora and Stitcher, via SYNC AppLinkTM
(if applicable). · Access phonebook contacts and music via voice commands. · Stream music from your connected phone. · Text message. · Use the advanced voice recognition system. · USB device charging (if your device supports this).
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
SYNC®
335
GENERAL INFORMATION Make sure you review your device's manual before using it with SYNC.
Support The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you cannot answer on your own. Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST In the United States, call: 18882701055 In Canada, call: 18005653673 Times are subject to change due to holidays.
SYNC Owner Account Why do I need a SYNC owner account? · Required to activate Vehicle Health Report and to view the reports online. · Required to activate the subscription-based SYNC Services and to
personalize your Saved Points and Favorites. · Essential for keeping up with the latest software downloads available for
SYNC. · Access to customer support for any questions you may have.
Driving Restrictions For your safety, certain features are speed-dependent and restricted when your vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Safety Information
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
When using SYNC:
· Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are broken, split or damaged. Place cords and cables out of the way, so they do not interfere with the operation of pedals, seats, compartments or safe driving abilities.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
336
SYNC®
· Do not leave playing devices in your vehicle during extreme conditions as it could cause them damage. See your device's manual for further information.
· Do not attempt to service or repair the system. See your authorized dealer.
For your safety, some SYNC functions are speed-dependent. Their use is limited to when your vehicle is traveling at speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h).
Make sure that you review your device's manual before using it with SYNC.
Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected to SYNC, the system creates a profile within your vehicle that is linked to that cellular phone. This profile is created in order to offer you more cellular features and to operate more efficiently. Among other things, this profile may contain data about your cellular phone book, text messages (read and unread), and call history, including history of calls when your cell phone was not connected to the system. In addition, if you connect a media device, the system creates and retains an index of supported media content. The system also records a short development log of approximately 10 minutes of all recent system activity. The log profile and other system data may be used to improve the system and help diagnose any problems that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index, and development log remain in the vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in the vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected. If you no longer plan to use the system or the vehicle, we recommend you perform a Master Reset to erase all stored information.
System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to the vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access the system data for any purpose other than as described absent consent, a court order, or where required by law enforcement, other government authorities, or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. For further privacy information, see the sections on 911 Assist®, Vehicle Health Report, and Traffic, Directions and Information.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
SYNC®
337
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many features using voice commands. This allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in front of you.
Initiating a Voice Session
Push the voice icon; a tone sounds and Listening appears in the display. Say any of the following:
Say:
If you want to:
"Phone"
Make calls.
"USB"
Access the device connected to your USB port.
"Bluetooth Audio"
Stream audio from your phone.
"Line in"
Access the device connected to the auxiliary input jack.
"Cancel"
Cancel the requested action.
"SYNC"
Return to the main menu.
"Voice settings"
Adjust the level of voice interaction and
feedback.
"Vehicle Health Report" Run a vehicle health report.*
"Services"
Access the SYNC Services portal.*
"Mobile apps"
Access mobile applications.*
"Help"
Hear a list of voice commands available in the current mode.
*If equipped, U.S. only.
System Interaction and Feedback
The system provides feedback through audible tones, prompts, questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen level of interaction (voice settings). You can customize the voice recognition system to provide more or less instruction and feedback.
The default setting is to a higher level of interaction in order to help you learn to use the system. You can change these settings at any time.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
338
SYNC®
Adjusting the Interaction Level
Push the voice icon; when prompted, say "Voice settings", then any of the following:
When you say: "Interaction mode standard"
"Interaction mode advanced"
The system: Provides more detailed interaction and
guidance. Provides less audible interaction and
more tone prompts.
The system defaults to the standard interaction mode.
Confirmation prompts are short questions the system asks when it is not sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses to your request. (For example, the system may ask "Phone, is that correct?") If turned off, the system simply makes a best guess as to what you requested and you may still occasionally be asked to confirm settings.
"Confirmation prompts on" "Confirmation prompts off"
The system creates candidate lists when it has the same confidence level of several options based on your voice command. When turned on, you may be prompted with as many as four possibilities for clarification.
For example, "Say 1 after the tone to call John Doe at home. Say 2 after the tone to call Johnny Doe on mobile. Say 3 after the tone to call Jane Doe at home." Or, "Say 1 after the tone to play John Doe, Say 2 after the tone to play Johnny Doe."
"Phone candidate lists on" "Phone candidate lists off" "Media candidate lists on" "Media candidate lists off"
Helpful Hints
· Make sure the interior of the vehicle is as quiet as possible. Wind noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system from correctly recognizing spoken commands.
· After pressing the voice icon, wait until after the tone sounds and Listening appears before saying a command. Any command spoken prior to this does not register with the system.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
SYNC®
339
· Speak naturally, without long pauses between words.
· At any time you can interrupt the system while it is speaking by pressing the voice icon.
USING SYNC WITH YOUR PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main features of SYNC. While the system supports a variety of features, many are dependent on your cellular phone's functionality. At a minimum, most cellular phones with Bluetooth wireless technology support the following functions:
· Answering an incoming call. · Ending a call. · Using privacy mode. · Dialing a number.
· Redialing.
· Call waiting notification.
· Caller ID.
Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook download, are phone-dependent features. To check your phone's compatibility, see your phone's user manual and visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
Pairing a Phone for the First Time
Note: SYNC can support downloading up to approximately 2000 entries per Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition and radio are turned on and the transmission is in position P.
Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on your audio system.
Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC allows you to make and receive hands-free calls. 1. Press the phone button; when the display indicates no phone is
paired, press OK. 2. When Find SYNC appears in the display, press OK. 3. Put your phone into Bluetooth discovery mode. See your phone's
user guide if necessary. 4. When prompted on your phone's display, enter the six-digit PIN
provided by SYNC in the radio display. 5. The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
340
SYNC®
Depending on your phone's capability and your market, the system may prompt you with questions such as setting the current phone as the primary phone (the phone SYNC automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start-up), downloading your phone book, etc.
Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on your audio system.
Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition and radio are turned on and that the transmission is in position P. 1. Press the phone button and scroll until System Settings is selected. 2. Press OK and scroll until Bluetooth Devices is selected and press OK. 3. Scroll until Add Bluetooth Device is selected and press OK. 4. When Find SYNC appears in the display, press OK. 5. Put your phone into Bluetooth discovery mode. See your phone's
user guide if necessary. 6. When prompted on your phone's display, enter the six-digit PIN
provided by SYNC in the radio display. The display indicates when the pairing is successful. 7. The system then prompts with questions such as if you would like to set the current phone as the primary phone (the phone SYNC automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start-up), download your phone book, etc.
Phone Voice Commands
Press the voice icon and say "Phone". Say any of the following:
"PHONE" "Call <name>"1 "Call <name> on mobile OR cell"1 "Call <name> on other"1 "Phone book <name> at home"2 "Phone book <name> on mobile OR cell"2 "Call history outgoing"2 "Phone book <name> on Other"2 "Call history missed"2
"Menu"2,3
"Join"
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
SYNC®
341
"PHONE" "Call <name> at home"1 "Call <name> at work" OR "Call <name> in office"1
"Dial"1,4 "Phone book <name>"2 "Phone book <name> at work" OR "Phone book <name> at office"2 "Call history incoming"2
"Connections"2
"Go to privacy"
"Hold"
1These commands do not require you to say "Phone" first. 2These commands are not available until phone information is completely downloaded using Bluetooth. 3See "MENU" table below. 4See "DIAL" table below.
"MENU" "(Phone) connections"* "(Phone) settings (message) notification off"* "(Phone) settings (message) notification on"* "(Phone) settings (set) phone ringer"* "(Phone) settings (set) ringer 1"* "(Phone) settings (set) ringer 2"* "(Phone) settings (set) ringer 3"* "(Phone) settings (set) ringer off"*
"Battery"
"Phone name"
"Signal"
"Text message inbox"
*Words in ( ) are optional and do not have to be spoken for the system to understand the command.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
342
SYNC®
Phone book commands: When you ask SYNC® to access a phone book name, number, etc., the requested information appears in the display to view. Press the phone button and say "Call" to call the contact.
"DIAL" "411" (four-one-one), "911" (nine-one-one), etc.
"700 (seven hundred)" (seven hundred) "800 (eight hundred)" (eight hundred) "900 (nine hundred)" (nine hundred)
"#" "/" (pound, slash) "<number> 09" "Asterisk" (*)
"Clear" (deletes all entered digits) "Delete" (deletes one digit) "Plus" "Star"
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the phone button or press MENU to go to the PHONE menu.
Making Calls Press the voice icon and when prompted say: 1. Say "Call <name>" or "Dial", then the desired number. 2. When the system confirms the number, say "Dial" again to initiate the
call.
To erase the last spoken digit, say "Delete" or press the left arrow button. To erase all spoken digits, say "Clear" or press and hold the left arrow button.
To end the call, press and hold the phone button.
Receiving Calls
When receiving a call, you can:
Answer the call by pressing this button on your steering wheel controls.
Reject the call by pressing this button on your steering wheel controls.
Ignore the call by doing nothing.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
SYNC®
343
Phone Options during an Active Call
During an active call, you have additional menu features which become available such as putting a call on hold, joining calls, etc. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the menu options.
To access: 1. Press MENU during an active call. 2. When Active Call Menu is selected, press OK. 3. Scroll to cycle through the following options:
When you select: Mute Call? Privacy
Call Hold Join Calls
Enter Tones Phonebook
You can:
Mute the call.
Switch a call from an active hands-free environment to your cellular phone for a more private conversation. Press OK when Privacy on/off appears. (The display indicates In Privacy and the system transfers your call.)
Put an active call on hold. Press OK when Place Call on Hold? appears. To answer another call at this time, press the phone button.
Join two separate calls. 1. Press the phone button. 2. Access the desired contact through SYNC or use voice commands to place the second call. Once actively in the second call, press MENU. 3. Scroll until Join Calls appears and press OK. Press OK again when Join Calls? appears. Note: SYNC supports a maximum of three callers on a multiparty/conference call.
Enter "tones" such as numbers for passwords. Scroll until the desired number appears in the display, then press OK; a tone sounds as confirmation. Repeat as necessary.
Access your phonebook contacts. 1. Press OK to select, then scroll through your phonebook contacts. 2. Press OK again when the desired selection appears in the display. 3. Press the phone button.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
344
SYNC®
When you select: Call History
Return
You can:
Access your call history log. 1. Press OK to select, then scroll through your call history options (incoming, outgoing or missed). 2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the display. 3. Press the phone button to call the selection.
Exit the current menu.
Accessing Features through the Phone Menu
SYNC's phone menu allows you to redial a number, access your call history and phone book and send text messages as well as access phone and system settings. You can also access advanced features, such as 911 Assist®, Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services. 1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu. 2. Scroll to cycle through:
When you select: Phone Redial
Call History1
You can:
Redial the last number called (if available). Press OK to select, then press OK again to confirm.
Allows you to access any previously dialed, received or missed calls while your phone has been connected to the system. 1. Press OK to select. 2. Scroll to select from Call History Incoming, Call History Outgoing or Call History Missed. Press OK make your selection. 3. Press OK or the phone button to call the desired selection. Note: The system attempts to automatically re-download your phone book and call history each time your phone connects to SYNC (if the auto download feature is on and your Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone supports this feature).
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
SYNC®
345
When you select:
You can:
Phonebook1,2
Allows you to access your downloaded phonebook. 1. Press OK to confirm and enter. If your phonebook has fewer than 255 listings, they
appear alphabetically in flat file mode. If there
are more, they are organized into alphabetical
categories.
2. Scroll until the desired contact appears, then press OK. 3. Press OK or the phone button.
Text Message1
Enables you to send, download and delete text messages.
Phone Settings1
Allows you to view your phone's status, set ring tones, select your message notification, change
phone book entries and automatically download
your cellular phone among other features.
SYNC Services3
Access the SYNC services portal where you can request various types of information, traffic reports and directions.
911 Assist4
Place an emergency call to a 911 operator for you after an accident (if the feature is used
properly).
Vehicle Health Report3
Create and receive a diagnostic report card on your vehicle.
Mobile Apps3
Interact with SYNC®-capable mobile applications on your smartphone.
System Settings
Access Bluetooth Devices menu listings (add, connect, set as primary, on/off, delete) as well
as Advanced menu listings (prompts,
languages, defaults, master reset, install
application and system information).
Exit Phone Menu
Exit the phone menu by pressing OK.
1This is a phone-dependent feature.
2This is a phone-dependent and speed-dependent feature.
3If equipped, U.S. only.
4If equipped, U.S. and Canada only.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
346
SYNC®
Text Messaging
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
SYNC allows you to receive, send, download and delete text messages. The system can also read incoming text messages to you so that you do not have to take your eyes off the road.
Receiving a Text Message
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. Your phone must support downloading text messages using Bluetooth to receive incoming text messages.
Note: Forwarding a text message is a speed-dependent feature and can only be done when the vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
Note: Only one recipient is allowed per text message.
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the display indicates you have a new message. You have these options: 1. Press the voice button, wait for the prompt and say "Read Message"
to have SYNC read the message to you. 2. Press OK to receive and open the text message or do nothing and
the message goes into your text message inbox. Press OK again and SYNC reads your message aloud as you are not able to view the message. You can then also choose whether you'd like to reply or forward the message. 3. Press OK and scroll to choose between: · Reply to Text Message: Press OK to access and then scroll
through the list of pre-defined messages to send. · Forward Text Message: Press OK to forward the message to
anyone in your Phonebook or Call History. You can also choose Enter Number.
Sending, Downloading and Deleting Your Text Messages
Text messaging is a phone-dependent feature. If your phone is compatible, SYNC allows you to receive, send, download and delete text messages. 1. Press the phone button. 2. Scroll until Text Message appears and press OK. 3. Scroll to select from the following options:
Send Text Message? enables you to send a new text message based on a pre-defined set of 15 messages.
Download Unread Msgs allows you to download your unread messages (only) to SYNC. To download the messages, press OK to select. The display indicates your messages are being downloaded. When complete, SYNC takes you to your inbox.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
SYNC®
347
Delete All Messages? allows you to delete current text messages from SYNC (not your phone). To delete the messages, press OK to select. The display indicates when all your text messages have been deleted and SYNC returns you to the text message menu. Note: SYNC does not automatically download all of your unread text messages at every ignition cycle (as it does with call history and phonebook if automatic download is set to on).
Return exits the current menu when you press OK.
If you select Send Text Message?: 1. Press OK to select. If the system detects your phone does not
support this feature, Unsupported appears in the display and SYNC returns to the main menu. 2. Scroll to cycle through the message options in the following chart. 3. Press OK when the desired selection is in the display. The system now needs to know who to send the message to. 4. Scroll to cycle through Phonebook or Call History entries. You can also select Enter Number to audibly enter a desired number. 5. Press OK to enter the desired menu and scroll to select the specific contact. 6. Press OK when the contact appears and press OK again to confirm when the system asks if you would like to send the message. Each text message is sent with the following signature: "This message was sent from my <Ford or Lincoln>".
Pre-defined text message options
Can't talk right now
Call me
Call you later
Be there in 10 minutes
Be there in 20 minutes
Yes
No
Why?
Thanks
Where R you?
I need more directions
I love you
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
348
SYNC®
Pre-defined text message options Too funny
Can't wait to see you I'm stuck in traffic
Accessing Your Phone Settings
These are phone-dependent features. Your phone settings allow you to access and adjust features such as your ring tone, text message notification, modify your phone book and also set up automatic download. 1. Press the phone button. 2. Scroll until Phone Settings appears, then press OK. 3. Scroll to select from the following options:
When you select: Phone Status Set Ringer
Message Notification
You can:
See the provider, name, signal power, battery power and roaming status of your connected phone. Press OK to select and scroll to view the information. When done, press OK again to return to the phone status menu.
Select which ring tone sounds during an incoming call (one of the system's or your phone's). 1. Press OK to select and scroll to hear Ringer 1, Ringer 2, Ringer 3 and Phone Ringer. 2. Press OK to select. Note: If your phone supports in-band ringing, your phone's ringer sounds when Phone Ringer is chosen.
Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you when a text message arrives. 1. Press OK to select and scroll between Message Notification On or Message Notification Off. 2. Press OK to select.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
SYNC®
349
When you select: Modify Phonebook
Auto Download
Return
You can:
Modify the contents of your phone book (i.e., add, delete, download). Press OK to select and scroll between:
Add Contacts: Press OK to add more contacts from your phone book. Push the desired contact(s) on your phone. See your phone's user guide on how to push contacts.
Delete Phonebook: Press OK to delete the current phone book and call history. When Delete Phonebook appears, press OK to confirm. SYNC takes you back to the Phone Settings menu.
Download Phonebook: Press OK to select and press OK again when Confirm Download? appears.
Automatically download your phone book each time your phone connects to SYNC. Press OK to select. When Auto Download On? appears, press OK to have your phonebook automatically downloaded each time. Select Off to NOT download your phonebook every time your phone connects to SYNC. Your phonebook, call history and text messages can only be accessed when your specific phone is connected to SYNC. Note: Downloading times are phone- and quantity-dependent. Note: When auto download is on, any changes, additions or deletions saved since your last download are deleted.
Exit the current menu.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
350
SYNC®
System Settings
System Settings provide access to your Bluetooth Devices and Advanced menu features. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the menu options.
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you to add, connect, delete and set a phone as primary as well as turn your Bluetooth feature on and off.
The Advanced menu allows you to access and set prompts, languages, defaults, perform a master reset, install an application and view system information.
Bluetooth Devices Menu Options
This menu allows you to add, connect, delete, set a phone as primary, and turn Bluetooth on or off. 1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu. 2. Scroll until System Settings appears and press OK. 3. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears and select OK. 4. Scroll to select from the following options:
If you select: Add Bluetooth Device* Connect Bluetooth Device
Set Primary Phone
You can:
See Using SYNC with your phone earlier in this chapter for pairing instructions.
Connect a previously paired Bluetooth-enabled phone. 1. Press OK to select and view a list of previously paired phones. 2. Scroll until the desired device is chosen, then press OK to connect the phone. Note: Only one device can be connected at a time. When another phone is connected, the previous one is disconnected.
Set a previously paired phone as your primary phone. Press OK to select and scroll to select the desired phone. Press OK to confirm. Note: SYNC attempts to connect with the primary phone at every ignition cycle. When a phone is selected as primary, it appears first in the list and is marked with an *.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
SYNC®
351
If you select:
You can:
Set Bluetooth On/Off Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off. Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and Off. When the desired selection is chosen, press OK. Note: Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and deactivates all Bluetooth features.
Delete Device
Delete a paired phone. Press OK and scroll to select the device. Press OK to confirm.
Delete All Devices
Delete all previously paired phones (and all information originally saved with those phones). Press OK to select.
Return
Exit the current menu.
*This is a speed-dependent feature.
Advanced Menu Options
This menu allows you to access settings such as prompts, languages, defaults, perform a master reset, install an application and view system information. 1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu. 2. Scroll until System Settings appears and press OK. 3. Scroll until Advanced appears and select OK. 4. Scroll to select from the following options:
If you select: Prompts
You can:
Get help from SYNC by using questions, helpful hints or asking you for a specific action. To turn these prompts on or off: 1. Press OK to select and scroll to select between on or off. 2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the display. SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
352
If you select: Languages
Factory Defaults
Master Reset
Install Application System Info MAP Profile Return
SYNC®
You can:
Choose between English, Espanol and Francais. Once selected, all of SYNC's radio displays and prompts are in the selected language. 1. Press OK to select and then scroll through the languages. 2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the display. If you change the language setting, the display indicates that the system is updating. When complete, SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu.
Return to the factory default settings. This selection does not erase your indexed information (phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices). 1. Press OK to select and then press OK again when Restore Defaults? appears in the display. 2. Press OK to confirm.
Completely erase all information stored on SYNC (phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices) and return to the factory default settings. Press OK to select. The display indicates when complete and SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu.
Install applications you have downloaded. Press OK and scroll to select. Press OK to confirm.
Access the Auto Version number as well as the FPN number. Press OK to select.
This is a Bluetooth component which can further help your phone with the exchange of text messages.
Exit the current menu.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
SYNC®
353
SYNC APPLICATIONS AND SERVICES (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: In order for the following features to work, your cellular phone must be compatible with SYNC. To check your phone's compatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
· SYNC Services (if equipped, U.S. only): Provides access to traffic, directions and information such as travel, horoscopes, stock prices and more.
· 911 Assist®: Can alert 911 in the event of an emergency. · Vehicle Health Report (if equipped, U.S. only): Provides a diagnostic
and maintenance report card of your vehicle.
· SYNC AppLinkTM: Allows you to connect to and use certain applications such as Pandora and Stitcher (if your phone is compatible).
911 Assist®
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on prior to a crash, the system will not dial for help which could delay response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services immediately to avoid delayed response time which could increase the risk of serious injury or death after a crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds of the crash, the system or phone may be damaged or non-functional.
WARNING: Always place your phone in a secure location in the vehicle so it does not become a projectile or get damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the phone which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly.
Note: SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on, ensure that you read the 911 Assist privacy notice later in this section for important information.
Note: If 911 Assist is turned on or off by any user, that setting applies for all paired phones. If 911 Assist is turned off, a voice message plays and/or a display message/icon comes on when the vehicle is started after a previously paired phone connects.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
354
SYNC®
Note: Every phone operates differently. While SYNC 911 Assist works with most cellular phones, some may have trouble using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excludes knee airbags and rear inflatable safety belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel pump shut-off, your SYNC equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by dialing 911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. For more information about 911 Assist, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
· For information on airbag deployment, see the Supplementary Restraints System chapter.
· For information on the fuel pump shut-off, see the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
Setting 911 Assist On
Perform the following: 1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu. 2. Scroll until 911 Assist is selected. 3. Press OK to confirm and enter the 911 Assist menu. 4. Scroll to select between On and Off selections. 5. Press OK when the desired option appears in the radio display.
Set On or Set Off appears in the display as confirmation.
Off selections include: Off with reminder and Off without reminder. Off with reminder provides a display and voice reminder at phone connection at vehicle start. Off without reminder provides a display reminder only without a voice reminder at phone connection.
To make sure that 911 Assist works properly:
· SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the incident and throughout feature activation and use.
· SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident. · A Bluetooth-enabled and compatible phone has to be paired and
connected to SYNC.
· A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have the ability to make and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident.
· A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have adequate network coverage, battery power and signal strength.
· The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
SYNC®
355
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut-off (which would activate 911 Assist); however, if 911 Assist is triggered, SYNC tries to contact emergency services. If a connected phone is damaged or loses connection to SYNC, SYNC searches for, and tries to connect to, any available previously paired phone and tries to make the call to 911.
Before making the call: · SYNC provides a short window of time (about 10 seconds) to cancel
the call. Failure to cancel the call results in SYNC attempting to dial 911. · SYNC says the following, or a similar message: "SYNC will attempt to call 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on your screen or press and hold the phone button on your steering wheel."
If the call is not cancelled and a successful call is made, a pre-recorded message is played for the 911 operator, then the occupant(s) in the vehicle is able to talk with the operator. Be prepared to provide your name, phone number and location immediately, because not all 911 systems are capable of receiving this information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
· Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware was damaged in a crash. · The vehicle's battery or SYNC system has no power. · The phone(s) paired and connected to the system was thrown from
the vehicle.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
Once 911 Assist is set on, it may disclose to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators the vehicle location, and/or other details about the vehicle or crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not turn the feature on.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
356
SYNC®
Vehicle Health Report
WARNING: Always follow scheduled maintenance instructions, regularly inspect your vehicle, and seek repair for any damage or problem you suspect. Vehicle Health Report supplements, but cannot replace normal maintenance and vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health Report only monitors certain systems that are electronically monitored by the vehicle and will not monitor or report the status of any other system, (i.e., brake lining wear). Failure to perform scheduled maintenance and regularly inspect your vehicle may result in vehicle damage and serious injury.
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature requires activation prior to use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There is no fee or subscription associated with Vehicle Health Report, but you must register to use this feature.
Note: This feature may not function properly if you have enabled caller ID blocking on your mobile phone. Before running a report, review the Vehicle Health Report privacy notice.
Note: In order to allow a break-in period for your vehicle, you may not be able to create a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle odometer has reached 200 miles.
Register for Vehicle Health Report and set your report preferences at www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering, you can request a Vehicle Health Report (inside your vehicle). Return to your account at www.SYNCMyRide.com to view your report. You can also choose for SYNC to automatically remind you to run reports at specific mileage intervals. Cellular phone airtime usage may apply when reporting.
The system allows you to check your vehicle's overall health in the form of a diagnostic report card. The vehicle health report contains valuable information such as:
· Vehicle Diagnostic Information · Scheduled maintenance · Open Recalls and Field Service Actions · Unserviced items from vehicle inspections by your authorized dealer.
You can run a report (after the vehicle has been running a minimum of 60 seconds) by pressing the voice button and saying "Vehicle health report", or pressing the phone button.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
SYNC®
357
To run a report using the phone button: 1. Press the phone button to enter Phone Menu. 2. Scroll until Vehicle Health is selected and press OK. 3. Scroll to select from the following options:
Vehicle Health Report Options
User Preferences: Automatic Reports: Press OK and select on
Press OK to select or off. Select On to have SYNC automatically
and enter the menu. prompt you to run a health report at certain
Scroll to select from: mileage intervals. Note: You must first turn
this feature on before you can select the
mileage intervals at which you would like to
be prompted.
Mileage Intervals: Press OK. Scroll to select
between 5000, 7500 or 10000 mile intervals
and press OK to make your selection.
Return: Press OK to exit the menu.
Run Report?
Press OK for SYNC to run a health report of
your vehicle's diagnostic systems and send the
results to Ford where it is combined with
scheduled maintenance information, open
recalls and other field service actions and
unserviced vehicle inspection items from your
authorized dealer.
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you run a Vehicle Health Report, Ford Motor Company may collect your cellular phone number (to process your report request) and diagnostic information about your vehicle. Certain versions or updates to Vehicle Health Report may also collect additional vehicle information. Ford may use the vehicle information it collects for any purpose. If you do not want to disclose your cellular phone number or vehicle information, do not run the feature or set up your Vehicle Health Report profile at www.SYNCMyRide.com. See www.SYNCMyRide.com - Vehicle Health Report Terms and Conditions, and Privacy Statement - for more information.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
358
SYNC®
SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions & Information (TDI)
Note: SYNC Services requires activation prior to use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to register and check your eligibility for complimentary services. Standard phone and message rates may apply. Subscription may be required. You must also have the active SYNC Services Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone paired and connected to the system in order to connect to, and use, SYNC Services. See Using SYNC with your phone for pairing instructions.
Note: This feature does not function properly if you have enabled caller ID blocking on your mobile phone. Make sure your mobile phone is not blocking caller ID before using SYNC Services.
Note: The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle, and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations. Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of errors, changes in roads, traffic conditions or driving conditions.
Note: When you connect, the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle's current location, travel direction and speed to help provide you with the directions, traffic reports, or business searches you request. Further, to provide the services you request and for continuous improvement, the service may collect and record call details and voice communications. For more information, see SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not want Ford or its service providers to collect the vehicle travel information or other information identified in the Terms and Conditions, do not activate or use the service.
SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle sensors, integrated GPS technology and comprehensive map and traffic data, to give you personalized traffic reports, precise turn-by-turn directions, business search, news, sports, weather and more. For a complete list of services, or to learn more, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using Voice Commands
1. Press the voice button. 2. When prompted, say "Services". This initiates an outgoing call to
SYNC Services using your paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
SYNC®
359
3. Once you are connected to the service, follow the voice prompts to request the desired service, such as "Traffic" or "Directions". You can also say "What are my choices?" to receive a complete list of available services from which to choose.
4. Say "Services" to return to the services main menu or for help, say "Help".
Connecting to SYNC Services Using the Phone Menu
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu. 2. Scroll until Services appears in the display. 3. Press OK to confirm and enter the Services menu. The display
indicates the system is connecting. 4. Press OK. SYNC initiates the call to the Services portal. 5. Once connected, follow the voice prompts to request your desired
Service, such as Traffic or Directions. You can also say "What are my choices?" to receive a complete list of available services from which to choose. 6. To return to the Services menu, say "Services" or for help, say "Help".
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
1. When connected to SYNC Services, say "Directions" or "Business search". To find the closest business or type of business to your current location, just say "Business search" and then "Search near me". If you need further assistance in finding a location you can say "Operator" at any time within a Directions or Business search to speak with a live operator. You may also be prompted to speak with an operator when the automatic system has difficulty matching your voice request. The live operator can assist you by searching for businesses by name or by category, residential addresses by street address or by name or specific street intersections. Operator Assist is a feature of your SYNC Services subscription. For more information on Operator Assist visit www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.
2. Follow the voice prompts to select your destination. Once your destination is selected, your current vehicle location is uploaded and a route based on current traffic conditions is calculated and sent back to your vehicle. After the route download is complete, the phone call is automatically ended. You then receive audible and visual driving instructions as you travel toward your destination.
3. While on an active route, you can select or say "Route summary" or "Route status" to view the Route Summary turn list or the Route Status ETA. You can also turn voice guidance on or off, cancel the route or update the route.
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks if you want the route updated. Just say, "Yes" when prompted and a new route will be delivered to your vehicle.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
360
SYNC®
Disconnecting from SYNC Services
1. Press and hold the phone button on the steering wheel. 2. Say "Good-bye" from the SYNC Services main menu.
Personalizing Push to interrupt Portable
SYNC Services Quick Tips
You can personalize your Services feature to provide quicker access to your most used or favorite information. You can save address points such as work or home. You can also save favorite information like sports teams or a news category. To learn more, log onto www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Press the voice button at any time (while you are connected to SYNC TDI Services) to interrupt a voice prompt or an audio clip (such as a sports report), wait for the listening tone, and say your voice command.
Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone number, not your VIN (Vehicle Identification Number). You can pair and connect your phone to any vehicle equipped with Traffic, Directions and Information and continue enjoying your personalized services. You can even access your account outside the vehicle. Just use the number on your phone's call history. Traffic and Directions features do not function properly but information services and the 411 connect and text message features are available.
SYNC AppLinkTM
Note: Your smartphone must be paired and connected to SYNC to access AppLink.
Note: iPhone® users need to connect the phone to the USB port in order to start the application. It is recommended to lock your iPhone® after starting an application.
Note: The AppLink feature is not available if your vehicle is equipped with the MyFord Touch® or MyLincoln TouchTM system.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
SYNC®
361
Depending on your display type, you can access AppLink from the media menu, the phone menu, or by using voice commands. Once an app is running through AppLink, you can control main features of the app through voice commands and steering wheel controls.
To Access Using the Phone Menu
1. Press the phone button to access the SYNC phone menu on-screen. 2. Scroll to Mobile Apps and press OK to access a list of available
applications. 3. Scroll through the list of available applications and press OK to select
a particular app. 4. Once an app is running through SYNC, you can access an app's menu
by pressing the MENU button to first access the SYNC menu. 5. Select "SYNC-Media" by pressing OK. 6. Scroll until "<App name> Menu" is displayed (i.e., Pandora Menu),
then press OK. From here, you can access an application's features, such as Thumbs up, Thumbs down, etc. For more information, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
To Access Using the Media Menu
1. Press AUX button on the center console. 2. Press MENU to access the SYNC menu. 3. Select "SYNC-Media" by pressing OK. 4. Then scroll to Mobile Apps and press OK to access a list of available
applications. 5. Scroll through the list of available applications and press OK to select
a particular app. 6. Once an app is running through SYNC, you can access an app's menu
by pressing the MENU button to first access the SYNC menu. 7. Select "SYNC-Media" by pressing OK. 8. Scroll until "<App name> Menu" is displayed (i.e., Pandora Menu),
then press OK. From here, you can access an application's features, such as Thumbs up, Thumbs down, etc. For more information, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
To Access Using Voice Commands
1. Press the voice icon. 2. When prompted, say "Mobile Apps". 3. Say the name of the application after the tone. 4. The app should start. While an app is running through SYNC, you can
press the voice button and speak commands specific to the app, such as "Play Station Quickmix". Say "Help" to discover available voice commands.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
362
SYNC®
USING SYNC WITH YOUR MEDIA PLAYER
You can access and play music from your digital music player over the vehicle's speaker system using the system's media menu or voice commands. You can also sort and play your music by specific categories, such as artists, albums, etc.
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player including: iPod®, ZuneTM, Plays from device players, and most USB drives. SYNC also supports audio formats such as MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC.
Connecting Your Digital Media Player via the USB Port
Note: If your digital media player has a power switch, ensure that the device is turned on.
To connect using voice commands: 1. Plug the device into the vehicle's USB port. 2. Press the voice icon and when prompted, say "USB". 3. You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate voice
commands. See the media voice commands.
To connect using the system menu: 1. Plug the device into the vehicle's USB port. 2. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu. 3. Scroll until Select Source appears and press OK. 4. Scroll to select USB and press OK. 5. Depending on how many digital media files are on your connected
device, Indexing may appear in the radio display. When indexing is complete, the screen returns to the Play Menu. 6. Press OK and scroll through selections of: · Play All · Artists · Albums · Genres · Playlists · Tracks · Explore USB · Similar Music · Return
When the desired selection appears in the display, press OK to build your desired music selection.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
SYNC®
363
What's Playing?
At any time when a track is playing, you can press the voice icon and ask the system, "What's playing?". The system reads the metadata tags (if populated) of the playing track to you.
Media Voice Commands
Press the voice icon and, when prompted, say "USB" then any of the following:
"USB"
"Autoplay off"
"Autoplay on"
"(Phone) (Media) (Bluetooth) Connections"
"Pause"
"Play" "Play album <name>"1,3
"Play all" "Play artist <name>"1,3 "Play genre <name>"1,3
"Play next folder"2
"Play next track" "Play playlist <name>"1,3
"Play previous folder"2
"Play previous track" "Play song <name>"1 "Play track <name>"1,3 "Refine album <name>"1,3 "Refine artist <name>"1,3 "Refine song <name>"1 "Refine track <name>"1,3
"Repeat off"
"Repeat on" "Search album <name>"1,3 "Search artist <name>"1,3 "Search genre <name>"1,3
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
364
SYNC®
"USB" "Search song <name>"1 "Search track <name>"1,3
"Shuffle off" "Shuffle on" "Similar music" "What's playing?"
1"<name>" is a dynamic listing, meaning that it could be the name of any desired group, artist, etc. 2Voice commands which are only available in folder mode. 3Voice commands which are not available until indexing is complete.
Voice Command Guide
"Autoplay"
Turn on to listen to music which has already
been randomly indexed during the indexing
process.
Turn off and the system does not begin to
play any of your music until all media has all
been indexed. Indexing times can vary from
device to device and also with regard to the
number of songs being indexed.
"Search/Play Genre" The system searches all the data from your
indexed music and, if available, begins to play
the chosen type of music. You can only play
genres of music which are present in the
GENRE metadata tags that you have on your
digital media player.
"Similar Music"
The system compiles a playlist and then plays
similar music to what is currently playing
from the USB port using indexed metadata
information.
"Search/Play
The system searches for a specific
Artist/Track/Album" artist/track/album from the music indexed
through the USB port.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
SYNC®
365
"Refine"
Voice Command Guide This allows you to make your previous command more specific. For example, if you asked to search and play all music by a certain artist, you could then say "refine album" and choose a specific album from the list to view. If you then select Play, the system only plays music from that specific album.
Press the voice icon and when prompted say "Bluetooth Audio" and then any of the following:
"BLUETOOTH AUDIO" "(Phone) (Media) (Bluetooth) Connections"
"Pause" "Play" "Play next track " "Play previous track "
Media Menu Features
The media menu allows you to select your media source, how to play your music (by artist, genre, shuffle, repeat, etc.), and also to add, connect or delete devices. 1. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu. 2. Scroll to cycle through:
When you select: Play Menu
You can: Play your music by artist, album, genre, playlists, tracks, similar music or to simply, play all. You can also choose to Explore USB to view the supported digital music files on your playing device. See Play Menu later in this section for more information.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
366
SYNC®
When you select: Select Source
You can:
SYNC USB: Press OK to access music plugged into your USB port. You can also plug in devices to charge them (if supported by your device). Once connected, the system indexes any readable media files. (The time required to complete this depends on the size of the media content being indexed.) If Autoplay is on, you can access media files randomly as they are indexed. If turned off, indexed media is not available until the indexing process is complete. SYNC is capable of indexing thousands of average size media and notifies you if the maximum indexing file size is reached.
Bluetooth Audio: This is a phone-dependent feature which allows you to stream music playing on your Bluetooth-enabled phone. If supported by your device, you can press SEEK to play the previous or next track.
SYNC Line In: Press OK to select and play music from your portable music player over the vehicle's speakers. Note: If you have already connected a device to the USB port, you cannot access the line in feature. Some digital media players require both USB and line in ports to stream data and music separately.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
SYNC®
367
When you select: Media Settings
Mobile Apps System Settings Exit Media Menu
You can:
Choose to shuffle or repeat your music and select your Autoplay settings. Once these selections are turned on, they remain on until turned off. Press SEEK to play the previous or next track. Note: Some digital media players require both USB and line in ports to stream data and music separately. Press OK to select and then scroll to choose from:
Shuffle: Press OK to shuffle available media files in the current playlist. Note: To shuffle all media tracks, you must select Play All in the Play Menu and then select Shuffle.
Repeat: Press OK to repeat any song.
Autoplay: Press OK to listen to music which has already been randomly indexed during the indexing process.
Interact with SYNC®-capable mobile applications on your smart phone. See SYNC® AppLinkTM earlier in this chapter for more information.
Access Bluetooth Device menu listings (add, connect, set as primary, on/off, delete) as well as Advanced menu listings (prompts, languages, defaults, master reset, install application and system information). Note: See System Settings for more information.
Press OK to exit the media menu.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
368
SYNC®
Accessing Your Play Menu
This menu allows you to select and play your media by artist, album, genre, playlist, track, similar music or even to explore what is on your USB device. 1. Make sure that your device is plugged into the USB port and is
turned on. 2. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu. 3. Scroll to select the Play Menu and press OK.
If there are no media files to access, the display indicates there is no media. If there are media files, you have the following options to scroll through and select from:
When you select: Play All Artists
Albums
You can:
Play all indexed media (tracks) from your playing device in flat file mode, one at a time in numerical order. Press OK to select. The first track title appears in the display.
Sort all indexed media by artist. Once selected, the system lists and then play all artists and tracks alphabetically. If there are less than 255 indexed artist, they are listed alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more, they are categorized in alphabetical categories. 1. Press OK to select. You can select to play All Artists or any indexed artist. 2. Scroll until the desired artist is chosen and press OK.
Sort all indexed media by albums. If there are less than 255 indexed albums, they are listed alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more, they are organized into alphabetical categories. 1. Press OK to enter the album menu and select from playing all albums or from any individual indexed album. 2. Scroll until the desired album is chosen and press OK.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
SYNC®
369
When you select: Genres
Playlists
Tracks
Explore USB
You can:
Sort indexed music by genre (category) type. SYNC lists the genres alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than 255, SYNC automatically organizes them into alphabetical categories. Press OK to select and then scroll to select the desired genre and press OK.
Access your playlists (from formats such as ASX, .M3U, .WPL, .MTP.). The system lists your playlists alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than 255, they are organized into alphabetical categories. Press OK to select. Then scroll to select the desired playlist and press OK.
Search for and play a specific track which has been indexed. SYNC lists your tracks alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than 255, SYNC automatically organizes them into alphabetical categories. Press OK to select. Then scroll to select the desired track and press OK.
Explore all supported digital media on your media device connected to the USB port. You can only view media content which is compatible with SYNC; other files saved are not visible. Press OK to select. Then scroll to explore indexed media on your flash drive.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
370
SYNC®
When you select: Similar Music
Return
You can:
Play music similar to what is currently playing from the USB port. The system uses the metadata information of each song to compile a playlist for you. Press OK to select. The system creates a new list of similar songs and begins playing. The metadata tags must be populated for this feature to include each track. Note: With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags are not populated, the tracks won't be available in voice recognition, play menu or similar music. However, if you place these tracks onto your playing device in "Mass Storage Device Mode", they are available in voice recognition, play menu browsing and similar music. Unknowns are placed into any unpopulated metadata tag.
Exit the current menu.
System Settings
System settings provide access to your Bluetooth Devices and Advanced menu features.
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you to add, connect and delete a device as turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
Your Advanced menu allows you to access and set prompts, languages, defaults and perform a master reset.
Bluetooth Devices Menu Options
This menu allows you to add, connect and delete devices as well as turn Bluetooth on and off. 1. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu. 2. Scroll until System Settings appears and select OK. 3. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
SYNC®
371
4. Press OK and then scroll to select from:
When you select:
You can:
Add Bluetooth Device*
Allows you to pair additional devices to the system. 1. Press OK to select and press OK again
when Find SYNC appears in the display.
2. Follow the directions in your phone's user
guide to put your phone into discovery mode.
A six-digit PIN appears in the display.
3. When prompted on your phone's six-digit
display, enter the PIN.
Connect Bluetooth Connect a previously paired
Device
Bluetooth-enabled phone. 1. Press OK to select and view a list of
devices.
2. Scroll until the desired device is chosen
and press OK to connect the device.
Set Bluetooth On/Off Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off. Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and
Off. When the desired selection is chosen,
press OK. Turning Bluetooth off disconnects
all Bluetooth devices and deactivates
Bluetooth features.
Delete Device
Delete a paired media device. Press OK and scroll to select the device.
Press OK to confirm.
Delete All Devices Delete all previously paired devices.
Press OK to select.
Return
Exit the current menu.
*This is a speed-dependent feature
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
372
SYNC®
Advanced Menu Options
This menu allows you to access settings such as prompts, language, performing a master reset as well as returning to factory defaults. 1. Press AUX and then MENU to access the Media Menu. 2. Scroll until System Settings appears and select OK. 3. Scroll until Advanced appears. 4. Press OK and then scroll to select from the following:
When you select: Prompts Languages
Factory Defaults
You can: Have SYNC guide you via questions, helpful hints or ask you for a specific action. 1. Press OK to select and scroll to select between on or off. 2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the display. SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu.
Choose from English, Francais and Espanol. The displays and prompts are in the selected language. 1. Press OK to select and then scroll through the languages. 2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the display. 3. If you change the language setting, the display indicates that the system is updating. When complete, SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu.
Return to the factory default settings. This selection does not erase your indexed information (phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices). 1. Press OK to select and then press OK again when Restore Defaults? appears in the display. 2. Press OK to confirm.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
SYNC®
373
When you select: Master Reset
Application
Return
You can: Completely erase all information stored on SYNC (all phonebook, call history, text messages and all paired devices) and return to the factory default settings. Download new software applications (if available) and then load the desired applications through your USB port. See the web site for more information. Exit the current menu.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However, should questions arise, see the tables below.
Use the website at any time to check your phone's compatibility, register your account and set preferences as well as access a customer representative via an online chat (during certain hours). Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca for more information.
Issue
Excessive background noise during a phone call.
During a call, I can hear the other person but they cannot hear me.
Phone Issues
Possible
Possible Solution(s)
Cause(s)
The audio control Review your phone's user guide
settings on your regarding audio adjustments.
phone may be
affecting SYNC
performance.
Possible phone Try turning off the device,
malfunction.
resetting the device, removing
the device's battery, then trying
again.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
374
SYNC®
Phone Issues
Issue
Possible
Possible Solution(s)
Cause(s)
SYNC is not able · This is a
· Go to the website to review
to download my phonebook.
phone-dependent your phone's compatibility.
feature, OR
· Try turning off the device,
· Possible phone resetting the device or removing
malfunction.
the device's battery, then trying
again. · Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using the
Add Contacts feature. · Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the website.
The system says Limitations on · Try pushing your phonebook
Phonebook
your phone's
contacts to SYNC by using the
Downloaded but capability. my phonebook in
Add Contacts feature. · If the missing contacts are
SYNC is empty or
stored on your SIM card, try
is missing
moving them to the device
contacts.
memory. · Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associated
with the missing contact.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
SYNC®
375
Phone Issues
Issue
Possible
Possible Solution(s)
Cause(s)
I am having
· This is a
· Go to the website to review
trouble connecting my phone to SYNC.
phone-dependent your phone's compatibility.
feature, OR
· Try turning off the device,
· Possible phone resetting the device or removing
malfunction.
the device's battery, then trying
again. · Try deleting your device from
SYNC, deleting SYNC from your
device and trying again. · Check the security and auto
accept/prompt always settings
relative to the SYNC Bluetooth
connection on your phone. · Update your device's software
firmware. · Turn off the Auto phonebook
download setting.
Text messaging is · This is a
· Go to the website to review
not working on SYNC.
phone-dependent your phone's compatibility.
feature, OR
· Try turning off the device,
· Possible phone resetting the device or removing
malfunction.
the device's battery, then trying
again.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
376
SYNC®
USB/Media Issues
Issue
Possible Cause(s)
Possible Solution(s)
I am having
Possible device
trouble connecting malfunction.
my device.
· Try turning off the device, resetting the device or removing
the device's battery, then trying
again. · Make sure you are using the manufacturer's cable. · Make sure the USB cable is properly inserted into the device
and the vehicle's USB port. · Make sure that the device does not have an auto-install program
or active security settings.
SYNC does not This is a device
recognize my
limitation.
device when I turn
on the car.
Make sure you are not leaving the device in your vehicle during very hot or cold temperatures.
Bluetooth audio does not stream.
· This is a phone-dependent
feature, OR · The device is not connected.
Make sure the device is connected to SYNC and that you have pressed play on your device.
SYNC does not recognize music that is on my device.
· Your music files may not contain the proper artist, song title, album or genre information, OR · The file may be corrupted, OR · The song may have copyright protection which does not allow it to play.
· Make sure that all song details are populated. · Some devices require you to change the USB settings from
mass storage to MTP class.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
SYNC®
377
Vehicle Health Report/Services (Traffic, Directions and Information) Issues
Issue
I received a text that the Vehicle Health Report is not activated.
Possible Cause(s)
· Your account may not be activated on the website, OR · You may have the wrong VIN (vehicle identification number) listed.
Possible Solution(s)
· This is a free feature, but you must first register online to use it. · Make sure that your VIN is correctly listed in your account.
I am unable to retrieve the report on the website, or I receive a system error.
The preferred dealer information did not load correctly.
I am unable to
· This could be
submit a report. due to your
phone's
compatibility, OR
· Bad signal
strength, OR
· Your phone may
not be activated
on the website.
I heard a
· The phone in
commercial when I use is not
tried to use
activated, OR
Traffic, Directions · Your phone has
and Information. ID blocker active.
When you register your account, you must list a preferred dealer. If one is already listed, try selecting another dealer and logging out. Log back in and change it back to your preferred dealer and retrieve the report. · Update your mobile number in your account on the website. · Make sure you have full signal strength and that your Bluetooth volume level has been turned up. · Try deleting your phone and performing a clean pairing.
· This is a free feature, but you must first register online to use it. · Turn off ID blocker on your phone as the system recognizes you by your phone number. · Make sure the currently connected phone is the same one that is registered on your SyncMyRide account.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
378
SYNC®
Voice Command Issues
Issue
Possible
Possible Solution(s)
Cause(s)
SYNC does not · You may be
· Review the Phone voice
understand what using the wrong commands and the Media voice
I am saying.
voice commands, commands at the beginning of
OR · You may be
their respective sections. · Be aware that SYNC's
speaking too soon microphone is either in your
or at the wrong rear view mirror or in the
time.
headliner just above the
windshield.
SYNC does not · You may be
· Review the media voice
understand the using the wrong commands at the beginning of
name of a song or voice commands, the media section.
artist.
OR
· Say the song or artist exactly
· You may not be as listed. If you say, "Play Artist
saying the name Prince", the system does not
exactly as it is play music by Prince and the
saved, OR · The system may not be
Revolution or Prince and the
New Power Generation. · Make sure you are saying the
reading the name complete title, such as
the same way you "California remix featuring
are saying it.
Jennifer Nettles". · If the songs are saved in all
CAPS, you have to spell them.
LOLA requires you to say, "Play
L-O-L-A". · Do not use special characters
in the title as the system does
not recognize them.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
SYNC®
379
Issue
SYNC does not understand or is calling the wrong contact when I want to make a call.
Voice Command Issues
Possible
Possible Solution(s)
Cause(s)
· You may be
· Review the phone voice
using the wrong commands at the beginning of
voice commands, the phone section.
OR
· Make sure you are saying the
· You may not be contacts exactly as listed. For
saying the name example, if a contact is saved as
exactly as it is Joe Wilson, say "Call Joe
saved, OR · Contacts in
Wilson". · The system works better if
your phonebook you list full names, such as "Joe
may be very short Wilson" rather than "Joe". and similar, or · Do not use special characters
they may contain such as 123 or ICE, as the
special
characters, OR · Your
system does not recognize them. · If contacts are saved in CAPS, you have to spell them. JAKE
phonebook
requires you to say, "Call
contacts may be J-A-K-E".
saved in CAPS.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
380
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
INTRODUCTION
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
A
B
G
FED
C
A. Phone B. Navigation (or Information if your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation) C. Climate D. Settings E. Home F. Information
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
381
G. Entertainment
This system uses a four-corner strategy to provide quick access several vehicle features and settings. The touchscreen provides easy interaction with your cellular phone, multimedia, climate control and navigation system. The corners display any active modes within those menus, such as phone status or the climate temperature.
Note: Some features are not available while your vehicle is moving.
Note: Your system is equipped with a feature that allows you to access and control audio features for 30 minutes after you switch the ignition off (and no doors open).
PHONE
Press to select any of the following: · Making and Receiving Calls · Quick Dial · Phonebook · Call History · Text Messaging · Settings
NAVIGATION
Press to select any of the following: · My Home · Favorites · Previous Destinations · Point of Interest · Emergency · Street Address · Intersection · City Center · Map · Edit Route Cancel Route
CLIMATE
Press to select any of the following: · Driver Settings · Recirculated Air · Auto · Dual · Passenger Settings · A/C · Defrost
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
382
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
SETTINGS
Press to select any of the following: · Clock · Display · Sound · Vehicle · Settings · Help
HOME
Press to access your home screen. Depending on your vehicle's option package and software, your screens may vary in appearance from the descriptions in this section. Your features may also be limited depending on your market. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
INFORMATION
Press to select any of the following: · SYNC® Services · SIRIUS® Travel LinkTM · Alerts · Calendar · SYNC Apps If the icon is yellow, see Alerts in the Information section of this chapter.
ENTERTAINMENT
Press to select any of the following: · AM · FM · SIRIUS · CD · USB · BT Stereo · SD Card · A/V In
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
383
Using the Touch-sensitive Controls on Your System
To turn a feature on and off, just touch the graphic with your finger. To get the best performance from the touch-sensitive controls: · Do not press hard on the controls. They are sensitive to light touch. · Use your bare finger to touch the center of a touch-control graphic.
Touching off-center of the graphic may affect operation of a nearby control. · Make sure your hands are clean and dry. · Keep metal and other conductive material away from the surface of the touchscreen as this may cause electronic interference (for example, inadvertently turning on a feature other than the one you meant to turn on).
Depending on your vehicle and option package, you may also have these controls on your bezel: · Power: Switch the media or climate features off and on. · VOL: Control the volume of playing media. · Fan: Control the speed of the climate system fan. · Seek and Tune buttons: Use as you normally would in media modes. · Eject: Eject a CD from the entertainment system. · SOURCE: Touch the word repeatedly to see all available media
modes. The screen does not change, but you see the media change in the lower left status bar. · SOUND: Touch the word to access the Sound menu where you can adjust settings such as: Bass, Treble, Midrange, Balance and Fade, THX Deep Note Demo, DSP (Digital Signal Processing), Occupancy Mode and Speed Compensated Volume. (Your vehicle may not have all of these sound options.) · Hazard flasher: Switch the hazard flashers off and on.
Cleaning the Touchscreen Display
Use a clean, soft cloth such as one used for cleaning glasses. If dirt or fingerprints are still visible, apply a small amount of alcohol to the cloth. Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the display. Do not use detergent or any type of solvent to clean the display.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
384
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Support The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you cannot answer on your own. Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST In the United States, call: 18882701055 In Canada, call: 18005653673 Times are subject to change due to holidays.
Safety Information
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
When using SYNC:
· Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are broken, split or damaged. Place cords and cables out of the way, so they do not interfere with the operation of pedals, seats, compartments or safe driving abilities.
· Do not leave playing devices in your vehicle during extreme conditions as it could cause them damage. See your device's manual for further information.
· Do not attempt to service or repair the system. See your authorized dealer.
For your safety, some SYNC functions are speed-dependent. Their use is limited to when your vehicle is traveling at speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h).
Make sure that you review your device's manual before using it with SYNC.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
385
Speed-restricted Features
Some features of this system may be too difficult to use while your vehicle is moving so they are restricted from use unless your vehicle is stationary.
· Screens that are too crowded with information, such as Point of Interest reviews and ratings, SIRIUS® Travel LinkTM sports scores, movie times and ski conditions.
· Any action that requires you to use a keyboard is restricted, such as entering a navigation destination or editing information.
· All lists are limited so the user can view fewer entries (such as phone contacts or recent phone call entries).
See the following chart for more specific examples:
Cellular Phone
System Functionality
Wi-Fi and Wireless Videos, Photos and Graphics Text Messages Navigation
Restricted Features Pairing a Bluetooth phone Adding phonebook contacts or uploading phonebook contacts (from a USB) List entries are limited for phone contacts and recent phone call entries Editing the keypad code Enabling Valet Mode Editing settings while the rear view camera or Active Park Assist are active Editing wireless settings Editing the list of wireless networks Playing video Editing the screen's wallpaper or adding new wallpaper Composing text messages Viewing received text messages Editing preset text messages Using the keyboard to enter a destination Demo navigation route Adding or Editing Address Book entries or Avoid Areas
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
386
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected to SYNC, the system creates a profile within your vehicle that is linked to that cellular phone. This profile is created in order to offer you more cellular features and to operate more efficiently. Among other things, this profile may contain data about your cellular phone book, text messages (read and unread), and call history, including history of calls when your cell phone was not connected to the system. In addition, if you connect a media device, the system creates and retains an index of supported media content. The system also records a short development log of approximately 10 minutes of all recent system activity. The log profile and other system data may be used to improve the system and help diagnose any problems that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index, and development log remain in the vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in the vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected. If you no longer plan to use the system or the vehicle, we recommend you perform a Master Reset to erase all stored information.
System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to the vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access the system data for any purpose other than as described absent consent, a court order, or where required by law enforcement, other government authorities, or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. For further privacy information, see the sections on 911 Assist®, Vehicle Health Report, and Traffic, Directions and Information.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many features using voice commands. This allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in front of you. The system provides feedback through audible tones, prompts, questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen level of interaction (voice settings).
The system also asks short questions (confirmation prompts) when it is not sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses to your request.
When using voice commands, words and icons may appear in the lower left status bar indicating the status of the voice session (such as Listening, Success, Failed, Paused or Try Again).
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
387
How to Use Voice Commands with Your System
Press the voice icon. After the tone, speak your command clearly.
These commands can be said at any time. "Cancel" "Exit" "Go back"
"List of commands" "Main menu" "Next page"
"Previous page" "What can I say?"
"Help"
What Can I Say?
To access the available voice commands for the current session, do one of the following: · During a voice session, press the Help icon (?) in the lower left status
bar of the screen. · Say, "What can I say?" for an on-screen listing of the possible voice
commands associated with your current voice session. · Press the voice icon. After the tone, say, "Help" to hear a list of
possible voice commands.
Helpful Hints · Make sure the interior of your vehicle is as quiet as possible. Wind
noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system from correctly recognizing spoken commands. · After pressing the voice icon, wait until after the tone sounds and Listening appears before saying a command. Any command spoken prior to this does not register with the system. · Speak naturally, without long pauses between words. · At any time, you can interrupt the system while it is speaking by pressing the voice icon.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
388
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Accessing a List of Available Commands · If you use the touchscreen, press the Settings icon > Help > Voice
Command List. · If you use the steering wheel control, press the voice icon. After the
tone, speak your command clearly.
Voice command list "Audio list of commands" "Bluetooth audio list of commands" "Browse list of commands"
"CD list of commands" "Climate control list of commands"
"List of commands" "Navigation list of commands"*
"Phone list of commands" "Radio list of commands" "SD card list of commands" "Sirius satellite list of commands"** "Travel link list of commands"* "USB list of commands" "Voice instructions list of commands" "Voice settings list of commands"
"Help"
*These commands are only available when your vehicle is equipped with the navigation system, and the navigation system SD card is in the card slot. *This command is only available when you have an active SIRIUS satellite radio subscription.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
389
Voice Settings
Voice settings allow you to customize the level of system interaction, help and feedback. The system defaults to standard interaction that uses candidate lists and confirmation prompts as these provide the highest level of guidance and feedback.
Interaction Mode: Novice mode provides detailed interaction and guidance while the advanced mode has less audible interaction and more tone prompts.
Confirmation Prompts: The system uses these short questions to confirm your voice request. If turned off, the system simply makes a best guess as to what you requested. The system may still occasionally ask you to confirm settings.
Phone/Media Candidate Lists: Candidate lists are lists of possible results from your voice commands. The system creates these lists when it has the same confidence level of several options based on your voice command.
To access these settings using the touchscreen: 1. Press the Settings icon > Settings > Voice Control. 2. Select from:
· Interaction Mode · Confirmation Prompts · Media Candidate Lists · Phone Candidate Lists · Voice Control Volume.
To access these settings using voice commands:
Press the voice icon. Wait for the prompt "Please say a command". Another tone sounds to let you know the system is listening.
Voice settings using voice commands "Interaction Mode Novice"
"Interaction Mode Advanced" "Confirmation Prompts On" "Confirmation Prompts Off" "Phone Candidate Lists On" "Phone Candidate Lists Off" "Media Candidate Lists On" "Media Candidate Lists Off"
"Help"
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
390
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Using Voice Commands with the Touchscreen Options
Your voice system has a dual mode feature which allows you to switch between using voice commands and making on-screen selections. This is most often available when using navigation.
Buttons outlined in blue indicate selections that are part of the dual mode feature. For example, if while you are in a voice session rather than saying the command "Enter Street Name" to change the field, you can press Street and the voice session does not end. Instead, the voice system changes to the Street field and asks you to say the street name. You cannot use the buttons not outlined in blue as voice commands. If they are touched during a voice session, the voice session ends.
For example, you can choose from the following on the Navigation home screen: · My Home · Favorites · Previous Destinations · Point of Interest (POI) · Emergency · Street Address · Intersection · Cancel Route.
Some of the voice commands that are available while viewing this screen are:
"DESTINATION"
"Destination my home"
"Destination street address"
"Destination favorites"
"Destination previous destinations"
"Destination POI"
"Destination intersection"
"Destination emergency"
If you choose Street Address from the navigation screen, you can choose from the following: · Number · City · Street Name · State/Prov.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
391
Some of the voice commands that are available while viewing this screen are:
"STREET ADDRESS" "Enter house number" "Change house number"
"Enter street name" "Change street name"
"Enter city" "Change city" "Enter state" "Change state"
If you choose Points of Interest from the navigation screen, you can choose from the following: · Search Area · Search By Name · Fuel Station · ATM · All Restaurants · Accommodations · Parking. Some of the voice commands that are available while viewing this screen are:
"POINTS OF INTEREST" or "POI" "Destination <POI category name>" "Search by name" "Search by category" "Change search area"
Note: These are just a sample of the voice commands available within the Points of Interest section; the categories themselves are also technically voice commands.
If you choose Intersection from the navigation screen, you can choose from the following: · 1st Street · 2nd Street · City · State/Prov.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
392
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Some of the voice commands that are available while viewing this screen are:
"INTERSECTION" "Enter first street name" "Change first street name" "Enter second street name" "Change second street name"
"Enter city" "Change city" "Enter state" "Change state"
The dual mode feature is also available when the voice system displays a list of items to pick from during a voice session, where you would be able to touch the line item or say "Line 2". If the system does not understand a voice command, or there are multiple options, the system displays a voice command list for you.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
393
ENTERTAINMENT
A
B G
C
D
E
F
H
A. AM 1, AM 2 and AM AST B. FM 1, FM 2 and FM AST C. SIRIUS D. CD E. USB F. Touch this button to scroll down for more options, such as: · SD Card · BT Stereo · A/V In G. These buttons change with the media mode you are in. H. Radio memory presets and CD controls. Note: Some features may not be available in your area. Contact an authorized dealer for more information. You can access these options using the touchscreen or voice commands.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
394
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Browsing Device Content
When listening to any type of audio, you can browse through other devices without having to change sources. For example, if you are currently listening to the radio, you can browse all the artists that are stored on your USB device.
Press the voice icon on the steering wheel. When prompted, you can say:
"BROWSE" within Devices "Browse"*
"Browse <league> games" "Browse <Sirius category> channels"
"Browse CD track list" "Browse Sirius channel guide"
"Browse SD card" "Browse USB" "Help"
*If you have said "Browse", you can then say any commands in the following chart.
"BROWSE" "<League> games" "<Sirius category> channels"
"CD track list" "SD card"
"Sirius channel guide" "USB" "Help"
For a complete list of "Browse" voice commands, see USB and SD card voice commands and Bluetooth audio voice commands in the following sections.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
395
Your voice system allows you to change audio sources with a simple voice command. For example, if you are listening to music on a USB device, then want to switch to a satellite radio channel, simply press the voice button on the steering wheel controls and say the name of the SIRIUS station (such as, "the Highway"). The following voice commands are available at the top level of the voice session no matter which current audio source you are listening to (such as a USB device or SIRIUS satellite radio). Note: This is only available when your MyFord Touch® system language is set to North American English.
"AM <530 - 1710>"
"FM <87.7 107.9>"
"<530 - 1710>" "<0-233>"*
"Play [genre] <name>"** "Play [artist] <name>"** "Play [album] <name>"**
"<87.7 107.9>" "<Channel name>"* "Play [playlist] <name>"** "Play [song] <name>"**
"Play <name (song or album)> by
"Play <name>"
<artist name>" "Sports games"*
*This command is only usable if you have an active subscription to SIRIUS® satellite radio.
**The commands that have [ ] around the word means that the word is optional. For example, if you say, "Play Metallica", this is the same as the voice command, "Play [artist] <name>".
AM and FM
Touch the AM or FM tab to listen to the radio.
To change between AM and FM presets, just touch the AM or FM tab.
Memory Presets
Save a station by pressing and holding one of the memory preset areas. There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound returns when finished.
HD Radio
Touch this button to turn HD Radio on. The light on the button illuminates when the feature is on. HD Radio allows you to receive radio broadcasts digitally, where available, providing free, crystal-clear sound. See HD Radio information later in this chapter.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
396
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Scan
Touch this button to go to the next strong AM or FM radio station. The light on the button illuminates when the feature is on.
Options
Sound Settings allows you to adjust settings for: · Bass · Midrange · Treble · Balance and Fade · DSP (Digital Signal Processing) · Occupancy Mode · Speed Compensated Volume.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings.
Set PTY for Seek/Scan allows you to select a category of music you would like to search for. You can then choose to either seek or scan for the stations playing that category.
RDS Text Display allows you to view the information broadcast by FM stations.
AST allows you to have the system automatically store the six strongest stations in your current location.
TAG Button is available when HD Radio is on, and allows you to tag a song to download later. When you select On, TAG appears on-screen when HD Radio is active. You can touch TAG to save the information of the song that is playing. When you plug in your portable music player, the information transfers, if supported by your device. When you are connected to iTunes®, the tags appear to remind you of the songs you would like to download. See HD Radio information later in this chapter.
Direct Tune
Touch this button to enter the desired station number when prompted. Touch Enter when you are done.
Radio Voice Commands
If you are listening to the radio, press the voice button on the steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to the radio, press the voice button and, after the tone, say "Radio", then any of the commands in the following chart.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
397
"RADIO"
"<87.9107.9>" "<87.9107.9> HD"1
"FM autoset preset <#>" "FM preset <#>"
"<5301710>"
"FM1"
"AM"
"FM 1 preset <#>"
"AM <5301710>"
"FM2"
"AM autoset" "AM autoset preset <#>"
"FM 2 preset <#>" "HD <#>" 1
"AM preset <#>" "Browse"2
"Preset <#>" "Radio off"
"FM"
"Radio on"
"FM <87.9107.9>" "FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>"1
"Set PTY" "Tune"3
"FM autoset"
"Help"
1If available.
2If you have said, "Browse", see Browsing device content earlier in this section.
3If you have said, "Tune", see the following "Tune" chart.
"TUNE"
"<87.9107.9>" "<87.9-107.9> HD <#>"*
"FM autoset" "FM autoset preset <#>"
"<5301710>"
"FM preset <#>"
"AM"
"FM1"
"AM <5301710>"
"FM 1 preset <#>"
"AM autoset"
"FM2"
"AM autoset preset <#>" "AM preset <#>"
"FM 2 preset <#>" "HD <#>"*
"FM"
"Preset <#>"
"FM <87.9107.9>" "FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>"*
"Help"
*If available.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
398
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
HD RadioTM Information (If Available)
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your system has a special receiver that allows it to receive digital broadcasts (where available) in addition to the analog broadcasts, it already receives. Digital broadcasts provide a better sound quality than analog broadcasts with free, crystal-clear audio and no static or distortion. For more information, and a guide to available stations and programming, please visit www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a station broadcasting HD Radio technology, you may notice the following indicators on your screen:
HD) logo blinks when acquiring a digital station and stays solid when digital audio is playing. When this logo is available, you may also see Title and Artist fields on-screen.
Multicast indicator appears in FM mode (only) if the current station is broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted numbers signify available digital channels where new or different content is available. HD1 signifies the main programming status and is available in analog and digital broadcasts. Other multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are only available digitally.
TAG allows you to save a song to download later when you are on an acquired HD Radio station and the feature is on. To turn the feature on and use it: 1. Press AM or FM > Options > TAG button > On. 2. When you hear a song you like, touch TAG. 3. The system automatically saves the song's information and transfers
it to your portable music player (if supported) when you connect it to the system. The system automatically transfers the tag to your player (if already connected) and a pop-up confirms the transfer. 4. When you access iTunes® with your portable music player, the tags appear to you as a reminder. The system allows you to tag up to approximately 100 songs. For a list of devices that support tagging, see www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions: · Scan allows you to hear a brief sampling of all available stations. This
feature still works when HD Radio reception is on, although it does not scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may see the HD logo appear if the station has a digital broadcast.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
399
· Memory presets allow you to save an active channel as a memory preset. Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound returns
when finished. When switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory preset, the
sound mutes before the digital audio plays, because the system has to
reacquire the digital signal. · Note: As with any saved radio station, you cannot access the
saved station if your vehicle is outside the station's reception area.
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Reception area Station blending
Potential Reception Issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2 through HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again.
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.
In order to provide the best possible experience, use the contact form to report any station issues found while listening to a station broadcasting with HD Radio technology. Independent entities own and operate each station. These stations are responsible for making sure all audio streams and data fields are accurate.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
400
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Potential Station Issues
Issue
Cause
Action
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat in audio. Increase or decrease in audio volume.
This is poor time alignment by the radio broadcaster.
No action required. This is a broadcast issue.
Sound fading or blending in and out.
The radio is shifting between analog and digital audio.
No action required. The reception issue may clear up as you continue to drive.
There is an audio mute delay when selecting HD2 or HD3, multicast preset or Direct Tune.
The digital multicast is not available until the HD Radio broadcast is decoded. Once decoded, the audio is available.
No action required. This is normal behavior. Wait until the audio is available.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3 multicast channel when recalling a preset or from a direct tune.
The previously stored multicast preset or direct tune is not available in your current reception area.
No action required. The station is not available in your current location.
Text information does not match currently playing audio.
Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed below.*
There is no text information shown for currently selected frequency.
Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed below.*
HD2-HD7 stations not found when Scan is pressed.
Pressing Scan disables No action required.
HD2-HD7 channel
This is normal behavior.
search.
*http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences
HD RadioTM Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and foreign patents. HD RadioTM and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not responsible for the content sent using HD Radio technology. Content may be changed, added or deleted at any time at the station owner's discretion.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
401
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If Activated)
Press the lower left corner of the touchscreen, then select the SIRIUS tab.
Presets
Save a channel by pressing and holding one of the memory preset areas. There is a brief mute while the radio saves the channel. Sound returns when finished.
ALERT
Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system alerts you when it plays again on any channel.
Replay
Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approximately 45 minutes of audio as long as you have remained tuned to the current station. Changing stations erases the previous audio.
While in replay mode: · Press and release the seek buttons to hear the previous or next song. · Press and hold the seek buttons to reverse or fast forward in the
current track. · Press play or pause to play or pause the audio. · Press Replay to return to live audio if you have been using the
feature to replay audio.
Scan
Touch this button to hear a brief sampling of channels.
Options
Sound Settings allows you to adjust settings for: · Bass · Midrange · Treble · Balance and Fade · DSP (Digital Signal Processing) · Occupancy Mode · Speed Compensated Volume.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings.
Set Category for Seek/Scan allows you to select a category of music you would like to search for. You can then choose to either seek or scan for the stations playing that category.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
402
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Parental Lockout allows you to lock and unlock channels, change or reset your PIN or unlock all channels. To use this feature, you need your initial PIN, which is 1234.
Artist/Title/Team Alerts allows you to select Artists, Titles and Teams that you would like the system to alert you to when they are playing on other channels. Press Edit Alerts to delete or turn off alerts. You can also set all alerts to on or off. When an alert appears on the screen, you can choose to Tune to the channel, to Cancel the alert or to Disable Alerts. If you are listening to a sporting event, you can save your favorite teams so that the system can alert you when they are playing on a satellite radio channel. Note: SIRIUS does not support the Alert feature on all channels. Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for Alert feature variation.
Electronic Serial Number (ESN) is required when communicating with SIRIUS about your account.
Direct Tune
Touch this button to enter the satellite channel number when prompted. Touch Enter when you are done.
Browse Touch this button to view a list of all available stations. Scroll to see more categories. Touch the station you want to listen to. Touch Skip if you want to skip this channel. Touch Lock if you do not want anyone to listen to this channel. Touch Title or Artist to see song and artists on other stations.
Satellite Radio Voice Commands
If you are listening to SIRIUS satellite radio, press the voice button on the steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to SIRIUS satellite radio, press the voice button and, after the tone, say "Sirius", then any of the commands in the following chart.
"<0233>" "<Channel name>"
"Preset <#>" "SAT"
"SIRIUS"
"SAT 3" "SAT 3 preset <#>" "SAT preset <#>"
"Sirius off"
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
403
"SIRIUS"
"SAT 1" "SAT 1 preset <#>"
"SAT 2"
"Sirius on" "Sports game"*
"Tune"**
"SAT 2 preset <#>"
"Help"
*If you have said, "Sports game", see the following "Sports game" chart.
**If you have said, "Tune", see the following "Tune" chart.
"SPORTS GAME" "Tune to the <college name> game"
"Tune to the <team city> game" "Tune to the <team city> <team name> game"
"Tune to the <team name> game" "Help"
"TUNE" "<0233>" "<Channel name>" "Preset <#>"
"SAT" "SAT 1" "SAT 1 preset <#>" "SAT 2" "SAT 2 preset <#>" "SAT 3" "SAT 3 preset <#>" "Help"
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
404
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Information
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes.
SIRIUS satellite radio is a subscription-based satellite radio service that broadcasts a variety of music, sports, news, weather, traffic and entertainment programming. Your factory-installed SIRIUS satellite radio system includes hardware and a limited subscription term that begins on the date of sale or lease of your vehicle. See your authorized dealer for availability.
For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is required), the online media player and a list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels, and other features, please visit www.siriusxm.com in the United States, www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite radio electronic serial number (ESN): You need your ESN to activate, modify or track your satellite radio account. The ESN is on the System Information Screen (SR ESN: XXXXXXXXXXXX). To access your ESN, press the bottom left corner of the touchscreen, then SIRIUS > Options.
Potential Satellite Radio Reception Issues
Antenna
For optimal reception performance, keep the
obstructions
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and
keep luggage and other materials as far away
from the antenna as possible.
Terrain
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
405
Potential Satellite Radio Reception Issues
Station overload
When you pass a ground-based
broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and the audio
system may mute.
Satellite radio signal Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to
interference
indicate the interference and the audio
system may mute.
SIRIUS Troubleshooting Tips
Radio Display
Condition
Possible Action
Acquiring...
Radio requires more No action required.
than two seconds to This message should
produce audio for the disappear shortly.
selected channel.
Sat Fault/SIRIUS
There is an internal If this message does
system failure.
module or system
not clear shortly, or
failure present.
with an ignition key
cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See
your authorized dealer
for service.
Invalid Channel.
The channel is no
Tune to another
longer available.
channel or choose
another preset.
Unsubscribed Channel. Your subscription does Contact SIRIUS at
not include this
18885397474 to
channel.
subscribe to the
channel, or tune to
another channel.
No Signal.
The signal is lost from The signal is blocked.
the SIRIUS satellite or When you move into
SIRIUS tower to your an open area, the
vehicle antenna.
signal should return.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
406
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
SIRIUS Troubleshooting Tips
Radio Display
Condition
Possible Action
Updating.
Update of channel
No action required.
programming in
The process may take
progress.
up to three minutes.
Call SIRIUS
Your satellite service is Contact SIRIUS at
18885397474.
no longer available. 1-888-539-7474 to
resolve subscription
issues.
No Channels Available. All the channels in the Use the channel guide
selected channels are to turn off the Lock
either skipped or
or Skip function on
locked.
that station.
Subscription Updated. SIRIUS has updated No action required.
the channels available
for your vehicle.
CD
Press the lower left corner of the touchscreen, and then select the CD tab.
You can also advance and reverse the current track or current folder, if applicable.
Repeat Touch this button to repeat the currently playing track, all tracks on the disc or turn the feature off if already on.
Shuffle Touch this button to play the tracks or entire albums in random order, or turn the feature off if already on.
Scan Touch this button to hear a brief sampling of all available tracks.
More Info Touch this button to see disc information.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
407
Options
Sound Settings allows you to adjust settings for: · Bass · Midrange · Treble · Balance and Fade · DSP (Digital Signal Processing) · Occupancy Mode · Speed Compensated Volume. Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings.
Compression allows you to turn the compression feature on and off.
Browse Touch this button to look through all available CD tracks.
CD Voice Commands
If you are listening to a CD, press the voice button on the steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to a CD, press the voice button and, after the tone, say "CD", then any of the commands in the following chart.
"CD" "Pause" "Play" "Play next track" "Play previous track" "Play track <1512>" "Repeat" "Repeat folder"* *This applies to WMA or MP3 files only.
"Repeat off" "Repeat track"
"Shuffle" "Shuffle CD"* "Shuffle folder"* "Shuffle off"
"Help"
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
408
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
SD Card Slot and USB Port
SD Card Slot
Note: Your SD card slot is spring-loaded. To remove the SD card, press the card in and the system ejects it. Do not attempt to pull the card to remove it as this could cause damage.
Note: The navigation system also uses this card slot. See Navigation system later in this chapter for more information.
The slot is located either in the center console or behind a small access door in the instrument panel. To access and play music from your cardt, press the lower left corner of the touchscreen, and then select the SD Card tab.
SD logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
USB Port
The ports are located either in the center console or behind a small access door in the instrument panel. To access and play music from your device, press the lower left corner of the touchscreen, and then select the USB tab.
This feature allows you to plug in media playing devices, memory sticks, flash drives or thumb drives, and charge devices if they support this feature.
In order to playback video from your iPod® or iPhone®, if compatible, you must have a special combination USB/RCA composite video cable, which you can buy from Apple®. When the cable is connected to your iPod® or iPhone®, plug the other end into both the RCA jacks and the USB port.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
409
Playing Music from Your Device
Insert your device and select the SD Card or USB tab once the system recognizes it. You can then select from the following options:
Repeat replays the currently playing song or album.
Shuffle plays music on the selected album or folder in random order.
Similar Music allows you to choose music similar to what is currently playing.
More Info displays information such as current track, artist name, album and genre.
Options allows you to view and adjust various media settings. · Sound Settings allows you to adjust settings for:
· Bass · Midrange · Treble · Balance and Fade · DSP (Digital Signal Processing) · Occupancy Mode · Speed Compensated Volume.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings. · Media Player Settings allows you to select more settings, which is
under Media Player. See Settings. · Device Information displays software and firmware information
about the currently connected media device. · Update Media Index indexes your device each time you connect it
to make sure you have the latest voice commands available for all media on the device.
Browse allows you to view the contents of the device. It also allows you to search by categories, such as genre, artist or album.
If you want to view song information such as Title, Artist, File, Folder, Album, and Genre, touch the on-screen album art.
You can also touch What's Playing to hear how the system pronounces the current band and song. This can be helpful when using voice commands to make sure the system correctly plays your request.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
410
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
SD Card and USB Voice Commands
If you are listening to a USB device or an SD card, press the voice button on the steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to a USB device or an SD card, press the voice button and, after the tone, say "USB" or "SD card", then any of the commands in the following chart.
"USB" or "SD CARD"
"Browse"*
"Play podcast episode <name>"
"Next"
"Play previous song"
"Pause"
"Play similar music"
"Play" "Play album <name>"
"Play all" "Play artist <name>"
"Play song <name>" "Play TV show <name>"** "Play TV show episode <name>"**
"Play video <name>"**
"Play audiobook <name>" "Play author <name>"
"Play video podcast episode <name>"**
"Play video playlist <name>"**
"Play composer <name>"
"Previous"
"Play folder <name>"
"Repeat all"
"Play genre <name>" "Play movie <name>"** "Play music video <name>"**
"Repeat off" "Repeat one"
"Shuffle"
"Play next song"
"Shuffle off"
"Play playlist <name>"
"What's this?"
"Play podcast <name>"
"Help"
*If you have said you would like to browse your USB or SD card, the system prompts you to specify what you would like to browse. When prompted, see the following "Browse" chart.
**These commands are only available in USB mode and are device-dependent.
"Album <name>" "All albums"
"BROWSE" "All video podcasts"* "All videos"*
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
411
"BROWSE"
"All artists"
"Artist <name>"
"All audiobooks"
"Audiobook <name>"
"All authors"
"Author <name>"
"All composers"
"Composer <name>"
"All folders"
"Folder <name>"
"All genres" "All movies" * "All music videos"*
"All playlists"
"All podcasts"
"All songs" "All TV shows"* "All video playlists"*
"Genre <name>"
"Playlist <name>"
"Podcast <name>" "TV show <name>"*
"Video <name>"* "Video playlist <name>"* "Video podcast <name>"*
"Help"
*These commands are only available in USB mode and are device-dependent.
Supported Media Players, Formats and Metadata Information
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player, including iPod®, ZuneTM, plays from device players, and most USB drives. Supported audio formats include MP3, WMA, WAV and AAC.
It is also able to organize your indexed media from your playing device by metadata tags. Metadata tags, which are descriptive software identifiers embedded in the media files, provide information about the file.
If your indexed media files contain no information embedded in these metadata tags, SYNC may classify the empty metadata tags as Unknown.
In order to playback video from your iPod® or iPhone®, (if compatible), you MUST have a special combination USB/RCA composite video cable (which you can buy from Apple®). When the cable is connected to your iPod® or iPhone®, plug the other end into both the RCA jacks and the USB port.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
412
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Bluetooth Audio
Your system allows you to stream audio over your vehicle's speakers from your connected, Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
To access, press the lower left corner on the touchscreen, then select the BT Stereo tab.
Bluetooth Audio Voice Commands If you are listening to a Bluetooth audio device, press the voice button on the steering wheel control. When prompted, say "Next song", "Pause", "Play" or "Previous song".
If you are not listening to a Bluetooth audio device, press the voice button and, after the tone, say "Bluetooth Audio", then "Next song", "Pause", "Play" or "Previous song".
A/V Inputs
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
WARNING: For safety reasons, do not connect or adjust the settings on your portable music player while your vehicle is in motion.
WARNING: Store the portable music player in a secure location, such as the center console or the glove box, when your vehicle is in motion. Hard objects may become projectiles in a crash or sudden stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury. The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be safely stored while your vehicle is in motion.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
413
Your A/V inputs allow you to connect an auxiliary audio/video source (such as a gaming systems or a personal camcorder) by connecting RCA cords (not included) to these input jacks. The jacks are yellow, red and white and are located either behind a small access door on the instrument panel or in your center console.
You can also use the A/V inputs as an auxiliary input jack to play music from your portable music player over your vehicle's speakers. Plug in your 1/8 inch (3.5 millimeter) RCA adapter into the two left A/V input jacks (red and white).
Press the lower left corner of the touchscreen, and then select A/V In.
To use the auxiliary input jack feature, make sure that your portable music player is designed for use with headphones and that it is fully charged. You also need an audio extension cable with stereo male 1/8th-inch (3.5 millimeter) connectors at one end and a RCA jack at the other. 1. Switch off the engine, radio and portable music player. Set the
parking brake and put the transmission in position P. 2. Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output
of your player and the other end into the adapter in one of the two left A/V input jacks (white or red) inside the center console. 3. Press the lower left corner on the touchscreen. Select either a tuned FM station or a CD (if there is a CD already loaded into the system). 4. Adjust the volume as desired. 5. Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1/2 the maximum. 6. Press the lower left corner on the touchscreen. Select the A/V In tab. (You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may be low.) 7. Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the controls.
In order to playback video from your iPod® or iPhone® (if compatible), you must have a special combination USB/RCA composite video cable (which you can buy from Apple®). When the cable is connected to your iPod® or iPhone®, plug the other end into both the RCA jacks and the USB port.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
414
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Troubleshooting
· Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output. The jack only works correctly with devices that have a headphone output with a volume control.
· Do not set the portable music player's volume level higher than is necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio as this causes distortion and reduces sound quality.
· If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels, turn the portable music player volume down. If the problem persists, replace or recharge the batteries in the portable media player.
· Control the portable media player in the same manner when used with headphones, as the auxiliary input jack does not provide control (such as Play or Pause) over the attached portable media player.
PHONE
A B C D E F
A. Phone B. Quick Dial C. Phonebook D. History E. Messaging F. Settings
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
415
Hands-free calling is one of the main features of SYNC®. Once you pair your phone, you can access many options using the touchscreen or voice commands. While the system supports a variety of features, many are dependent on your cellular phone's functionality. At a minimum, most cellular phones with Bluetooth wireless technology support the following functions: · Answering an incoming call · Ending a call · Using privacy mode · Dialing a number · Redialing · Call waiting notification · Caller ID.
Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook download, are phone-dependent features. To check your phone's compatibility, see your phone's user manual and visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
Pairing Your Phone for the First Time
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
The first thing you must do to use the phone features of SYNC is to pair your Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone with SYNC. This allows you to use your phone in a hands-free manner.
Note: Put the transmission in position P. Turn on your vehicle ignition and the radio. 1. Touch Add Phone in the upper left corner of the touchscreen. Find
SYNC appears on the screen and instructs you to begin the pairing process from your device. 2. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cellular phone is in the proper mode. See your phone's manual if necessary. · Select SYNC, and a six-digit PIN appears on your device.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
416
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
3. If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, it does not support Secure Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN displayed on the touchscreen. Skip the next step.
4. When prompted on your phone's display, confirm that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your cellular phone.
5. The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more phone options. For more information on your phone's capability, see your phone's manual and visit the website.
Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: Put the transmission in position P. Turn on your vehicle ignition and the radio. 1. Press the Phone corner of the touchscreen > Settings > BT
Devices > Add Device. 2. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cellular phone is
in the proper mode. See your phone's user guide if necessary. 3. When prompted on your phone's display, enter the six-digit PIN
provided by SYNC on the screen. The display indicates when the pairing is successful. The system asks you if you want to download your phonebook.
SYNC may prompt you with more phone options. For more information on your phone's capability, see your phone's user guide and visit the website.
Making Calls
Press the voice button on your steering wheel controls. When prompted, say, "Call <name>" or say "Dial", then the desired number.
To end the call or exit phone mode, press and hold the phone button.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone sounds. Call information appears in the display if it is available.
Accept the call by pressing Accept on the touchscreen or by pressing this phone button on your steering wheel controls.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
417
Reject the call by pressing Reject on the touchscreen or by pressing and holding this phone button on your steering wheel controls.
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC logs it as a missed call.
Phone Menu Options Press the top left corner on your touchscreen to select from the following options:
Phone
Touch this button to access the on-screen numerical pad to enter a number and place a call. During an active call, you can also choose to: · Mute the call · Put it on hold · Turn on privacy (returns the call to your cellular phone) · Join two calls · End the call.
Quick Dial
Select and call contacts stored in your phonebook contacts and call history folder.
Phonebook
Touch this button to access and call any contacts in your previously downloaded phone book. The system places the entries in alphabetical categories summarized at the top of the screen.
To turn on contact picture settings, if your device supports this feature, press Phone > Settings > Manage Phonebook > Download photos from Phonebook > On.
Certain smart phones may support transferring street addresses when listed with phone book contact information. If your phone supports this feature, you can select and use these addresses as destinations and save them as favorites.
History
After you connect your Bluetooth-enabled phone to SYNC, you can access any previously dialed, received or missed calls. You can also choose to save these to your Favorites or to Quick Dial.
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. If your phone does not support downloading call history using Bluetooth, SYNC keeps track of calls made with the SYNC system.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
418
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Messaging
Send text messages using your touchscreen. See Text messaging later in this section.
Settings
Touch this button to access various phone settings, such turning Bluetooth on and off, managing your phonebook and more. See Phone settings later in this section.
Text Messaging
Note: Downloading and sending text messages using Bluetooth are phone-dependent features.
Note: Certain features in text messaging are speed-dependent and not available when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Note: SYNC does not download read text messages from your phone.
You can send and receive text messages using Bluetooth, read them aloud and translate text messaging acronyms, such as LOL. 1. Touch the top left corner of the display to access the Phone menu. 2. Select Messaging. 3. Choose from the following:
· Listen (speaker icon) · Dial · Send Text · View · Delete.
Composing a Text Message
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature. It is unavailable when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over 5 mph (8 km/h).
Note: Downloading and sending text messages using Bluetooth are phone-dependent features. 1. Touch the top left corner of the display to access the Phone menu. 2. Touch Messaging > Send Text. 3. Enter a phone number or choose from your phone book. 4. You can select from the following options:
· Send which sends the message as it is. · Edit Text allows you to customize the pre-defined message or
create a message on your own.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
419
You can then preview the message, verify the recipient as well as update the message list, and send it to a connected device (such as a USB drive).
Pre-defined Text Message Options I'll call you back in a few minutes. I just left, I'll be there soon. Can you give me a call? I'm on my way. I'm running a few minutes late.
I'm ahead of schedule, so I'll be there early. I'm outside.
I'll call you when I get there. OK Yes No
Thanks Stuck in traffic. Call me later.
LOL
Receiving a Text Message
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen displays a pop-up with the caller name and ID, if supported by your phone. You can press: · View to view the text message. · Listen for SYNC to read the message to you. · Dial to call the contact. · Ignore to exit the screen. Note: If you select View and your vehicle is traveling over 5 mph (8 km/h), the system offers to read the message to you instead of allowing you to view it while driving.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
420
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Phone Settings Press Phone > Settings.
Bluetooth Devices Touch this tab to connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as save it as a favorite.
Bluetooth Touch this tab to turn Bluetooth off or on.
Do Not Disturb Touch this tab if you want all calls to go directly to your voice mail and not ring in the vehicle. When this feature is on, text message notifications do not ring inside the cabin either.
911 Assist
Turn on or turn off the 911 AssistTM feature. See 911 Assist® in the SYNC Services and Applications section.
Phone Ringer
Select the ring tone you want to hear when you receive a call. Choose from possible system ring tones, your currently paired phone's ring tone, a beep, text-to-speech or a silent notification.
Text Message Notification
Select a text message notification, if supported by your phone. Choose from possible system alert tones, text-to-speech or silent.
Internet Data Connection
If your phone is compatible, use this screen to adjust your internet data connection. Select to make your connection profile with the personal area network or to turn off your connection. You can also choose to adjust your settings or have the system always connect, never connect when roaming or query on connect. Press ? for more information.
Manage Phonebook
Touch this button to access features such as automatic phonebook download, re-download your phonebook, add contacts from your phone as well as delete or upload your phonebook.
Roaming Warning
Touch this button to have the system alert you when your phone is in roaming mode.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
421
Phone Voice Commands
Press the voice button on the steering wheel control. After the tone, say any of the following commands:
"Bluetooth off" "Bluetooth on"
"Call"
"PHONE"
"Hold call off"* "Hold on"* "Join calls"*
"Call <name>"
"Listen to text message <#>"
"Call <name> at home" "Call <name> at work" "Call <name> on cell"
"Listen to text messages" "Messages"** "Mute call"*
"Call <name> on other" "Call voicemail"
"Pair phone" "Privacy on"*
"Dial"
"Reply to text messages"
"Do not disturb off"
"Turn ringer off"
"Do not disturb on"
"Forward text messages" "Go to hands free"*
"Turn ringer on" "Unmute call"*
"Help"
*These commands are only available during an active call.
**If you have said "Messages", see the following "Messages" chart.
"MESSAGES" "Call"
"Forward text messages" "Listen to text message <#>"
"Listen to text messages" "Reply to text messages"
"Help"
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
422
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
INFORMATION
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, touch the i (Information) button to access these features. If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation, touch the corner of the touchscreen with the green tab.
A B C D E
Under the Information menu, you can access features, such as:
A. SYNC® Services
B. SIRIUS® Travel LinkTM
C. Alerts
D. Calendar
E. SYNC Applications.
SYNC Services (If Equipped, U.S. Only)
Note: SYNC Services requires activation before use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to register and check your eligibility for complimentary services. Standard phone and message rates may apply. Subscription may be required. You must also have the active SYNC Services Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone paired and connected to the system in order to connect to, and use, SYNC Services. (See Phone earlier in this chapter for pairing instructions.)
Note: This feature does not function properly if you have enabled caller ID blocking on your mobile phone. Make sure your mobile phone is not blocking caller ID before using SYNC Services.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
423
Note: The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle, and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations. Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of errors, changes in roads, traffic conditions or driving conditions.
Note: When you connect, the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect your vehicle's current location, travel direction and speed to help provide you with the directions, traffic reports, or business searches you request. Further, to provide the services you request, for continuous improvement, the service may collect and record call details and voice communications. For more information, see SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not want Ford or its service providers to collect your vehicle travel information or other information identified in the Terms and Conditions, do not subscribe or use the service.
SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle sensors, integrated GPS technology and comprehensive map and traffic data, to give you personalized traffic reports, precise turn-by-turn directions, business search, news, sports, weather and more. For a complete list of services, or to learn more, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button on the steering wheel controls.
1. When prompted, say "Services". This initiates an outgoing call to SYNC Services using your paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
2. Once you connect to the service, follow the voice prompts to request the desired service, such as "Traffic" or "Directions". You can also say, "What are my choices?" to receive a list of available services from which to choose.
3. Say, "Services" to return to the Services main menu or for help, say, "Help".
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
424
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Connecting to SYNC Services Using the Touchscreen
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, touch the i (Information) button to access these features. If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation, touch the corner of the touchscreen with the green tab.
Press Services. 1. Select Connect to Services to initiate an outgoing call to SYNC
Services using your paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone. 2. Once you connect to the service, follow the voice prompts to request the desired service, such as "Traffic" or "Directions". You can also say, "What are my choices?" to receive a list of available services from which to choose. 3. Say, "Services" to return to the Services main menu or for help, say, "Help".
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
1. When connected to SYNC Services, say "Directions" or "Business Search". To find the closest business or type of business to your current location, just say "Business Search" and then "Search Near Me". If you need further assistance in finding a location, you can say "Operator" at any time within a Directions or Business search to speak with a live operator. The system may prompt you to speak with an operator when it has difficulty matching your voice request. The live operator can assist you by searching for businesses by name or by category, residential addresses by street address or by name or specific street intersections. Operator Assist is a feature of your SYNC Services subscription. For more information on Operator Assist, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.
2. Follow the voice prompts to select your Destination. After the route download is finished, the phone call automatically ends.
If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation: · Turn-by-turn directions appear in the information display, in the
status bar of your touchscreen system and on the SYNC Services screen. You also receive driving instructions from audible prompts. · When on an active route, you can select Route Summary or Route Status using the touchscreen controls or voice commands to view the Route Summary Turn List or the Route Status ETA. You can also turn voice guidance on or off, cancel the route or update the route.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
425
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks if you want the route updated. Just say, "Yes" when prompted and the system delivers a new route to your vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, SYNC Services downloads your requested destination to the navigation system. The navigation system then calculates the route and provides driving instructions. See the Navigation system section for more information.
Disconnecting from SYNC Services
1. Press and hold the hang-up phone button on the steering wheel. 2. Say "Goodbye" from the SYNC Services main menu.
Personalizing
Push to interrupt Portable
SYNC Services quick tips You can personalize your Services feature to provide quicker access to your most used or favorite information. You can save address points, such as work or home. You can also save favorite information like sports teams, such as Detroit Lions, or a news category. You can learn more about personalization by logging onto www.SYNCMyRide.com. Press the voice button at any time (while connected to SYNC TDI Services) to interrupt a voice prompt or an audio clip (such as a sports report) and say your voice command. Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone number, not your VIN (Vehicle Identification Number). You can pair and connect your phone to any vehicle equipped with Traffic, Directions and Information and continue enjoying your personalized services.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
426
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
SYNC Services Voice Commands When a route has been downloaded (non-navigation systems), press the voice button on the steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the following commands:
"SERVICES" "Cancel route" "Navigation voice off" "Navigation voice on"
"Next turn" "Route status" "Route summary"
"Services" "Update route"
"Help"
SIRIUS Travel Link (If Equipped and If Activated)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: In order to use SIRIUS Travel Link, your vehicle must be equipped with navigation and your navigation SD card must be in the SD card slot.
Note: A paid subscription is required to access and use these features. Go to www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic# and click on Coverage map and details for a complete listing of all traffic areas covered by SIRIUS Travel Link.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
427
Note: Neither SIRIUS nor Ford is responsible for any errors or inaccuracies in the SIRIUS Travel Link services or its use in vehicles.
When you subscribe to SIRIUS Travel Link, it can help you locate the best gas prices, find movie listings, get current traffic alerts, view the current weather map, get accurate ski conditions and see scores to current sports games.
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, touch the i (Information) button to access these features. If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation, touch the corner of the touchscreen with the green tab.
Traffic On Route and Traffic Nearby
Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route, nearby your vehicle's current location or near any of your favorite places, if programmed.
Fuel Prices
Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your vehicle's location or on an active navigation route.
Movie Listings
Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their show times, if available.
Weather
Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather, or the five day forecast for the chosen area. Select Map to see the weather map, which can show storms, radar information, charts and winds. Select Area to select from a listing of weather locations.
Sports Info
Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety of sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in progress.
Ski Conditions
Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
428
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
SIRIUS Travel Link Voice Commands
Note: In order to use SIRIUS Travel Link, your vehicle must be equipped with navigation and your navigation SD card must be in the SD card slot.
Press the voice button on the steering wheel controls and, when prompted, say any of the following:
Travel Link voice commands
"5day weather forecast"
"Sports scores"**
"Fuel prices"
"Movie listings" "Sports headlines"* "Sports schedule"*
"Traffic" "Travel Link"**
"Weather" "Weather map"
*If you have said, "Sports headlines", "Sports schedule" or "Sports scores", you may say any of the commands in the "Sports headlines, Sports schedules and Sports scores" commands chart:
*If you have said, "Travel Link", you may say any of the commands in the "Travel Link" chart:
Sports headlines, sports schedules and sports scores voice
commands
"Baseball"
"My teams"
"College basketball"
"NBA"
"College football"
"NFL"
"Golf"
"NHL"
"MLS"
"WNBA"
"Motor sports"
"5day weather forecast"
"Baseball headlines" "Baseball schedule"
"Baseball scores" "College basketball
headlines"
"TRAVEL LINK" "Golf schedule"
"MLS headlines" "MLS schedule"
"MLS scores" "Motor sports"
"NBA scores"
"NFL headlines" "NFL schedule"
"NFL scores" "NHL headlines"
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
429
"College basketball schedule"
"College basketball scores"
"College football headlines"
"College football schedule"
"College football scores"
"Fuel prices" "Golf headlines" "Golf leaderboard"
"TRAVEL LINK" "Motor sports order"
"Motor sports schedule"
"Movie listings"
"My team headlines"
"My teams schedule"
"My teams scores" "NBA headlines" "NBA schedule"
"NHL schedule"
"NHL scores"
"Traffic"
"Weather"
"Weather map"
"WNBA headlines" "WNBA schedule"
"WNBA scores"
Alerts
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, touch the i (Information) button to access these features. If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation, touch the corner of the touchscreen with the green tab.
Press Alerts, and then choose from any of the following services: · View the message. · Delete the message. · Delete All messages.
This screen displays any system messages (such as an SD card fault).
Note: The system alerts you to any messages by turning the information icon yellow. After you read or delete the messages, the icon returns to white.
Calendar
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, touch the i (Information) button to access these features. If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation, touch the corner of the touchscreen with the green tab.
Press Calendar. You can view the current calendar by day, week or month.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
430
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
911 Assist® (If Equipped)
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on before a crash, the system will not dial for help, which could delay response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services immediately to avoid delayed response time, which could increase the risk of serious injury or death after a crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds of the crash, the system or phone may be damaged or non-functional.
WARNING: Always place your phone in a secure location in your vehicle so it does not become a projectile or damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the phone, which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make sure that you read the 911 Assist privacy notice later in this section for important information.
Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off, that setting applies for all paired phones. If 911 Assist is turned off, either a voice message plays or a display message (or icon) comes on (or both) when your vehicle is started after a previously paired phone connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently. While SYNC 911 Assist works with most cellular phones, some may have trouble using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excludes knee airbags and rear inflatable safety belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by dialing 911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You can learn more about the 911 Assist feature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca. · For information on airbag deployment, see the Supplementary
Restraints System chapter. · For information on the fuel pump shut-off, see the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
431
Setting 911 Assist On
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, touch the i (Information) button to access these features. If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation, touch the corner of the touchscreen with the green tab.
Press Apps > 911 Assist, then select On.
You can also access 911 Assist by:
· Pressing the Settings icon > Settings > Phone > 911 Assist, or
· Pressing the Settings icon > Help > 911 Assist.
To Make Sure that 911 Assist Works Properly · SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the
incident and throughout feature activation and use. · The 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident. · You must pair and connect a Bluetooth-enabled and compatible phone
to SYNC. · A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have the ability to make
and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident. · A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have adequate network
coverage, battery power and signal strength. · The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the U.S.,
Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut-off (which would trigger 911 Assist); however, SYNC tries to contact emergency services if 911 Assist triggers. If a connected phone sustains damage or loses connection to SYNC, SYNC searches for, and tries to connect to, any available previously paired phone and tries to make the call to 911.
Before making the call: · SYNC provides a short window of time (about 10 seconds) to cancel
the call. If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC attempts to dial 911. · SYNC says the following, or a similar message: "SYNC will attempt to
call 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on your screen or press and hold the phone button on your steering wheel."
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC makes a successful call, a pre-recorded message plays for the 911 operator, and then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able to talk with the operator. Be prepared to provide your name, phone number and location immediately, because not all 911 systems are capable of receiving this information electronically.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
432
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
911 Assist May Not Work If · Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware sustains damage in a
crash. · The vehicle's battery or SYNC system has no power. · The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle are the ones paired and
connected to the system.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you turn on 911 Assist, it may disclose to emergency services that your vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators your vehicle location or other details about your vehicle or crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not turn the feature on.
Vehicle Health Report (If Equipped, U.S. Only)
WARNING: Always follow scheduled maintenance instructions, regularly inspect your vehicle, and seek repair for any damage or problem you suspect. Vehicle Health Report supplements, but cannot replace, normal maintenance and vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health Report only monitors certain systems electronically monitored by your vehicle and will not monitor or report the status of any other system, (such as brake lining wear). Failure to perform scheduled maintenance and regularly inspect your vehicle may result in vehicle damage and serious injury.
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature requires activation prior to use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There is no fee or subscription associated with Vehicle Health Report, but you must register to use this feature.
Note: This feature may not function properly if you have enabled caller ID blocking on your mobile phone. Before running a report, review the Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice.
Note: In order to allow a break-in period for your vehicle, you may not be able to create a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle odometer has reached 200 miles.
Note: Cellular phone and SMS charges may apply when making a report.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
433
Register for Vehicle Health Report and set your report preferences at www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering, you can request a Vehicle Health Report (inside your vehicle). Return to your account at www.SYNCMyRide.com to view your report. You can also choose for SYNC to remind you automatically to run reports at specific mileage intervals. Cellular phone airtime usage may apply when reporting.
The system allows you to check your vehicle's overall health in the form of a diagnostic report card. The Vehicle Health Report contains valuable information, such as: · Vehicle Diagnostic Information · Scheduled maintenance · Open Recalls and Field Service Actions · Items noted during vehicle inspections by your authorized dealer that
still need servicing.
Making a Report
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, touch the i (Information) button to access these features. If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation, touch the corner of the touchscreen with the green tab.
If you want to run a report by using the touchscreen, touch Apps > Vehicle Health Report.
To run a report by voice command, press the voice button on the steering wheel and, when prompted, say "Vehicle health report".
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you create a Vehicle Health Report, Ford Motor Company may collect your cellular phone number (to process your report request) and diagnostic information about your vehicle. Certain versions or updates to Vehicle Health Report may also collect more vehicle information. Ford may use your vehicle information it collects for any purpose. If you do not want to disclose your cellular phone number or vehicle information, do not run the feature or set up your Vehicle Health Report profile at www.SYNCMyRide.com. See www.SYNCMyRide.com (Vehicle Health Report Terms and Conditions, and Privacy Statement) for more information.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
434
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
SETTINGS
A B C D E F
A. Clock
B. Display
C. Sound
D. Vehicle
E. Settings
F. Help
Under this menu, you can set your clock, access and adjust the display, sound and vehicle settings as well as access settings for specific modes or the help feature.
Clock
Note: You cannot manually set the date. Your vehicle's GPS does this for you.
Note: If the battery has been disconnected, your vehicle needs to acquire a GPS signal to update the clock. Once your vehicle acquires the signal, it may take a few minutes for the update to display the correct time. 1. Press the Settings icon > Clock. 2. Press + and - to adjust the time.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
435
From this screen, you can also make other adjustments, such as 12 or 24hour mode, activate GPS time synchronization and have the system automatically update for daylight savings time and new time zones.
You can also turn the outside air temperature display on and off. It appears at the top center of the touchscreen, next to the time and date.
The system automatically saves any updates you make to the settings.
Display
You can adjust the touchscreen display through the touchscreen or by pressing the voice button on your steering wheel controls and when prompted, say, "Display settings".
Press the Settings icon > Display, then select from the following:
Brightness allows you to make the screen display brighter or dimmer.
Mode allows you to set the screen to a certain brightness or have the system automatically change based on the outside light level. · If you select AUTO or NIGHT, you have the options of turning the
display's Auto Dim feature on or off and changing the Auto Dim Manual Offset feature.
Edit Wallpaper · You can have your touchscreen display the default photo or upload
your own.
Uploading Photos for Your Home Screen Wallpaper
Note: You cannot load photos directly from your camera. You must access the photos either from your USB mass storage device or from an SD card.
Note: Photographs with extremely large dimensions (i.e., 2048 x 1536) may not be compatible and appear as a blank (black) image on the display.
Your system allows you to upload and view up to 32 photos.
To access, press the Settings icon > Display > Edit Wallpaper, and then follow the system prompts to upload your photographs.
Only the photograph(s), which meets the following conditions, display: · Compatible file formats are as follows: .jpg, .gif, .png, .bmp. · Each file must be 1.5 MB or less. · Recommended dimensions: 800 x 384.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
436
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Sound
Press the Settings icon > Sound, then select from the following:
Bass Midrange Treble Set Balance and Fade *If equipped.
Sound Settings THX Deep Note Demo* DSP* Occupancy Mode*
Speed Compensated Volume
Vehicle
Press the Settings icon > Vehicle, then select from the following:
· Active Park Assist · Vehicle Health Report · Rear View Camera · Enable Valet Mode.
Active Park Assist When activated, your system displays directions for you regarding the active park assist process.
For complete information on this system, see Active park assist in the Driving Aids chapter.
Vehicle Health Report Turn Automatic Reminders on and off and set the mileage interval at which you would like to receive the reports. Press the ? for more information on these selections.
When done making your selections, press Run Vehicle Health Report Now if you want your report.
Rear View Camera
This menu allows you to access settings for your rear view camera.
Press the Settings icon > Vehicle > Rear View Camera, then select from the following settings: · Rear Camera Delay · Visual Park Aid Alert · Guidelines.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
437
Enable Valet Mode
Note: If the system locks, and you need to reset the PIN, enter 3681 and the system unlocks.
Valet mode allows you to lock the system. No information is accessible until the system is unlocked with the correct PIN. 1. Press the Settings icon > Vehicle > Enable Valet Mode. 2. When prompted, enter a four-digit PIN. After you press Continue, the system locks until you enter the PIN again.
Settings Access and adjust system settings, voice features, as well as phone, navigation and wireless settings.
System Press the Settings icon > Settings > System, then select from the following:
Language
Distance Temperature
System Prompt Volume Touch Screen Button Beep Touch Panel Button Beep
Keyboard Layout
Install Applications
Master Reset
System Select to have the touchscreen display in English, Spanish or French. Select to display units in kilometers or miles. Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit. Adjust the volume of voice prompts from the system. Select to have the system beep to confirm choices made through the touchscreen. Select to have the system beep to confirm button choices made through the climate or audio system. Have the touchscreen keyboard display in QWERTY or ABC format. Install any downloaded applications or view the current software licenses. Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all personal settings and personal data.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
438
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Voice Control
Press the Settings icon > Settings > Voice Control, then select from the following:
Voice Control
Interaction Mode
Standard interaction mode provides more
detailed interaction and guidance. Advanced
mode has less audible interaction and more
tone prompts.
Confirmation
Have the system ask you short questions if it
Prompts
has not clearly heard or understood your
request.
Note: Even with confirmation prompts turned
off, the system may occasionally ask you to
confirm settings.
Media Candidate
Candidate lists are possible results from your
Lists
voice commands. The system simply makes a
best guess at your request with these turned
off.
Phone Candidate
Candidate lists are possible results from your
Lists
voice commands. The system simply makes a
best guess at your request with these turned
off.
Voice Control Volume This allows you to adjust the system's voice
volume level.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
439
Media Player
Press the Settings icon > Settings > Media Player, then select from the following:
Autoplay
Bluetooth Devices
Gracenote® Database Info Gracenote® Mgmt Cover Art Priority
Media Player When this feature is on, the system automatically switches to the media source upon initial connection. This allows you to listen to music during the indexing process. When this feature is off, the system does not automatically switch to the inserted media source. Select to connect, disconnect, add or delete a device. You can also set a device as your favorite so that the system automatically attempts to connect to that device at every ignition cycle. This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database. With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplies metadata information for your music files. This overrides information from your device. This feature defaults to off. With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplied cover art for your music files. This overrides any art from your device. This feature defaults to Media Player.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
440
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Navigation
Press the Settings icon > Settings > Navigation, then select from the following:
Map Preferences Route Preferences
Navigation Preferences Traffic Preferences
Avoid Areas
Navigation Turn breadcrumbs on and off. Have the system display your turn list top to bottom or bottom to top. Turn the Parking POI notification on and off. Have the system display the shortest route, fastest route or ecological route. Have the system avoid freeways. Have the system avoid tollroads. Have the system avoid ferries or car trains. Have the system use high-occupancy vehicle lanes. Have the system use guidance prompts. Have the system automatically fill-in State/Province information. Have the system display areas where roadwork occurs. Have the system display incident icons. Have the system display areas where difficult driving conditions may occur. Have the system display areas where snow and ice on the road may occur. Have the system display any smog alerts. Have the system display weather warnings. Have the system display where there may be reduced visibility. Have the system turn on your radio for traffic announcements. Enter specific areas that you would like to avoid on planned navigation routes.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
441
Phone Settings
Press the Settings icon > Settings > Phone, then select from the following:
Bluetooth Devices Bluetooth Do Not Disturb
911 Assist Phone Ringer Text Message Notification Internet Data Connection
Manage Phonebook
Roaming Warning
Phone
Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as save it as a favorite.
Turn Bluetooth on and off.
Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not ring inside your vehicle. With this feature turned on, text message notifications are also suppressed and do not ring inside your vehicle.
Turn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature. See 911 Assist in the SYNC applications and services section.
Select the type of notification for phone calls - ring tone, beep, text to speech, or have it be silent.
Select the type of notification for text messages - alert tone, beep, text to speech, or have it be silent.
If compatible with your phone, you can adjust your internet data connection. Select to make your connection profile with the personal area network or to turn off your connection. You can also choose to adjust your settings or have the system always connect, never connect when roaming or query on connect. Press ? for more information.
Access features, such as automatic phonebook download, re-download your phonebook, add contacts from your phone as well as delete or upload your phonebook.
Have the system alert you when in Roaming mode.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
442
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Wireless & Internet
Your system has a Wi-Fi feature that creates a wireless network within your vehicle, thereby allowing other devices (such as personal computers or phones) in your vehicle to speak to each other, share files or play games. Using this Wi-Fi feature, everyone in your vehicle can also gain access the internet if you have a USB mobile broadband connection inside your vehicle, your phone supports personal area networking and if you park outside a wireless hotspot.
Press the Settings icon > Settings > Wireless & Internet, then select from the following:
Wi-Fi Settings
Wireless & Internet
Wi-Fi Network (Client) Mode turns the Wi-Fi feature on and off in your vehicle. Make sure you turn it on for connectivity purposes.
Choose a Wireless Network allows you to use a previously stored wireless network. You can categorize by alphabetical listing, priority and signal strength. You can also choose to search for a network, connect to a network, disconnect from a network, receive more information, prioritize a network or delete a network.
Gateway (Access Point) Mode makes SYNC an access point for a phone or a computer when turned on. This forms the local area network within your vehicle for things, such as game playing, file transfer and internet browsing. Press ? for more information.
Gateway (Access Point) Settings allows you to view and change settings for using SYNC as the internet gateway.
Gateway (Access Point) Device List allows you to view recent connections to your Wi-Fi system.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
443
USB Mobile Broadband
Bluetooth Settings Prioritize Connection Methods
Wireless & Internet
Instead of using Wi-Fi, your system can also use a USB mobile broadband connection to access the internet. (You must turn on your mobile broadband device on your personal computer before connecting it to the system.) This screen allows you to set up what is your typical area for your USB mobile broadband connection. (USB mobile broadband settings may not display if the device is already on.) You can select the following: Country, Carrier, Phone Number, User Name and Password.
Shows you the currently paired devices as well as giving you your typical Bluetooth options to connect, disconnect, set as favorite, delete and add device. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG.
Choose your connection methods and change them as needed. You can select to Change Order and have the system either always attempt to connect using a USB mobile broadband or using Wi-Fi.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
444
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Help
Press the Settings icon > Help, then select from the following:
Where Am I? System Information
Software Licenses Driving Restrictions 911 Assist
Voice Command List
Help View your vehicle's current location, if your vehicle is equipped with navigation. If your vehicle is not equipped with navigation, nothing displays. Touchscreen system serial number. Your vehicle identification number (VIN). Touchscreen system software version. Navigation system version. Map database version. Sirius satellite radio electronic serial number (ESN). Gracenote® Database Information and Library version. View the licenses for any software and applications installed on your system. Certain features are not accessible when your vehicle is moving. Turn on and turn off the 911 Assist feature. See 911 Assist in the SYNC applications and services section. In Case of Emergency (ICE) Speed Dial allows you to save up to two numbers as ICE contacts for quick access if there is an emergency. Select Edit to access your phonebook and then select the desired contacts. The numbers then appear as options on this screen for the ICE 1 and ICE 2 buttons. The ICE contacts you select appear at the end of the 911 Assist call process. View categorized lists of voice commands.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
445
To access Help using the voice commands, press the voice button, then, after the tone, say "Help". The system provides allowable voice commands for the current mode.
CLIMATE Press the lower right corner on the touchscreen to access your climate control features. Depending on your vehicle line and option package, your climate screen may look different from the screen shown here.
A
J
B
I
C
HGFE D
A. Power: Touch to switch the system off and on. Outside air cannot enter your vehicle when you switch off the system. B. Passenger settings: Touch + or to adjust the temperature. C. Fan speed: Touch + or to adjust fan speed. D. DUAL: Touch to switch on the passenger temperature control. E. Recirculated air: Touch to turn the recirculated air on or off which: · May reduce the amount of time needed to cool down the interior. · May help reduce odors from reaching the interior. · Engages automatically when MAX A/C or MAX defrost is selected. · May be engaged manually in any airflow mode except defrost. · May turn off in all airflow modes except MAX A/C and MAX defrost
to reduce fog potential.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
446
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
F. MAX A/C: Touch to cool your vehicle with recirculated air. Touch again for normal A/C operation. MAX A/C: · Distributes air through instrument panel vents. · Is more economical and efficient than normal A/C mode. · May help reduce odors from entering your vehicle.
G. A/C: Touch to turn the air conditioning on or off. · Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and
efficiency. · Engages automatically in MAX A/C, defrost and floor/defrost.
H. AUTO: Touch to engage automatic operation, then set the temperature using the temperature control. The system automatically controls: · Fan speed · Airflow distribution · A/C on or off · Outside or recirculated air.
I. Manual controls: Select any of the following airflow distribution modes: · Floor and Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster
vents, demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents, and provides outside air to reduce window fogging. · Panel: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents. · Panel and Floor: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents. · Floor: Distributes air through the demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents. · MAX Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield air vents and automatically switches the air conditioning on. The fan is set to the highest speed and the temperature to HI. When the air distribution is set in this position, you are unable to select recirculated air or manually adjust the fan speed and temperature control. · Defrost: Touch to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice. Touch again to return to the previous airflow selection. When on, defrost provides outside air to reduce window fogging and distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and demister vents.
J. Driver settings: Touch + or to adjust the temperature.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
447
Climate Control Voice Commands
The following voice commands are available at the main menu level of a voice session. For example, press the voice button and after the prompt, "Say a command"; say any of the following commands:
Climate control voice commands "Climate automatic" "Climate off" "Climate on"
"Climate temperature <15.529.5> degrees" "Climate temperature <6085> degrees" "Help"
There are additional climate control commands but in order to access them, you have to say "Climate" first, then when the system is ready to listen, you may say any of the following commands:
Additional climate control voice commands
"Automatic"
"Panel floor on"
"A/C off"
"Panel off"
"A/C on"
"Panel on"
"Defrost off"
"Rear defrost off"
"Defrost on"
"Rear defrost on"
"Dual off"
"Recirc off"
"Fan decrease"
"Recirc on"
"Fan increase"
"Temperature"*
"Floor off"
"Temperature <15.529.5>
degrees"
"Floor on"
"Temperature <6085> degrees"
"Max A/C off"
"Temperature decrease"
"Max A/C on"
"Temperature high on"
"Maximum fan"
"Temperature increase"
"Maximum windshield off"
"Temperature low on"
"Maximum windshield on"
"Windshield floor on"
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
448
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Additional climate control voice commands
"Minimum fan"
"Windshield panel floor on"
"Off"
"Windshield panel on"
"On"
"Help"
*If you have said "Temperature", you can say any of the commands in the following "Temperature" chart.
"TEMPERATURE" "<15.529.5> degrees"
"<6085> degrees" "High" "Low" "Help"
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: The navigation SD card must be in the SD card slot to operate the navigation system. If you need a replacement SD card, see your authorized dealer.
Note: The SD card slot is spring-loaded. To remove the SD card, just push the card in and release it. Do not attempt to pull the card out to remove it; this could cause damage.
Your navigation system is comprised of two main features, destination mode and map mode.
To set a destination, press the green corner of your touchscreen, then Dest when it appears. See Setting a destination later in this chapter.
To view the navigation map and your vehicle's current location, touch the green bar in the upper right hand corner of the touchscreen, or, press Dest > Map. See Map mode later in this chapter.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
449
Setting a Destination
Press the green corner of your touchscreen, then Dest when it appears. Choose any of the following:
Destination Selections
My Home
Street Address
Favorites
Intersection
Previous Destinations
City Center
Point of Interest
Map
Emergency
Edit Route Cancel Route
Previous Starting Point
Freeway Entrance/Exit
Latitude/Longitude
1. Enter the necessary information into the highlighted text fields (in any order). For address destination entry, Go! appears once all the necessary information has been entered. Pressing Go! makes the address location appear on the map. If you choose Previous Destination, the last 20 destinations you have selected appear.
2. Select Set as Dest to make this your destination. You can also choose to set this as a waypoint (have the system route to this point on the way to your current destination) or save it as a favorite. The system considers any Avoid Areas selections in its route calculation.
3. Choose from up to three different types of routes, and then select Start Route. · Fastest Route: Uses the fastest moving roads possible. · Shortest Route: Uses the shortest distance possible. · Eco Route: Uses the most fuel-efficient route.
You can cancel the route or have the system demo the route for you. Select Route Prefs to set route preferences like avoiding freeways, tollroads, ferries and car trains as well as to use or not use high-occupancy vehicle lanes. (High-occupancy vehicle lanes also known as carpool or diamond lanes. People who ride in buses, vanpools or carpools use these lanes.)
Note: If your vehicle is on a recognized road and you do not press the Start Route button, the system defaults to the Fastest Route option and begins guidance.
During route guidance, you can press the talking bubble icon that appears in the upper right navigation corner (green bar) if you want the system to repeat route guidance information. When the system repeats the last guidance instruction, it updates the distance to the next guidance instruction, since it detects when the vehicle is moving.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
450
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Point of Interest (POI) Categories Your system offers a variety of points of interest categories.
Food/Drink & Dining Travel & Transportation Financial Emergency Community Health & Medicine
Main Categories Automotive Shopping Entertainment & Arts Recreation & Sports Government Domestic Services
Within these main categories, there are subcategories which contain more listings:
Subcategories Restaurant Golf Parking
Home & Garden Personal Care Services Automobile Dealership
Government Office Public Transit Education
To expand these listings, press the + in front of the point of interest listing.
When programming a point of interest destination, the system allows you to sort the resulting lists alphabetically, by distance or by cityseekr listings (if available).
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
451
cityseekr (If Available)
Note: cityseekr point of interest information is limited to approximately 154 cities (132 in the U.S., 13 in Canada and 9 in Mexico).
cityseekr, when available, is a service that provides more information about certain points of interest such as restaurants, hotels and attractions.
When you have selected a point of interest, the location and information appear, such as address and phone number. If cityseekr lists the point of interest, more information is available, such as a brief description, hotel check-in and checkout times or restaurant hours.
Press More Information for a longer review, a list of services and facilities, the average room or meal price as well as the website link.
This screen displays point of interest icons, such as:
Hotel
Coffeehouse
Food & Drink
Nightlife
Attraction
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
452
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
This icon appears when your selection exists in multiple categories within the system.
When you are viewing more information for hotels, cityseekr also tells you if the hotel has certain services and facilities using icons.
Hotel Services and Facilities
Restaurant
24 Hr Room Service
Business Center
Fitness Center
Handicap Facilities
Internet Access
Laundry
Pool
Refrigerator
Wi-Fi
For restaurants, cityseekr can provide information, such as star rating, average cost, review, handicap access, hours of operation, and website address.
For hotels, cityseekr can provide information, such as star rating, price category, review, check-in and check-out times, hotel service icons and website address.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
453
Setting Your Navigation Preferences Select settings for the system to take into account when planning your route.
Press the Settings icon > Settings > Navigation.
When you select: Map Preferences
Route Preferences
Navigation Preferences
You can: Turn breadcrumbs on and off. Have the system display your turn list top to bottom or bottom to top. Set the automatic parking points of interest notification. When parking points of interest notification is on, the icons display on the map when you get close to your destination. (This may not be very useful in dense areas, and may clutter the map when other points of interest display.) Choose to have the system display the shortest route, fastest route or most ecological route. Avoid freeways, toll roads, ferries and car trains when planning your route. Use high-occupancy vehicle lanes (if available). Choose prompts to be either voice or tone only. Have the system automatically fill in the state and province based on the information already entered into the system.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
454
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
When you select: Traffic Preferences
Avoid Areas
You can: Choose how you want the system to handle traffic problems along your route. Automatic: Have the system reroute you to avoid traffic incidents that develop and impact the current route (no notification is provided). Manual: Have the system always provide a traffic alert notification for traffic incidents along the planned route. You have a choice to accept or ignore the notification before making the route deviation. Turn on certain, or all, traffic icons on the map (such as road work, incident, accidents and closed roads). Choose areas which you want the system to avoid when calculating a route for you. Press Add to select a category. Once you select, the system tries to avoid the area(s) if possible for all routes. To delete a selection, choose the listing on the screen. When the screen changes to Avoid Areas Edit, you can press Delete at the bottom right of the screen.
Map Mode
Press the green bar in the upper right area of the touchscreen to view map mode. Map mode shows advanced viewing comprised of both 2D city maps as well as 3D landmarks (when available).
2D city maps show detailed outlines of buildings, visible land use and land elements and detailed railway infrastructure for the most essential cities around the globe. These maps also contain features, such as town blocks, building footprints, and railways.
3D landmarks appear as clear, visible objects that are typically recognizable and have a certain tourist value. The 3D landmarks appear in 3D map mode only. Coverage varies, and improves with updated map releases.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
455
Change the appearance of the map display by repeatedly pressing the arrow button in the upper left corner of the screen. It toggles between three different map modes: Heading up, North up, and 3D.
Heading up (2D map) always shows the direction of forward travel to be upward on the screen. This view is available for map scales up to 2.5 miles (4 kilometers). The system remembers this setting for larger map scales, but shows the map in North up only. If the scale returns below this level, the system restores Heading up.
North up (2D map) always shows the northern direction to be upward on the screen.
3D map mode provides an elevated perspective of the map. This viewing angle can be adjusted and the map can be rotated 180 degrees by dragging your finger along the shaded bar with arrows at the bottom of the map.
Re-center the map by pressing this icon whenever you scroll the map away from your vehicle's current location.
Auto Zoom
Press the green bar to access map mode, then select the + or - zoom button to bring up the zoom level and Auto buttons on the touchscreen. When you press Auto, Auto Zoom turns on and Auto displays in the bottom left corner of the screen in the map scale. The map zoom level then synchronizes with vehicle speed. The slower your vehicle is traveling, the farther in the map zooms; the faster your vehicle is traveling, the farther the map zooms out. To turn the feature off, just press the + or - button again.
In 3D mode, rotate the map view by swiping your finger across the shaded bar with the arrows.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
456
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Map Icons
Vehicle mark shows the current location of your vehicle. It stays in the center of the map display, except when in scroll mode.
Scroll cursor allows you to scroll the map; the fixed icon is in the center of the screen. The map position closest to the cursor is in a window on the top center part of the screen.
Address book entry default icon(s) indicates the location on the map of an address book entry. This is the default symbol shown after the entry has been stored to the Address Book by any method other than the map. You can select from any of the 22 icons available. You can use each icon more than once.
Home indicates the location on the map currently stored as the home position. You can only save one address from the Address Book as your Home entry. You cannot change this icon.
POI (Point Of Interest) icons indicate locations of any point of interest categories you choose to display on the map. You can choose to display about 56 point of interest subcategories on the map at one time.
Starting point indicates the starting point of a planned route.
Waypoints indicates the location of a waypoint on the map. The number inside the circle is different for each waypoint and represents the position of the waypoint in the route list.
Destination symbol indicates the ending point of a planned route.
Next maneuver point indicates the location of the next turn on the planned route.
No GPS symbol indicates that insufficient GPS satellite signals are available for accurate map positioning. This icon may display under normal operation in an area with poor GPS access.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
457
Quick-touch Buttons
When in map mode, touch anywhere on the map display to access the following options:
When you select: Set as Dest
Set as Waypoint Save to Favorites POI Icons On/Off
Cancel Route View/Edit Route
You can:
Select a scrolled location on the map as your destination. (You may scroll the map by pressing your index finger on the map display. When you reach the desired location, simply let go and then touch Set as Dest.)
Set the current location as a waypoint.
Save the current location to your favorites.
Select icons to display on the map. You can select up to three icons to display on the map at the same time.
Cancel the active route.
Access these features when a route is active: · View route · Edit destination/waypoints · Edit turn list · Detour · Edit route preferences · Edit traffic preferences · Cancel route.
Navteq is the digital map provider for the navigation application. If you find map data errors, you may report them directly to Navteq by going to http://mapreporter.navteq.com. Navteq evaluates all reported map errors and responds with the result of their investigation by e-mail.
Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are available for purchase through your dealership, by calling 1-800-NAVMAPS (in Mexico, call 018005575539) or going to www.navigation.com/ford. You need to specify the make and model of your vehicle to determine if there is an update available.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
458
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Navigation Voice Commands
When in navigation mode, press the voice button on the steering wheel control. After the tone, say any of the following commands:
Navigation System Voice Commands
"Cancel next waypoint"1
"Navigation"3
"Cancel route"1
"Repeat instruction"1
"Destination"2
"Show 3D"
"Destination <nametag>"
"Show heading up"
"Destination <POI category>"
"Show map"
"Destination favorites" "Destination home"
"Destination intersection"
"Show north up" "Show route"1
"Show turn list"1
"Destination nearest <POI
"Voice off"
category>"
"Destination nearest POI"
"Voice on"
"Destination play nametags"
"Voice volume decrease"
"Destination POI"
"Voice volume increase"
"Destination POI category"
"Where am I?"
"Destination previous destination"
"Zoom in"
"Destination street address" "Detour"1
"Zoom out" "Help"
1These commands are only available when a navigation route is active.
2If you have said the command, "Destination", you may say any of the above commands or commands in the following Destination chart.
3If you have said the command, "Navigation", you may say any of the above commands or commands in the following Navigation chart.
"DESTINATION" "<nametag>"
"<POI category>" "Favorites" "Home"
"Intersection"
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
459
"DESTINATION" "Nearest <POI category>"
"Nearest POI" "Play nametags" "POI category" "Previous destination" "Street address"
"Help"
"NAVIGATION" "Destination"* "Zoom city" "Zoom country"
"Zoom in minimum" "Zoom out maximum"
"Zoom province" "Zoom state" "Zoom street"
"Zoom to <distance>" "Help"
*If you have said, "Destination", you may say any of the commands in the Destination chart.
One-shot Destination Street Address
If your vehicle is equipped with the SD card navigation feature, you have the ability to enter in a street address using a feature called one-shot destination street address. When you say either "Navigation destination street address" or "Destination street address", the system asks you to say the full address. The system displays an example on-screen. You can then speak the address naturally, such as "One two three four Main Street, Anytown".
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
460
Appendices
GENERAL INFORMATION
SYNC® End User License Agreement (EULA) · You have acquired a device ("DEVICE") that includes software licensed by Ford Motor Company and its affiliates ("FORD MOTOR COMPANY") from an affiliate of Microsoft Corporation ("MS"). Those installed software products of MS origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and "online" or electronic documentation ("MS SOFTWARE") are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The MS SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
· The MS SOFTWARE may interface with and/or communicate with, or may be later upgraded to interface with and/or communicate with additional software and/or systems provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY. The additional software and systems of FORD MOTOR COMPANY origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and "online" or electronic documentation ("FORD SOFTWARE") are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The FORD SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
· The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORD SOFTWARE may interface with and/or communicate with, or may be later upgraded to interface with and/or communicate with additional software and/or systems provided by third party software and service suppliers. The additional software and services of third party origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and "online" or electronic documentation ("THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE") are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
· The MS SOFTWARE, FORD SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE hereinafter collectively and individually will be referred to as SOFTWARE.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA"), DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This EULA grants you the following license:
· You may use the SOFTWARE as installed on the DEVICE and as otherwise interfacing with systems and/or services provide by or through FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third party software and service providers.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Appendices
461
DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS:
· Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE includes speech recognition component(s), you should understand that speech recognition is an inherently statistical process and that recognition errors are inherent in the process. Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process.
· Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and Disassembly: You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation.
· Limitations on Distributing, Copying, Modifying and Creating Derivative Works: You may not distribute, copy, make modifications to or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation.
· Single EULA: The end user documentation for the DEVICE and related systems and services may contain multiple EULAs, such as multiple translations and/or multiple media versions (e.g., in the user documentation and in the software). Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you are licensed to use only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE.
· SOFTWARE Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer of the DEVICE, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, and, if applicable, the Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer must include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
· Termination: Without prejudice to any other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY or MS may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
462
Appendices
· Security Updates/Digital Rights Management: Content owners use the WMDRM technology included in your DEVICE to protect their intellectual property, included copyrighted content. Portions of the SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use WMDRM software to access WMDRM-protected content. If the WMDRM software fails to protect the content, content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the SOFTWARE's ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected content. This action does not affect unprotected content. When your DEVICE downloads licenses for protected content, you agree that Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses. Content owners may require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE on your DEVICE to access their content. If you decline an upgrade, you will not be able to access content that requires the upgrade.
· Consent to Use of Data: You agree that MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may collect and use technical information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services. MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and services suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may use this information solely to improve their products or to provide customized services or technologies to you. MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may disclose this information to others, but not in a form that personally identifies you.
· Internet-Based Services Components: The SOFTWARE may contain components that enable and facilitate the use of certain Internet-based services. You acknowledge and agree that MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may automatically check the version of the SOFTWARE and/or its components that you are utilizing and may provide upgrades or supplements to the SOFTWARE that may be automatically downloaded to your DEVICE.
· Additional Software/Services: The SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent to provide or make available to you SOFTWARE updates, supplements, add-on components, or Internet-based services components of the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the SOFTWARE ("Supplemental Components").
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Appendices
463
If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party software and services suppliers provide or make available to you Supplemental Components and no other EULA terms are provided along with the Supplemental Components, then the terms of this EULA shall apply.
If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent make available Supplemental Components, and no other EULA terms are provided, then the terms of this EULA shall apply, except that the MS, Microsoft Corporation or affiliate entity providing the Supplemental Component(s) shall be the licensor of the Supplemental Component(s).
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent reserve the right to discontinue without liability any Internet-based services provided to you or made available to you through the use of the SOFTWARE.
· Links to Third Party Sites: The MS SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to link to third party sites through the use of the SOFTWARE. The third party sites are not under the control of MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent. Neither MS nor Microsoft Corporation nor their affiliates nor their designated agent are responsible for (i) the contents of any third party sites, any links contained in third party sites, or any changes or updates to third party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any other form of transmission received from any third party sites. If the SOFTWARE provides links to third party sites, those links are provided to you only as a convenience, and the inclusion of any link does not imply an endorsement of the third party site by MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent.
· Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You recognize your obligation to drive responsibly and keep attention on the road. You will read and abide with the DEVICE operating instructions particularly as they pertain to safety and assumes any risk associated with the use of the DEVICE.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY separate from the DEVICE on media such as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade Purposes Only" or For Recovery Purposes Only you may install one (1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE as a replacement copy for the existing SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with this EULA, including any additional EULA terms accompanying the upgrade SOFTWARE.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
464
Appendices
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and "applets," incorporated into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed materials, and any copies of the SOFTWARE, are owned by MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or their affiliates or suppliers. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use of the SOFTWARE is the property of the respective content owner and may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no rights to use such content. All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service providers, their affiliates and suppliers. Use of any on-line services which may be accessed through the SOFTWARE may be governed by the respective terms of use relating to such services. If this SOFTWARE contains documentation that is provided only in electronic form, you may print one copy of such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is subject to U.S. and European Union export jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. For additional information, see http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft Corporation, third party software or service providers, their affiliates or suppliers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS, its parent corporation Microsoft Corporation, or their affiliates or subsidiaries. For product support, please refer to FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in the documentation for the DEVICE. Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason, please refer to the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICE.
No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Appendices
465
SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR THEIR AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.$250.00).
· THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY EXPRESSLY BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW VEHICLE.
End user notice
Microsoft® Windows® Mobile for Automotive Important Safety Information
This system Ford SYNCTM contains software that is licensed to Manufacturer FORD MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of Microsoft Corporation pursuant to a license agreement. Any removal, reproduction, reverse engineering or other unauthorized use of the software from this system in violation of the license agreement is strictly prohibited and may subject you to legal action.
Read and follow instructions
Before using your Windows Automotive-based system, read and follow all instructions and safety information provided in this end user manual ("User's Guide"). Not following precautions found in this User's Guide can lead to an accident or other serious consequences.
Keep User's Guide in Vehicle
When kept in the vehicle, the User's Guide will be a ready reference for you and other users unfamiliar with the Windows Automotive-based system. Please make certain that before using the system for the first time, all persons have access to the User's Guide and read its instructions and safety information carefully.
WARNING: Operating certain parts of this system while driving can distract your attention away from the road, and possibly cause an accident or other serious consequences. Do not change system settings or enter data non-verbally (using your hands) while driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting these operations. This is important since while setting up or changing some functions you might be required to distract your attention away from the road and remove your hands from the wheel.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
466
Appendices
General operation
Voice Command Control
Functions within the Windows Automotive-based system may be accomplished using only voice commands. Using voice commands while driving allows you to operate the system without removing your hands from the wheel.
Prolonged Views of Screen
Do not access any function requiring a prolonged view of the screen while you are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Even occasional short scans to the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving task at a critical time.
Volume Setting
Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these sounds could cause an accident.
Use of Speech Recognition Functions
Speech recognition software is inherently a statistical process which is subject to errors. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system and address any errors.
Navigation Features
Any navigation features included in the system are intended to provide turn by turn instructions to get you to a desired destination. Please make certain all persons using this system carefully read and follow instructions and safety information fully.
Distraction Hazard
Any navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can seriously distract your attention and could cause an accident or other serious consequences. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting these operations.
Let Your Judgment Prevail
Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations. Any such feature is not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by this system should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Appendices
467
Route Safety
Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions.
Potential Map Inaccuracy
Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following the suggested routes.
Emergency Services
Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency services. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for these locations. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such navigation features.
TeleNav Software End User License Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions carefully before you use the TeleNav Software. Your use of the TeleNav Software indicates that you accept these terms and conditions. If you do not accept these terms and conditions, do not break the seal of the package, launch, or otherwise use the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and the privacy policy at any time, with or without notice to you. You agree to visit http://www.telenav.com from time to time to review the then current version of this Agreement and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use You acknowledge that devoting attention to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk of injury or death to you and others in situations that otherwise require your undivided attention, and you therefore agree to comply with the following when using the TeleNav Software: (a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely; (b) use your own personal judgment while driving. If you feel that a route suggested by the TeleNav Software instructs you to perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver, places you in an unsafe situation, or directs you into an area that you consider to be unsafe, do not follow such instructions; (c) do not input destinations, or otherwise manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless your vehicle is stationary and parked; (d) do not use the TeleNav Software for
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
468
Appendices
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any manner inconsistent with this Agreement; (e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices and cables necessary for use of the TeleNav Software in a secure manner in your vehicle so that they will not interfere with your driving and will not prevent the operation of any safety device (such as an airbag). You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav harmless against all claims resulting from any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use of the TeleNav Software in any moving vehicle, including as a result of your failure to comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information You agree: (a) when registering the TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with true, accurate, current, and complete information about yourself, and (b) to inform TeleNav promptly of any changes to such information, and to keep it true, accurate, current and complete.
3. Software License Subject to your compliance with the terms of this Agreement, TeleNav hereby grants to you a personal, non-exclusive, non-transferable license (except as expressly permitted below in connection with your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software license), without the right to sublicense, to use the TeleNav Software (in object code form only) in order to access and use the TeleNav Software. This license shall terminate upon any termination or expiration of this Agreement. You agree that you will use the TeleNav Software only for your personal business or leisure purposes, and not to provide commercial navigation services to other parties.
3.1 License limitations You agree not to do any of the following: (a) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, translate, modify, alter or otherwise change the TeleNav Software or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive the source code, audio library or structure of the TeleNav Software without the prior express written consent of TeleNav; (c) remove from the TeleNav Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or its suppliers' trademarks, trade names, logos, patent or copyright notices, or other notices or markings; (d) distribute, sublicense or otherwise transfer the TeleNav Software to others, except as part of your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software; or (e) use the TeleNav Software in any manner that (i) infringes the intellectual property or proprietary rights, rights of publicity or privacy or other rights of any party, (ii) violates any law, statute, ordinance or regulation, including but not limited to laws and regulations related to spamming, privacy, consumer and child protection, obscenity or defamation, or (iii) is harmful, threatening, abusive, harassing,
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Appendices
469
tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, or otherwise objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or otherwise permit unauthorized access by third parties to the TeleNav Software without advanced written permission of TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers To the fullest extent permissible pursuant to applicable law, in no event will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, or agents or employees of any of the foregoing, be liable for any decision made or action taken by you or anyone else in reliance on the information provided by the TeleNav Software. TeleNav also does not warrant the accuracy of the map or other data used for the TeleNav Software. Such data may not always reflect reality due to, among other things, road closures, construction, weather, new roads and other changing conditions. You are responsible for the entire risk arising out of your use of the TeleNav Software. For example but without limitation, you agree not to rely on the TeleNav Software for critical navigation in areas where the well-being or survival of you or others is dependent on the accuracy of navigation, as the maps or functionality of the TeleNav Software are not intended to support such high risk applications, especially in more remote geographical areas. TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not permit the disclaimer of certain warranties, so this limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES (INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
470
Appendices
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law You agree that any dispute, claim or controversy arising out of or relating to this Agreement or the TeleNav Software shall be settled by independent arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator and administered by the American Arbitration Association in the County of Santa Clara, California. The arbitrator shall apply the Commercial Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association, and the judgment upon the award rendered by the arbitrator may be entered by any court having jurisdiction. Note that there is no judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding and the decision of the arbitrator shall be binding upon both parties. You expressly agree to waive your right to a jury trial. This Agreement and performance hereunder will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, without giving effect to its conflict of laws provisions. To the extent judicial action is necessary in connection with the binding arbitration, both TeleNav and you agree to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the County of Santa Clara, California. The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply.
7. Assignment You may not resell, assign, or transfer this Agreement or any of your rights or obligations, except in totality, in connection with your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software, and expressly conditioned upon the new user of the TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound by the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or transfer that is not expressly permitted under this paragraph will result in immediate termination of this Agreement, without liability to TeleNav, in which case you and all other parties shall immediately cease all use of the TeleNav Software. Notwithstanding the foregoing, TeleNav may assign this Agreement to any other party at any time without notice, provided the assignee remains bound by this Agreement.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Appendices
471
8. Miscellaneous 8.1 This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between TeleNav and you with respect to the subject matter hereof. 8.2 Except for the limited licenses expressly granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains all right, title and interest in and to the TeleNav Software, including without limitation all related intellectual property rights. No licenses or other rights which are not expressly granted in this Agreement are intended to, or shall be, granted or conferred by implication, statute, inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors hereby reserve all of their respective rights other than the licenses explicitly granted in this Agreement. 8.3 By using the TeleNav Software, you consent to receive from TeleNav all communications, including notices, agreements, legally required disclosures or other information in connection with the TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices") electronically. TeleNav may provide such Notices by posting them on TeleNav's Website or by downloading such Notices to your wireless device. If you desire to withdraw your consent to receive Notices electronically, you must discontinue your use of the TeleNav Software. 8.4 TeleNav's or your failure to require performance of any provision shall not affect that party's right to require performance at any time thereafter, nor shall a waiver of any breach or default of this Agreement constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach or default or a waiver of the provision itself. 8.5 If any provision herein is held unenforceable, then such provision will be modified to reflect the intention of the parties, and the remaining provisions of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect. 8.6 The headings in this Agreement are for convenience of reference only, will not be deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and will not be referred to in connection with the construction or interpretation of this Agreement. As used in this Agreement, the words "include" and "including," and variations thereof, will not be deemed to be terms of limitation, but rather will be deemed to be followed by the words "without limitation."
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
472
Appendices
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions The TeleNav Software utilizes map and other data licensed to TeleNav by third party vendors for the benefit of you and other end users. This Agreement includes end-user terms applicable to these companies (included at the end of this Agreement), and thus your use of the TeleNav Software is also subject to such terms. You agree to comply with the following additional terms and conditions, which are applicable to TeleNav's third party vendor licensors:
NavTeq End User License Agreement
END USER TERMS
The content provided ("Data") is licensed, not sold. By opening this package, or installing, copying, or otherwise using the Data, you agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. If you do not agree to the terms of this agreement, you are not permitted to install, copy, use, resell or transfer the Data. If you wish to reject the terms of this agreement, and have not installed, copied, or used the Data, you must contact your retailer or NAVTEQ North America, LLC ("NT") within thirty (30) days of purchase for a refund of your purchase price. To contact NT, please visit www.navteq.com.
The Data is provided for your personal, internal use only and may not be resold. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following terms (this "End User License Agreement") and conditions which are agreed to by you, on the one hand, and NAVTEQ North America, LLC ("NT") and its licensors (including their licensors and suppliers) on the other hand.
The Data for areas of Canada includes information taken with permission from Canadian authorities, including: Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, Queen's Printer for Ontario, Canada Post Corporation, GeoBase ®.
NT holds a nonexclusive license from the United States Postal Service ® to publish and sell ZIP+4 ® information.
United States Postal Service ® 2009. Prices are not established, controlled or approved by the United States Postal Service ®. The following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS: United States Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.
The Data for Mexico includes certain Data from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Appendices
473
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
License Limitations on Use: You agree that your license to use this Data is limited to and conditioned on use for solely personal, noncommercial purposes, and not for service bureau, timesharing or other similar purposes. Except as otherwise set forth herein, you agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or reverse engineer any portion of this Data, and may not transfer or distribute it in any form, for any purpose, except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws.
License Limitations on Transfer: Your limited license does not allow transfer or resale of the Data, except on the condition that you may transfer the Data and all accompanying materials on a permanent basis if: (a) you retain no copies of the Data; (b) the recipient agrees to the terms of this End User License Agreement; and (c) you transfer the Data in the exact same form as you purchased it by physically transferring the original media (e.g., the CD-ROM or DVD you purchased), all original packaging, all Manuals and other documentation. Specifically, Multi-disc sets may only be transferred or sold as a complete set as provided to you and not as a subset thereof.
Additional License Limitations: Except where you have been specifically licensed to do so by NT in a separate written agreement, and without limiting the preceding paragraph, your license is conditioned on use of the Data as prescribed in this agreement, and you may not (a) use this Data with any products, systems, or applications installed or otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles capable of vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real time route guidance, fleet management or similar applications; or (b) with, or in communication with, including without limitation, cellular phones, palmtop and handheld computers, pagers, and personal digital assistants or PDAs.
WARNING: This Data may contain inaccurate or incomplete information due to the passage of time, changing circumstances, sources used and the nature of collecting comprehensive geographic Data, any of which may lead to incorrect results.
No Warranty: This Data is provided to you "as is", and you agree to use it at your own risk. NT and its licensors (and their licensors and suppliers) make no guarantees, representations or warranties of any kind, express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, content, quality, accuracy, completeness, effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness, use or results to be obtained from this Data, or that the Data or server will be uninterrupted or error free.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
474
Appendices
Disclaimer of Warranty: NT AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States, Territories and Countries do not allow certain warranty exclusions, so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: NT AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THIS DATA; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DATA, ANY DEFECT IN THIS DATA, OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF NT OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some States, Territories and Countries do not allow certain liability exclusions or damages limitations, so to that extent the above may not apply to you.
Export Control: You agree not to export from anywhere any part of the Data or any direct product thereof except in compliance with, and with all licenses and approvals required under, applicable export laws, rules and regulations, including but not limited to the laws, rules and regulations administered by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the U.S. Department of Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S. Department of Commerce. To the extent that any such export laws, rules or regulations prohibit NT from complying with any of its obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall be excused and shall not constitute a breach of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement: These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between NT (and its licensors, including their licensors and suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Appendices
475
Severability: You and NT agree that if any portion of this agreement is found illegal or unenforceable, that portion shall be severed and the remainder of the Agreement shall be given full force and effect.
Governing Law: The above terms and conditions shall be governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, without giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations Convention for Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to the personal jurisdiction of the State of Illinois for any and all disputes, claims and actions arising from or in connection with the Data provided to you hereunder.
Government End Users: If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf of the United States government or any other entity seeking or applying rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United States government, this Data is a "commercial item" as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. ("FAR") 2.101, is licensed in accordance with this End User License Agreement, and each copy of Data delivered or otherwise furnished shall be marked and embedded as appropriate with the following "Notice of Use", and be treated in accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER)
NAME:
NAVTEQ
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER)
ADDRESS:
425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, IL 60606.
This Data is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101
and is subject to the EndUser License Agreement under
which this Data was provided. 2011 NAVTEQ. All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official refuses to use the legend provided herein, the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official must notify NAVTEQ prior to seeking additional or alternative rights in the Data.
Wi-Fi hotspot data provided by JiWire 2013 JiWire.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
476
Appendices
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music -- related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright 20002007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright 20002007 Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more of the following U.S. Patents #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the Powered by GracenoteTM logo are trademarks of Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement (EULA)
This device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street Emeryville, California 94608 ("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the "Gracenote Software") enables this device to do disc and music file identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track, and title information ("Gracenote Data") from online servers ("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End User functions of this device
This device may contain content belonging to Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the restrictions set forth herein with respect to Gracenote Data shall also apply to such content and such content providers shall be entitled to all of the benefits and protections set forth herein that are available to Gracenote.
You agree that you will use the content from Gracenote ("Gracenote Content"), Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal, non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag associated with a music file) to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your licenses terminate, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote,
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Appendices
477
respectively, reserve all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will either Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide, including any copyrighted material or music file information. You agree that Gracenote may enforce its respective rights, collectively or separately, under this agreement against you, directly in each company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow Gracenote to count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page at www.gracenote.com for the Gracenote Privacy Policy
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO YOU "AS IS." NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER.
Gracenote 2007
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
478
Appendices
Adobe
Contains Adobe® [Flash® Player] or [AIR®] technology by Adobe Systems Incorporated. This [Licensee Product] contains [Adobe® Flash® Player] [Adobe® AIR®] software under license from Adobe Systems Incorporated, Copyright 1995-2009 Adobe Macromedia Software LLC. All rights reserved. Adobe, Flash and AIR are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
FCC ID: KMHSYNCG2 IC: 1422A-SYNCG2
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Index
479
911 AssistTM ......................353, 430
A
ABS (see Brakes) .....................189 Accessing and using your USB port ....................................408 Accessing call history/phone book during active call .............343 Accessing your calendar ..........429 Accessing your media menu features ......................................365 Accessing your phone menu features ......................................344
Accessory delay ..........................96
Active call menu options .........343
Active Park Assist .....................196
Adding (pairing) a phone ........416
Advanced menu options ...351, 372
Advanced menu options (prompts, languages, defaults, master reset, installing applications) ..............................351
Airbag supplemental restraint system ..........................................44
and child safety seats ..............46 description ................................44 disposal ......................................54 driver airbag ..............................44 passenger airbag .......................44 side airbag ...........................44, 50
Air cleaner filter .......260261, 309
Air conditioning ........................141 manual heating and air conditioning system ...............141
Air filter .....................................261
Air filter, cabin ..........................149
Ambient mood/lighting .......93, 436 Ambulance packages ..................15 AM/FM .......................................395 Antifreeze (see Engine coolant) ................252 Anti-lock brake system (see Brakes) ..............................189 Anti-theft system ........................78
arming the system ..............78, 80 disarming a triggered system ..80
AppLinkTM .................................360
Audio system Single CD ........124, 126, 129, 132
Audio system (see Radio) ........124, 126, 129, 132
Automatic transmission fluid, adding ............................255 fluid, checking ........................255 fluid, refill capacities ..............306 fluid, specification ..................306 Selectshift (SST) ....................181
Auxiliary Input Jack .................404
Auxiliary input jack (Line in) ..135
Auxiliary powerpoint ................161
A/V inputs ..........................137, 412
Axle refill capacities ........................306
B
Battery .......................................257 acid, treating emergencies .....257 jumping a disabled battery ....227 maintenance-free ....................257 replacement, specifications ...309 servicing ..................................257
Booster seats ...............................22
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
480
Index
Brakes ........................................188 anti-lock ...................................189 anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning light ...........................189 brake warning light ................189 fluid, checking and adding ....256 fluid, refill capacities ..............306 fluid, specifications .................306 lubricant specifications ..........306 parking ....................................189 shift interlock ..........................182
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ..........................................306
Cargo area shade ......................210
CD ......................124, 126, 129, 132
CD player ..........................122, 406
CD voice commands .................407
Cell phone use ............................16
Changing a tire .........................299
Changing the air filter ..............261
Child safety restraints ................27
Child safety seats attaching with tether straps ....29 automatic locking mode (retractor) .................................36 LATCH .......................................27
Child safety seats booster seats ...............................22
Cleaning the touchscreen ........383
Cleaning your vehicle ...............270 engine compartment ..............272 instrument panel ....................274 interior .....................................273 plastic parts ............................271
washing ....................................270 waxing .....................................272 wheels ......................................275 wiper blades ............................273
Climate control (see Air conditioning or Heating) ..........141
Climate voice commands .........447
Clock ..................124, 126, 129, 434
Clutch operation while driving ..........184 recommended shift speeds ....184
Console ......................................162 overhead ..................................162
Coolant ......................................252 checking and adding ..............252 refill capacities ........................306 specifications ..........................306
Customer Assistance ................225 Ford Extended Service Plan ..................................314, 316 Getting roadside assistance ...225 Getting the service you need .........................................230 Ordering additional owner's literature ...................236 Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program ...................................234
D
Defrost ...............................141, 143 rear window ............................148
Dipstick automatic transmission fluid ..........................................255 engine oil .................................251
Display settings .........................435
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Index
481
Doors central unlocking ......................70
Driving under special conditions ..................................183
through water .........................222
Dual automatic temperature control (DATC) .........................143
E
Eco Mode ..................................207
Electronic message center .......107
Electronic stability control ......192
Emergencies, roadside jump-starting ..........................227 running out of fuel .................171
Emission control system ..........175
End user license agreement ....460
Engine ........................................305 cleaning ...................................272 coolant .....................................252 idle speed control ...................257 lubrication specifications .......306 refill capacities ........................306 service points ..........................250
Engine block heater .................166
Engine fan .................................250
Engine oil checking and adding ..............251 dipstick ....................................251 filter, specifications ................309 refill capacities ........................306 specifications ..........................306
Event data recording ..................12
Exhaust fumes ..........................166
Fleet MyKey programming ........64
Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) .........................................168
Floor mats .................................223
Fluid capacities .........................306
Fog lamps ....................................91
Forward and reverse sensing system ........................................194
Fuel capacity ...................................306 choosing the right fuel ...........170 filler funnel .............................171 filling your vehicle with fuel ..................................173 filter, specifications ........256, 309 fuel pump shut-off ..................226 octane rating ...........................171 quality ......................................170 running out of fuel .................171 safety information relating to automotive fuels .....................168
Fuel and distance computer ....110 outside temperature indicator ..................................110 to empty indicator ..................110 trip distance ............................110 trip/reset button .....................110
Fuel - flex fuel vehicle (FFV) .................................168, 170
Fuses ..........................238239, 245
G
F Fan, Engine Cooling .................250
Gauges .......................................101 odometer .................................110 trip odometer ..........................110
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
482
Index
H
Jump-starting your vehicle ......227
Hazard flashers .........................226 HD RadioTM ...............................398 Headlamps
aiming ......................................262 bulb specifications ..................269 flash to pass ..............................88 high beam .................................88 replacing bulbs ...............263264 Head restraints .........................152 Heated steering wheel ..............445 Heating ..............................141, 143 Help ............................................444 Hill start assist ..........................186 Hood ..........................................249 How to use voice commands ...387
I
Ignition .......................................164 Illuminated visor mirror .............98 Information displays .................107 Inspection/maintenance (I/M) testing ........................................177 Instrument panel
cleaning ...................................274 cluster ......................................102 Intelligent Access Key ................57
J
Jack ............................................299 positioning ...............................299 storage .....................................299
Joining two calls (multiparty/conference call) ....343
K
Keyless entry system autolock .....................................74
Keys .......................................56, 78 positions of the ignition .........164
L
Lamps bulb replacement specifications chart ................269 fog lamps ...................................91 headlamps, flash to pass ..........88 interior lamps ...........................91 replacing bulbs ...............263264
LATCH anchors ...........................27
Lights, warning and indicator ..102
Listening to music ....................393
Load limits .................................210
Locks autolock .....................................74 childproof ..................................32 doors ..........................................70
Lubricant specifications ...........306
Lug nuts ....................................303
M
Making and receiving calls .......416
Manual transmission .................184 fluid capacities ........................306 lubricant specifications ..........306 reverse .....................................185
MAP DVD - Loading and Unloading ..................................416
Map icons ..................................456
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Index
483
Map mode ..................................454 Map preferences .......................453 Map updates ..............................457 Media Bluetooth menu options (adding, connecting, deleting, turning on/off) ..........................370 Message center .........................107
warning messages ...................111 Mirrors ...................................96, 98
fold away ...................................96 side view mirrors (power) .......96 Moon roof ....................................98 Motorcraft® parts .............270, 309 MyFord TouchTM system ..........380 MyKey ..........................................64
N
Navigation features ...................448 Navigation voice commands ....458 Notifications ..............................429
O
Octane rating ............................171
P
Pairing other phones ........340, 416 Pairing your phone ...................415 Pairing your phone for the first time ............................339, 415 Parental MyKey programming ...64 Park Assist ................................196 Parking brake ............................189
Parts (see Motorcraft® parts) ..........309 Phone Bluetooth menu options (adding, connecting, deleting, turning on/off) ..........................350 Phone redial ..............................344 Phone settings ..................420, 441 Phone voice commands ............421 Playing music (by artist, album, genre, playlist, tracks, similar) ..........................368 POI categories ...........................450 Point of Interest (POI) .............450 Power distribution box (see Fuses) ...............................239 Power door locks ........................70 Power mirrors .............................96 Powerpoint ................................161 Power steering ..........................208
fluid, refill capacity ................306 fluid, specifications .................306 Power Windows ...........................94 Privacy information ..........336, 386 Push button start system .........164 Putting a call on/off hold .........343
Q
Quick touch buttons .................457
R
Radio ..................124, 126, 129, 132 AM/FM .....................................395 Single CD ........124, 126, 129, 132
Radio reception .........................122
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
484
Index
Radio voice commands .............396
Rear view camera display ................................201, 436
Rear window defroster .....141, 143
Receiving a text message .............................346, 419
Recommendations for attaching safety restraints for children ..................................24
Relays ................................238239
Remote entry system illuminated entry ................7475 locking/unlocking doors ...........71 opening the trunk .....................72 replacing the batteries .............58
Roadside assistance ..................225
Route preferences ....................453
S
Safety Belt Maintenance ............41
Safety belts (see Safety restraints) .........35, 38
Safety defects, reporting ..........237
Safety information ............335, 384
Safety restraints ..............3536, 38 Belt-Minder® ............................38 extension assembly ..................37 for adults .............................3536 for children .........................19, 24 safety belt maintenance ...........41 seat belt maintenance ..............41 warning light and chime ..........38
Safety restraints LATCH anchors ...........................27
Safety seats for children ......19, 24
Safety Compliance Certification Label ....................311
Satellite Radio ...................129, 401
Scheduled Maintenance Guide Normal Scheduled Maintenance and Log .............322
SD card ......................137, 408, 448
Seat belts (see Safety restraints) ...............35
Seats child safety seats ................19, 24 heated ......................................158
SecuriLock passive anti-theft system ..........................................78
Selecting your media source (USB, Line in, BT audio) .........365
Sending new text messages .....418
Setting a destination ................448
Setting a destination by voice .....................................449
Settings ......................................434
Setting the clock ..............124, 126, 129, 434
Side air curtain ...........................51
Side-curtain airbags system .......51
SIRIUS® satellite radio ....129, 401
SIRIUS satellite radio voice commands .................................402
SIRIUS Travel Link ...................426
SIRIUS Travel Link voice commands .................................428
Snowplowing ...............................15
SOS Post Crash Alert .................44
Spark plugs, specifications .......309
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Index
485
Special notice ambulance conversions ............15
Specification chart, lubricants ...................................306 Stability system .........................192 Starting your vehicle ................165
jump starting ..........................227 push button start system .......164
Steering wheel ............................81 controls ......................................82 tilting .........................................81
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (see airbags) ....................44
Supported media file types ......411
Supported player, media formats and metadata information ................................411
SYNC® AppLinkTM ...................360
SYNC® customer support ..............................335, 384
SYNC® Services ................358, 422
System settings .........................437
T
Temperature control (see Climate control) ..............141,
143, 445
Text messaging .................346, 418
Text messaging (sending, downloading, deleting) .....346, 348
Tilt steering wheel ......................81
Tires ...........................279280, 299 alignment ................................293 care ..........................................279 changing ..........................299, 301 checking the pressure ............289
inflating ...................................287 label .........................................286 replacing ..................................291 rotating ....................................293 safety practices .......................292 sidewall information ...............282 snow tires and chains ............294 spare tire .................................299 terminology .............................281 tire grades ...............................280 treadwear ........................280, 289
Touchscreen features (climate) ....................................445
Towing .......................................217 recreational towing .................218 trailer towing ..........................217 wrecker ....................................217
Traction control ........................190
Traffic, Directions and Information ................................358
Traffic preferences ...................453
Transmission brake-shift interlock (BSI) ........................................182 fluid, checking and adding (automatic) .............................255 fluid, checking and adding (manual) .................................255 fluid, refill capacities ..............306 lubricant specifications ..........306
Trunk .....................................7576 remote release ..........................72
Turn signal ..................................91
U
USB port ............................137, 408
Using privacy mode ..................343
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
486
Index
V
W
Vehicle health report ........356, 432
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ..........................................310
Vehicle loading ..........................210
Ventilating your vehicle ...........166
Voice commands in media mode ..........................................363
Voice commands in phone mode ..........................................340
Voice recognition ......................386
Warning lights (see Lights) .....102
Washer fluid ......................256257
Water, Driving through .............222
Windows power .........................................94 rear wiper/washer .....................86
Windshield washer fluid and wipers
checking and adding fluid ..................................256257 replacing wiper blades ...........259
Wrecker towing .........................217
2013 Focus (foc) Owners Guide gf, 2nd Printing, November 2012 USA (fus)
Acrobat Distiller 8.0.0 (Windows)